Z Macros

Macro
Reference
Manual for
Macro Reference Manual

for Z-MAP Plus/ZCL
2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation
Part No. 161336
October 2003
2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation

All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation
Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone: 713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2401
Web: www.lgc.com
Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3Dview, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, ADC,
ARIES, Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat,
CDDM, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant, Corporate Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, DataStar, DBPlot,
Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace
Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace TrackPlanner,
DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme,
DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drillability Suite,
DrillModel, DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube,
EdgeCa$h, eLandmark, Engineer's Desktop, EOS-PAK, EPM, Executive Assistant, FastTrack, FZAP!,
GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix (stylized), GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus,
GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, Landmark, Landmark and Design,
Landmark logo and Design, LandScape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep,
Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIRA, Model Builder, MultiWell, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks,
OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenOrigin, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks,
OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus,
Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PowerView, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAGIC, ProMAX,
ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, QUICKDIF,
QUIKCDP, QUIKDIG, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, Real Freedom,
Real-Time Asset Management Center, Real-Time Asset Management Centre, Real Time Knowledge Company,
Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace,
SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks MultiView, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisXchange, Sierra,
Sierra (design), SigmaView, SimResults, SIVA, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StrataAmp, StrataSim,
StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, Surf & Connect, SynTool, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, Team Workspace, TeamView, TERAS,
Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VIP,
VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement,
VIP-THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Web OpenWorks, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, Xsource, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus
are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Landmark
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL
Contents
Macro Reference Manual

for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL
Introduction..................................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................
Uses of Macros............................................................................................
Types of Macros ..........................................................................................
About This Guide..............................................................................................
Purpose of and Audience for This Guide..................................................
Contents of This Guide...............................................................................
Typographic Conventions ..........................................................................
Related Documentation ..............................................................................
Macro Descriptions ...............................................................................
Introduction.......................................................................................................
Macro Description Table ..................................................................................
Macros Called by Menu Options .....................................................................
12
Macros Menu ...............................................................................................
12
Macros: Quick-look Menu .....................................................................
13
Macros: Graphics Menu ........................................................................
13
Macros: Operations Menu.....................................................................
14
Macros: Geophysics Menu ...................................................................
14
Macros: Utilities Menu...........................................................................
15
R2003.12.0
Contents
iii
Landmark
Macro Descriptions ..........................................................................................
15
Information Included in Macro Descriptions ............................................
15
Macro Name ...........................................................................................
16
Menu Option...........................................................................................
16
Purpose ..................................................................................................
16
Description .............................................................................................
16
Results....................................................................................................
16
Technical Notes .....................................................................................
16
Prompt and Parameter Descriptions....................................................
17
Description........................................................................................
18
Macro Parameter ..............................................................................
18
Options for ETEXT Type Parameter................................................
19
Data Type ..........................................................................................
19
Range ................................................................................................
20
Default Value.....................................................................................
21
ZCL Processes Used .............................................................................
21
Additional Information ................................................................................
22
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA.........................................................................................
23
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID.........................................................................................
26
APPEND-XY.......................................................................................................
28
AREA-DEPTH ....................................................................................................
32
BUBBLE-POSTING ...........................................................................................
40
CHANGE-MFD-NAME .......................................................................................
49
CLEAN ...............................................................................................................
50
COLOR-BAR......................................................................................................
51
COLOR-CONTOURS .........................................................................................
60
CONTOUR-WINDOW.........................................................................................
72
R2003.12.0
Contents
iv
Landmark
CONVERT-DMS-DEG ........................................................................................
78
DATA-BLANK.....................................................................................................
82
DATA-ENUMERATION.......................................................................................
85
DATA-HISTORY .................................................................................................
88
DATA-PROFILES ...............................................................................................
90
DATA-SUMMARY...............................................................................................
97
DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE........................................................................................
99
DIP-PLOT-DATA .................................................................................................
100
DIP-PLOT-GRID .................................................................................................
105
ENVELOPE ........................................................................................................
110
Summary of the ENVELOPE Macro...........................................................
111
Understanding the ENVELOPE Macro ......................................................
112
Modeling the Envelope Control Parameters .............................................
115
Discontinuity Use ..................................................................................
115
Discontinuity Generalization Tolerance ..............................................
116
Quantized Contours ..............................................................................
116
Map Design Parameters ........................................................................
117
File Saving..............................................................................................
118
Framework Logic ........................................................................................
119
Minimal Input Requirements.................................................................
119
File Saving..............................................................................................
120
Gross Rock Volume Modeling ..............................................................
120
Graphical Outputs .................................................................................
121
Other Volumetric Evaluations ....................................................................
125
EVALUATE-CONGRID.......................................................................................
154
EVALUATE-POLYN............................................................................................
157
EXPORT-CPS-FILE............................................................................................
167
R2003.12.0
Contents
Landmark
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE............................................................................................
169
FASTCONTOURMAP ........................................................................................
171
FASTMAPFROMGRID .......................................................................................
174
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS ...................................................................................
177
FAULT-BALANCER............................................................................................
182
FAULT-CONTOURS ...........................................................................................
186
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL .........................................................................................
197
FAULT-MIGRATION............................................................................................
202
FAULT-PROFILING ............................................................................................
208
FAULT-SHRINKER .............................................................................................
214
FIELD-LISTING..................................................................................................
223
FILL-BORDER ...................................................................................................
225
FISHNET-PLOT ..................................................................................................
227
GEOSORT..........................................................................................................
239
GRIDANDMAPX ................................................................................................
242
GRID-LT-EQ-GT .................................................................................................
246
GRID-TO-SEISMIC ............................................................................................
249
HAND-CONTOUR ..............................................................................................
252
IMPORT-CPS-FILE ............................................................................................
257
IMPORT-GRID....................................................................................................
268
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE.............................................................................................
273
INTERPOLATION ..............................................................................................
275
LABL-FOUR-CRNS ...........................................................................................
277
R2003.12.0
Contents
vi
Landmark
LEASE-DRAWING .............................................................................................
281
Technical Notes...........................................................................................
283
Preparing Lease Polygon (Vertex) Files ..............................................
283
Segment I.D. Field ............................................................................
283
Area Identification Field...................................................................
283
Color Code Field...............................................................................
283
Preparing Lease Identification (Text) Files..........................................
284
Text Fields (Required)......................................................................
284
Area Identification Field (Required)................................................
285
Area Symbol Code Field (Optional) ................................................
286
Segment I.D. Field (Optional) ..........................................................
287
Color Code Fields (Optional)...........................................................
287
Z Fields (Optional)............................................................................
287
Lease Drawing Hints .............................................................................
288
Activating Shared Lease Attributes .....................................................
288
LINE-GRID-PLUS ..............................................................................................
295
LIST-CPS-FILE...................................................................................................
312
MAKEMAPGENERAL .......................................................................................
313
NADCONCV.......................................................................................................
314
NEW-CONTOUR ................................................................................................
318
NIV-DATA ...........................................................................................................
330
NIV-GRIDS .........................................................................................................
336
PATCH-GRID......................................................................................................
343
PENETRATE-GRIDS .........................................................................................
346
PENETRATE-ONEGRD .....................................................................................
354
R2003.12.0
Contents
vii
Landmark
PICT-AND-PST-DLS...........................................................................................
358
PICT-AND-PST-NTS...........................................................................................
366
PICT-NTS-DLS ...................................................................................................
385
PICTURE-STATS ...............................................................................................
394
POLYGON-CLOSE ............................................................................................
395
POLYGON-FILL .................................................................................................
397
POST-DLS..........................................................................................................
399
POST-LINE.........................................................................................................
403
POST-NTS..........................................................................................................
407
POST-NTS-DLS .................................................................................................
423
POST-PIC-STATS...............................................................................................
441
POST-STAR .......................................................................................................
445
PROFILE-CONTOURS ......................................................................................
468
QUALITY ............................................................................................................
496
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS .....................................................................................
504
QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL.......................................................................................
508
REDUCE-POSTING ...........................................................................................
512
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID .......................................................................................
516
RMLOCK............................................................................................................
519
SHADE-POLYGONS..........................................................................................
520
SPAWN-PROCESS ............................................................................................
524
SPECIFY-CONTOURS ......................................................................................
526
START ................................................................................................................
533
STRATATHICKNESS .........................................................................................
534
Technical Notes...........................................................................................
535
Technical Approach...............................................................................
536
R2003.12.0
Contents
viii
Landmark
SURFCORRECT ................................................................................................
539
Summary......................................................................................................
540
Production Geology ..............................................................................
540
Basin Studies .........................................................................................
541
Stratigraphic/Reservoir Framework Building......................................
541
Understanding the SURFCORRECT Macro .........................................
543
Method of Macro Application (MMETHOD) ....................................
543
Quality Control Data File (OPRSDAT) .............................................
545
SURFACE-INTRSECT .......................................................................................
557
SURFACEPIC.....................................................................................................
566
Parameters for constructing first surface.................................................
569
Parameters for constructing second surface...........................................
571
Parameters for constructing second surface...........................................
573
THREED-T-TO-D ................................................................................................
575
Technical Notes...........................................................................................
576
Preparing the Three-Dimensional Grid................................................
576
TIME-SLICE .......................................................................................................
580
TRANSFORM-COORDS....................................................................................
585
TREND-ANAL-GRID..........................................................................................
589
Technical Notes...........................................................................................
590
Factors Affecting Trend Gridding Accuracy .......................................
590
Spatial Distribution ..........................................................................
591
Number of Terms..............................................................................
592
Accuracy of the Trend Fit ................................................................
592
Block Averaging.....................................................................................
595
Output Grid Parameters ........................................................................
595
Limiting Z Values ...................................................................................
596
R2003.12.0
Contents
ix
Landmark
USER-FILTER ....................................................................................................
600
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D ...............................................................................................
604
VERT-TO-DGRID................................................................................................
612
ZGF-SUMMARY.................................................................................................
615
Running Macros .......................................................................................
617
Overview............................................................................................................
617
Running a Macro in Z-MAP Plus .....................................................................
618
Running a Macro from ZCL..............................................................................
621
Creating a Macro .....................................................................................
623
Overview............................................................................................................
623
Creating a Log File with Z-MAP Plus ..............................................................
626
Creating Macros ...............................................................................................
627
Steps for Creating a Macro ........................................................................
628
Common User Errors .......................................................................................
644
Storing and Gaining Access to Macros..........................................................
645
Z-MAP Plus Access.....................................................................................
645
ZCL Storage and Access............................................................................
646
Using the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu ..............................................
646
Using the RZCL Script...........................................................................
648
R2003.12.0
Contents
Landmark
Macro Structure........................................................................................
649
Overview............................................................................................................
649
Parts of a Macro................................................................................................
652
Macro Name Record ...................................................................................
652
Parameter Definition Records....................................................................
652
Possible Elements of a Parameter Definition Record ........................
653
Example Macro Parameter Definition Records ...................................
654
Detailed Descriptions of Parameter Definition Elements ..................
657
Required Parameter Flag .................................................................
657
Parameter Name ...............................................................................
657
Parameter Type.................................................................................
657
Color Button Widget ........................................................................
659
Font Widget.......................................................................................
659
File Type ............................................................................................
660
Field Type..........................................................................................
661
Maximum Length..............................................................................
661
Precision Value.................................................................................
661
Default Value.....................................................................................
662
Range ................................................................................................
662
End Record Symbol .........................................................................
662
Options..............................................................................................
662
Comments.........................................................................................
663
End Parameters ................................................................................
663
Abstract........................................................................................................
663
R2003.12.0
Contents
xi
Landmark
Prompts........................................................................................................
663
Parameter Prompt Records ..................................................................
664
New Dialog Box Control ........................................................................
664
ZCL Commands...........................................................................................
666
R2003.12.0
Contents
xii
Landmark
Introduction
Overview
A macro is a set of Z-MAP Command Language (ZCL) process
commands that have been packaged together and are called and
executed as a group, either by Z-MAP Plus or by another ZCL
command stream. The 2003.3.0 release of Z-MAP Plus includes over
70 macros supplied by Landmark. However, you can also write your
own macros and then store them for your use or for use by others.
Uses of Macros
In general, macros are used to can procedures. For the novice user,
this can make a difficult procedure easier to execute. Canning
procedures is also an excellent way of documenting and storing a
complex workflow that may need to be duplicated in the future.
Because macros have access to all functionality within ZCL, you can
use them to gain access to ZCL functions that are not yet available in
the Z-MAP Plus interface.
Types of Macros
Macros executed from Z-MAP Plus are called Z-MAP Plus macros,
and macros executed from a ZCL Command Stream are called ZCL
macros. The structure of these two types of macros is slightly different,
and is covered in Macro Structure starting on page 649. You can run
Z-MAP Plus macros as ZCL macros, but you cannot run ZCL macros
from Z-MAP Plus. Z-MAP Plus macros are also classified as either
user-supplied or Landmark-supplied.
R2003.12.0
Overview
Landmark
About This Guide

Purpose of and Audience for This Guide
This guide is designed as a reference tool to help you more fully
understand the Landmark-supplied macros, their components, and how
to use them to the best advantage.
You can help ensure this guide meets that goal by providing
constructive feedback. Help us make sure this guide covers the areas of
most importance to you.
This guide is intended for ZCL and Z-MAP Plus users who want to
learn:
More about the Landmark-supplied macros

How macros are structured
How to create macros
Typical users of this guide include petroleum engineers, geologists,

geophysicists, and geo-technicians.
Contents of This Guide

This guide is divided into five sections:
Introduction A general introduction to macros and this guide.
Macro Descriptions Details about the Z-MAP Plus macros

supplied with the current release, including:
A quick reference table describing the function of the
Landmark macros
Graphic representations of the Macro menu options and the
macros they call
An alphabetical listing of all Landmark-supplied macros. The
lists are divided into 4 groups: A-H, I - M, N-R, S-Z. Each
listing includes:
Purpose and use of the macro
Required and optional input
Results
Prompt and parameter descriptions
ZCL processes used by the macro
R2003.12.0
About This Guide: Introduction
Landmark
Running Macros Steps for:

Running a macro in Z-MAP Plus
Creating a command stream to run a macro in ZCL.
Creating A Macro Steps for:

Using Z-MAP Plus to log a procedure
Creating a macro to run in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL
and information about:
Common errors in user-written macros
Storing and accessing macros
Macro Structure Definitions of each part of a macro,

including:
Macro parameter definitions

Abstract
Prompts
ZCL commands
Typographic Conventions
To make the information in this guide as accessible as possible, the
following conventions are observed throughout:
Examples of macro records and screen displays are in a

typewriter-style font, such as:
NCONTOUR, INTEGER ,
1,
, 0, 256 /
A portion of an example that is to be replaced by a user value is

presented in italic typewriter-style font, such as:
MACRO NAME = DESIRED-MACRO-NAME
R2003.12.0
The names of menu and button selections appear in bold type. The
path to a Z-MAP Plus process is shown with the menu selections
connected by arrows, such as:
Select Files Directory Paths in the Z-MAP Plus window.
Default field names (as described in Appendix B. File and Field

Codes *) appear in all capital letters. In text, they are sometimes
appear with initial capitals for easier reading. X (Easting) and Y
(Northing) are often represented with X and Y.
Notes contain information to assist you in understanding an

application.
Landmark
Z-MAP Plus Users See this Prompt Even If NUMFLDS = 1
If you do not want to post a second field, select (None - use no field).
Related Documentation
The following guides are available from your system administrator or
Landmark representative.
ZCL Operators Manual (Volumes 1 and 2) present the Z-MAP

Command Language and shows you how to start the program and
use process statements to write a command stream for generating a
variety of maps. The ZCL Operators Manual covers all
parameters for ZCL processes.
Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual provides easy access to reference

information about Z-MAP Plus procedures and features. Overview
workflows, tables, and selected screen captures supplement the
text to help you understand how to use each task.
Each of these guides contains appendixes with information you may

find useful for structuring macros.
R2003.12.0
Landmark
Macro Descriptions
Introduction
This section describes over 70 Landmark-supplied Z-MAP Plus macros
designed to supplement the standard suite of Z-MAP Plus capabilities.
Other macros may be available at your site, which are not described
here user-supplied macros (for example, ones written by you or
other company employees).
Landmark-supplied macros are presented in alphabetical order in this
guide. Macro descriptions include the macro type, menu option
associated with the macro, purpose, results, prompt and parameter
descriptions. In addition, technical notes accompany the descriptions of
the following macros: LEASE-DRAWING, STRATATHICKNESS,
THREED-T-D, and TREND-ANAL-GRID.
In this first topic of the section, Landmark macros are organized in two
ways:
R2003.12.0
In an alphabetical table that includes a brief description of the

function of each macro,
In a graphic format where Macros menu options are correlated to

the name of the macro they call.
Introduction
Landmark
Macro Description Table

The following table lists the Landmark-supplied macros in alphabetical
order, with a brief description and a link to the beginning of the macro
documentation.
Table 1: Macros Described in This Guide
Macro Name
Description
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA
Computes the antilogarithm to base ten for the values in the

input field.
23
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID
Computes the antilogarithm (base ten) for the value of each

grid node.
26
APPEND-XY
Attaches x and y values to a seismic file.
28
AREA-DEPTH
Checks the results of the volumetrics task as compared to

volumetric results arrived at by hand.
32
BUBBLE-POSTING
Posts symbols on a map, with symbol size being determined

by the z field value.
40
CHANGE-MFD-NAME
Changes the internal name on an MFD.
49
CLEAN
Used only for performing product demonstrations.
50
COLOR-BAR
Posts a color bar on your map.
51
COLOR-CONTOURS
Places color-filled contours and color bar on map.
60
CONTOUR-WINDOW
Generates a contour map of a windowed area of the dataset.
72
CONVERT-DMS-DEG
Converts degrees, minutes, and seconds lat/long to decimal

degrees lat/long or vice versa.
78
DATA-BLANK
Blanks a data field on the selected data file inside all

polygons. It is designed as a work-around for
Operations Data Operations Blank Data, which
only blanks using the first polygon on the vertex file.
82
DATAENUMERATION
Builds a Segment ID field from an input dataset.
85
DATA-HISTORY
Prints the history of a selected data file to the screen.
88
DATA-PROFILES
Generates profiles along lines of a dataset with a line ID

field.
90
R2003.12.0
Page
Macro Descriptions: Macro Description Table
Landmark

Macro Name
Description
DATA-SUMMARY
Displays all files in the attached master files (MFDs).
97
DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE
This macro toggles on or off the SIL debug flag.
99
DIP- PLOT -DATA
Generates arrows on a map that point in the direction of dip

or gradient.
100
DIP-PLOT-GRID
Adds dip vectors at grid locations to a plot.
105
ENVELOPE
Produces net hydrocarbon pore thickness grids.
110
EVALUATECONGRID
Builds a constant grid from user-defined input.
154
EVALUATEPOLYN
Evaluates a polynomial function over a user defined grid

and stores the results as a new grid. Polynomial trends of up
to the 2nd order can be handled by the macro.
157
EXPORT-CPS-FILE
Exports an MFD to a CPS SAVE file.
167
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE
Converts a ZGF to a flat ASCII file.
169
FASTCONTOURMAP
Builds a grid and generates a contour map.
171
FASTMAPFROMGRID
Builds a contour map using a grid file.
174
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS
Given a value for two fields describing a centerline fault,

backfills the value of the third field.
177
FAULT-BALANCER
Locates bifurcations in a center-line fault file and balances

throw at the bifurcations.
182
FAULT-CONTOURS
Puts color-filled contours and a color bar on your map.
186
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL
Produces polylines that aid in the symbolization of fault

polygons produced by the fault expansion phase of Point
Gridding Plus post processing module.
197
FAULT- MIGRATION
Migrates a set of center-line traces from their current map

position to the position they would have on a structure
surface.
202
FAULT-PROFILING
Creates a fault file and an optional vertex file that can be

used to validate graphically vertical separation distribution
along the faults in a center-line fault file.
208
FAULT-SHRINKER
Automatically converts faults with gaps to center-line

faults.
214
R2003.12.0
Page
Landmark

Macro Name
Description
Page
FIELD-LISTING
Lists the field descriptors for the selected dataset.
223
FILL-BORDER
Fills the selected area of the map with a user-defined color.
225
FISHNET-PLOT
Generates an isometric plot.
227
GEOSORT
Geographically sorts fragmented line data back.
239
GRIDANDMAPX
Grids a z field on a data file and contours the resultant grid.

Adds a border, border labels, and posts well points.
242
GRID-LT-EQ-GT
Creates a Boolean grid.
246
GRID-TO-SEISMIC
Converts the rows and columns of a grid to seismic lines

and concatenates them into one seismic file.
249
HAND-CONTOUR
Performs linear interpolation along lines and outputs

interpolated values to a file.
252
IMPORT-CPS-FILE
Imports a CPS SAVE file into an MFD.
257
IMPORT-GRID
Uses formats you create to import a grid dataset from an

external diskfile.
268
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE
Converts a flat Z-MAP Graphics File (ZGF) into a ZGF

usable in Z-MAP Plus.
273
INTERPOLATION
Interpolates along a seismic line, repopulating the line at the

indicated shotpoint limit.
275
LABL-FOUR-CRNS
Labels each of the four corners of a map with either

latitude/longitude or northing/easting labels.
277
LEASE-DRAWING
Posts and annotates lease polygons.
281
LINE-GRID-PLUS
Extends the functionality of Line Gridding.
295
LIST-CPS-FILE
Lists the contents of a CPS SAVE file.
312
MAKEMAPGENERAL
Not a standalone macro. It is used by the ENVELOPE and

SURFCORRECT macros.
313
NADCONCV
Translates NAD 27 latitude and longitude values to NAD 83

latitude and longitude values. The translation is available in
both directions.
314
NEW-CONTOUR
Contours opaque faults, profile faults, colorfills and posts

color bar.
318
R2003.12.0
Landmark

Macro Name
Description
Page
NIV-DATA
Uses a Carter-Good Iterative Depth Algorithm (IDA) to

produce a depth field.
330
NIV-GRIDS
Uses a Carter-Good Iterative Depth Algorithm (IDA) to

produce an output depth grid.
336
PATCH-GRID
Patches a small grid into a large grid using the x and y

coordinates in both grids to determine its position.
343
PENETRATE-GRIDS
Calculates the x, y, z coordinates at which deviated well

tracks penetrate one or more gridded horizons.
346
PENETRATE-ONEGRD
Calculates the x, y, z coordinates at which deviated well

tracks penetrate one gridded horizon.
354
PICT-AND-PST-DLS
Creates a new picture on which you may plot Dominion

Land Survey (DLS) information.
358
PICT-AND-PST-NTS
Creates a picture on which you may plot National

Topographic Survey (NTS) information.
366
PICT-NTS-DLS
Creates a picture using the area of interest parameters from

the Dominion Land Survey (DLS) or the National
Topographic Survey (NTS).
385
PICTURE-STATS
Gives information on a picture.
394
POLYGON-CLOSE
Closes all polygons in a vertex file.
395
POLYGON-FILL
Fills polygons with a solid color and stores them on an

MFD.
397
POST-DLS
Posts Dominion Land Survey (DLS) lines on a picture that

has already been created.
399
POST-LINE
Posts a single line using FALT, DATA or VERT type files.
403
POST-NTS
Posts National Topographic Survey (NTS) Map, Series,

Block, Unit and/or Quarter lines and labels on a previously
created picture.
407
POST-NTS-DLS
Posts DLS or NTS survey onto existing map
423
POST-PIC-STATS
Draws a box on a map and posts information about the

scale, size, and projection of the map.
441
R2003.12.0
Landmark

Macro Name
Description
Page
POST-STAR
Posts star symbols on the current picture for data distributed

at control points.
445
PROFILECONTOURS
Contours grids that have abrupt changes in surface slope

along well-defined profile lines.
468
QUALITY
Performs quality assurance on a grid and a dataset.
496
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS
Provides a quick estimate of the volume between the

surface represented by the input grid and a flat surface with
a constant z value. User can specify a maximum of two
input polygons.
504
QUIKVOLFORTYPOL
Provides a quick estimate of the volume between the

surface represented by the input grid and a flat surface with
a constant z value. User can specify a maximum of 40 input
polygons.
508
REDUCE-POSTING
Reduces posting of a text field in an area based on a keyfield

such as operator name.
512
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID
Resamples a grid using a control grid as a source of output

grid parameters.
516
RMLOCK
519
SHADE-POLYGONS
Fills a set of polygons with hachured lines.
520
SPAWN-PROCESS
Spawns a process to allow another program to run within

Z-MAP Plus.
524
SPECIFY-CONTOURS
Enables the user to specify special contour levels as input

(such as the OWC or GOC), which do not fall in even
increment levels.
526
START
533
STRATATHICKNESS
Computes stratigraphic thickness for an interval defined by

top and base grids.
534
SURFACEPIC
Contours up to three surfaces and posts the Z-Fields around

the control points
566
SURFCORRECT
Provides a way of correcting a surface or of conformably

merging a surface with a set of new well picks
539
R2003.12.0
10
Landmark

Macro Name
Description
Page
SURFACE-INTRSECT
Determines whether two input grids intersect; if they do, it

produces the curve of their intersection as a fault file.
557
THREED-T-TO-D
Converts a time grid to a velocity grid using a special

three-dimensional time slice grid in the conversion
process.
575
TIME-SLICE
Builds the pseudo three-dimensional velocity grid needed

for the Time-to-Depth conversion method that is provided
in the THREED-T-TO-D macro
580
TRANSFORM-COORDS
Performs coordinate transformations (map projections).
585
TREND-ANAL-GRID
Creates a trend grid and a residual grid.
589
USER-FILTER
Uses various methods to define a grid filter and filter

operator.
600
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D
Executes Velocity-Function-Time-to-Depth Conversion.
604
VERT-TO-DGRID
Records the shortest distance from each grid node to any

point along any line segment in a user-specified input vertex
file of the form (x,y,seg id).
612
ZGF-SUMMARY
Generates a report for each picture in your graphics file

(ZGF).
615
R2003.12.0
11
Landmark
Macros Called by Menu Options

The Macros menu options, like many Z-MAP Plus menu options, use
macros to accomplish their tasks. When you start a process by using a
macro, the Z-MAP Plus System Window reports the macro name called
by the menu option and a brief description of the macro. Often the
macro name and the Macros menu option name are very similar (for
example, the Geographical Sorting menu option calls the GEOSORT
macro), but sometimes the connection is not so clear (for example, the
Boolean Grid menu option calls the GRID-LT-EQ-GT macro).
The figures in the following text correlates the Macros menu options
and the macros they call. Use the alphabetical listing in this section to
learn more about the function of each menu option.
Macros Menu
The Macros menu contains the User Macros option and submenus for
the following macro groups:
User Macros Displays a dialog box for creating custom

macros.
Quick-look Displays a submenu of macros that enable you to
see your work quickly.
Graphics Displays a submenu of macros that alter the
appearance of your work.
Operations Displays a submenu of macros that manipulate file
information.
Geophysics Displays a submenu of macros for handling
seismic and geographical data.
Utilities Displays a submenu of macros for handling lines and
files.
Faults Macros
To display the dialog boxes for fault handling macros, select the
Operations Faults menu options.
R2003.12.0
Macro Descriptions: Macros Called by Menu Options
12
Landmark
Macros: Quick-look Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Quick-look menu options
and the macros they call:
GRIDANDMAPX
FASTMAPFROMGRID
FAULT-CONTOURS
Macros: Graphics Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Graphics menu options
AREA-DEPTH
BUBBLE-POSTING
COLOR-CONTOURS
SPECIFY-CONTOURS
FILL-BORDER
DATA-PROFILES
DIP-PLOT-DATA
DIP-PLOT-GRID
LABL-FOUR-CRNS
PROFILE-CONTOURS
SURFACEPIC
POST-LINE
POST-STAR
REDUCE-POSTING
CONTOUR-WINDOW
R2003.12.0
13
Landmark
Macros: Operations Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Operations menu options
CONVERT-DMS-DEG
DATA-BLANK
PATCH-GRID
QUALITY
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID
STRATATHICKNESS
SURFACE-INTRSECT
PENETRATE-ONEGRD
PENETRATE-GRIDS
Macros: Geophysics Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Geophysics menu options
GEOSORT
GRID-TO-SEISMIC
INTERPOLATION
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D
TIME-SLICE
THREED-T-TO-D
R2003.12.0
14
Landmark
Macros: Utilities Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Utilities menu options
POLYGON-CLOSE
CHANGE-MFD-NAME
DATA-HISTORY
FIELD-LISTING
DATA-SUMMARY
VERT-TO-DGRID
PICTURE-STATS
DATA-ENUMERATION
Macro Descriptions
Macros are presented in alphabetical order.
Information Included in Macro Descriptions

Information provided in the macro description consists of:
R2003.12.0
Macro name (next topic)

Corresponding menu option (16)
Purpose (16)
Description (optional) (16)
Results (16)
Technical notes (optional) (16)
Prompt and parameter descriptions (17)
ZCL processes called by the macro (21)
Macro Descriptions: Macro Descriptions
15
Landmark
Macro Name
The macro name identifies the procedure(s) to be executed. A macro
name is a string of up to 16 characters and may contain no blanks,
numbers, or underbars.
All Z-MAP Plus macros are identified by the .ZCLMAC extension.
Menu Option
Many Z-MAP Plus menu options call macros to accomplish their tasks.
This field in the description of the macro identifies the menu option
associated with the macro, if any.
Purpose
The purpose provides a description of what the macro does.
Description
The description includes additional information about the macro, such
as a list of the parameters that you are asked to specify. In some cases,
this description is extensive.
Results
This section summarizes the expected output. Where appropriate,
examples of graphic or data output are provided.
Technical Notes
Technical notes explain theory and use of four of the more complex
macros LEASE-DRAWING, STRATATHICKNESS,
THREED-T-D, and TREND-ANAL-GRID.
R2003.12.0
16
Landmark
Prompt and Parameter Descriptions

This portion of the macro description links each prompt to its related
macro parameter.
The first line of each description is the Z-MAP Plus prompt. Two types
of prompts appear in the documentation:
* Bolded prompt
When the prompt is bolded, the prompt appears during the use of the
macro in Z-MAP Plus. An asterisk (*) preceding the prompt indicates
that it is a required parameter.
o
Unbolded Prompt
Unbolded prompts represent an input MFD. These prompts are not
seen by the user when running the macro in Z-MAP Plus. Input MFD
prompts have a degree () symbol preceding the prompt. These
prompts are included in the descriptions because when the macro is
executed as a ZCL macro values for these parameters must be
supplied.
Prompts are listed in the order in which they appear in the macro. Each
prompt is followed by these elements:
R2003.12.0
A description of the parameter

The name of the macro parameter
Popup button options, if any
Data type
Data range, if any
Default value, if any
17
Landmark
Required Parameter
Prompt
Range of acceptable
Input Member File types
Input Master File Prompt

(not seen in Z-MAP Plus)
Range of acceptable
Input Field types
Data Type for FIELD

is listed as I (Integer),
used for ZCL input
ETEXT Options
Data Type for ETEXT

is listed as C*N
where N is the
maximum length
Example Macro Parameter Descriptions

Description
This item describes the purpose of the parameter.
Macro Parameter
This is the actual parameter name used to specify an input value for the
parameter when writing the ZCL macro process call. For example:
FAULTIN = Triangle Faults
R2003.12.0
18
Landmark
Options for ETEXT Type Parameter

ZCL users can only specify one of these valid character string
responses. Z-MAP Plus users select one of these options from a pop-up
button list. See the example on 18.
Data Type
The Data Type is one of three types: C*N, R, or I.
C*N indicates the response is a text string up to N characters in length.
For example, C*8 stands for character text of a maximum length of 8
characters. Note that embedded blanks are counted as characters.
Z-MAP Plus users enter values in fields or select from popup

menus.
ZCL users enter values in single quotes; see Parameter value in the
ZCL Operators Manual. When options are listed, the text string
response must come from the list; see Options for ETEXT Type
Parameter," above.
R indicates that the value must be a real numberfor example, a

number with a decimal point such as 1.0, 2.27325, 21252.52, or 1.0E7.
I indicates that the value must be an integer number, such as 1, 2002, or
25.
R2003.12.0
ZCL users must not use a decimal point to specify an integer

value, or ZCL responds with an error message.
If the user specifies a real number as input (instead of an integer),

Z-MAP Plus ignores the decimal value.
19
Landmark
Range
Range identifies supported values for the parameter. A value outside
the range causes an error. Ranges are given for input files, input fields,
MFDs, and some real and integer parameters.
Range for Input Member Files
The range for input member files corresponds to the acceptable File
Type(s) , such as DATA, CNTR, GRID, and VERT.
Z-MAP Plus users select from a list of all attached member files of
the correct type(s).
ZCL users must enter an appropriate member file name as a

character string.
Input Fields
The range for input fields corresponds to the acceptable Field Type(s) ,
such as X (EASTING), Z VALUE, and vertical separation.
Z-MAP Plus users select from a list of all fields of the correct
type(s) in the input file.
ZCL users must enter the sequential number of the field.
Master Files
The range for MFDs is always 0 through 5, since 5 is the maximum
number of MFDs and scratch files that can be attached at the same
time.
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus users do not have to specify input MFDs. The input
MFDs are the currently attached MFDs. Output MFDs are
specified by selection from a popup menu.
ZCL users must enter the sequential number of the desired MFD,
as described in the ZCL Operators Manual.
20
Landmark
Default Value
The default value is used when the macro user does not specify a macro
parameter value. If no value is specified by the user and the macro
parameter default given is ZCL Default, then the ZCL parameter default
is used if one exists.
The ZCL default output file name is based on the input file name or is
based on a field name.
Be careful about using default values. Default values are not always
optimal for your application. The documentation in the guide should
help you to choose optimal parameter values.
Color Index Referenced by a Macro Parameter
The color index specified by a macro parameter refers to that color index in
the color table associated with the current picture.
ZCL Processes Used

This portion of the macro description lists the ZCL processes used by
the macro. However, you are not told how many times the process was
used and processes that are common to all macros, such as STOP, are
not listed. Users are encouraged to look at Landmark-supplied macros
to see how they are structured.
R2003.12.0
21
Landmark
Additional Information
For more information on the parts of a macro, see Macro Structure
starting on page 649. Appendixes in Z-MAP Plus and ZCL guides
provide additional information about and examples of:
R2003.12.0
Graphics Feature (Segment Type) Codes

Data File Type Codes
Data Field Type Codes
Well Symbols
Font Types
Line Patterns
State Plane Projection Codes
Color Representation Section and Color Index Section of the
Default Color Table
Reference Spheroids
22
Landmark
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA
Macro Name
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA
Menu Option
Operations Data Operations Antilog Base 10 (from Data)
Purpose
This macro computes the antilogarithm to base ten (also called the
common logarithm) of the numbers in the input field. This is the inverse
operation for the single data operation LOG10.
Description
You are asked to specify the following input values:
Results
name of the input data file and its associated MFD

field on the input data file to be used as input to the antilog
operation
name for the output data file
MFD for the output data file
field to receive the output antilogarithm
name for the field to receive the output antilogarithm
The antilogarithm is calculated and saved in the specified field in the

output file. Note: Antilogarithms can be calculated successfully only
for numbers in a range from about -40.0 to +38.0; the exact range
depend on the machine being used. Antilogarithms are always positive
numbers.
PROMPT AND PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

*Select Input File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the input data file.

DATAIN
C*24
All attached DATA files
No default
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA
23
Landmark
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA: Parameters
o
MFD for the Input File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD for the input data file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Searches all attached MFDs
Select Input Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Field on the input file whose antilogarithm is to be calculated.

INFLD
I
All real-number value fields on the input file
No default
*Select Output Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Number of the field where output antilogarithms are written. This

overwrites the existing data in the designated field.
OUTFLD
I
Any non-text field on the file.
No default
*Output Field Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
R2003.12.0
Name for the field where output antilogarithms will be written.

FLDNAME
C*20
24
Landmark
*Output file name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
oMFD
Name for the output data file.

DATAOUT
C*24
of Output File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the output data file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
1 first attached MFD
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK
FILE STATISTICS
BRANCH
DATA BLOCK UTILITY
SINGLE DATA OPS
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0
25
Landmark
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID
Macro Name
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID
Menu Option
Operations Grid Operations Antilog Base 10 (from Grid)
Purpose
The ANTILOG-TEN-GRID macro calculates the antilogarithm (base

10) for the value of each grid node. This is the inverse operation for
Single Grid Operation LOG10.
Description
Specify the following input values:
Results
name of the input grid file and its associated MFD

name of the output grid file
MFD for the output grid file
Output is a grid file whose node values are the antilogarithms of the
corresponding node values in the input grid. Note: Antilogarithms can
be calculated successfully only for numbers in a range from about -40.0
to +38.0; the exact range will depend on the machine being used.
Antilogarithms are always positive numbers.

*Input GRID File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input grid file.

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
of Input GRID File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0
The MFD containing the input grid file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID
26
Landmark
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID: Parameters
*Output GRID file name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output grid file.

GRIDOUT
C*24
No default
MFD of Output GRID File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD for the output grid file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
SINGLE GRID OPS
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID: Parameters
27
Landmark
APPEND-XY
Macro Name
APPEND-XY
Menu Option
Operations Geophysical Operations

Append X-Y to Seismic Time File
Purpose
The APPEND-XY macro attaches X (Easting) and Y (Northing) values

to a seismic time file. Using shotpoint locations in a Seismic Location
File (sometimes called a geographic location file), the macro
interpolates x,y values from the location values. As a result, x,y values
for the shotpoint numbers in the Seismic Time File are merged with the
Digitized Seismic Section File.
Description
If the process must interpolate or extrapolate to get the correct location

values, you can specify:
a maximum distance between points for interpolation

an interpolation value
an extrapolation value
The seismic time file must be of type DATA, and it must contain Line
Name and Shotpoint Number fields. Sort the file first by Line Name
and then by Shotpoint Number. * 3D seismic data files (containing 3D
Line Name and 3D Shotpoint Numbers do not work with this macro.
The coordinate reference file must be of type DATA, and it must
contain line name, shotpoint number, and x and y coordinate fields. Sort
the file first by Line Name and then by Shotpoint Number.1
Results
The correct interpolated x and y values appended to a seismic time file.
1. Z-MAP Plus users select Operations Data Operations Sort Data. ZCL users call SORT process.
R2003.12.0
APPEND-XY
28
Landmark
APPEND-XY: Parameters

*Enter the Seismic Time File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

DATAIN
C*24
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD for the input data file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
*Enter the Seismic Location File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input coordinate reference file, also known as the

geographic location file or digitized basemap shotpoint location
file.
COORDIN
C*24
No default
for the Reference Coordinate File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0
The MFD for the reference coordinate file.

MFDCOORD
I
0 through 5
29
Landmark
Maximum Distance for Interpolation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specifies the break distance tolerance. If two successive points in

the seismic location file are further apart than this distance, then no
shotpoint interpolation or extrapolation is performed.
DISTANCE
R
0.10000E+09
Max SP Number Difference for Interpolation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Interpolation shotpoint numbering interval tolerance. Upon

selecting two shotpoints on the seismic location file, the program
checks to see if the difference in shotpoint number between these
two points exceeds this parameter value. If so, interpolation is not
performed and extrapolation is considered.
INTERPOL
R
0.10000E+09
Max SP Number Difference for Extrapolation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Extrapolation shotpoint numbering interval tolerance. The

difference between the shotpoint number of the input point (taken
from the seismic location file) and the shotpoint number of the
closest coordinate reference point (taken from the seismic location
file) is compared to this parameter value. If it exceeds the value,
then extrapolation is not performed for that point.
EXTRAPOL
R
0.10000E+09
Enter the name of the Merged Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the output data file.

DATAOUT
C*24
GETXY
30
Landmark
MFD for the Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD for the output file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
SEIS APPEND XY
R2003.12.0
31
Landmark
AREA-DEPTH
Macro Name
AREA-DEPTH
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Area/Depth Plot or

CARM Area/Depth Plot
Purpose
The AREA-DEPTH macro checks the results of the volumetrics task as

compared to volumetrics results achieved by hand. This macro runs
volumes by slice increment on a surface and converts the output to a
line suitable for plotting on an area versus depth plot.
Description
The input depth grid is scaled to a negative value, and then biased by a
value that you provide. The volume of the grid covered by the polygon
area is then calculated using the following values that you supply:
volume and area scaling factors

slice limit
increment
The resulting file is converted to a vertex file and used to produce a

picture plotting the area versus depth.
You are asked to input:
R2003.12.0
the GRID file on which volumetrics is calculated (TVDSS)

an optional fault (FALT) file
the polygon vertex (VERT) file defining the area for the
volumetrics calculation
bias to move grid up or down
volume and area scaling factors (optional)
slice limit for end of volumes and slice increment
AREA-DEPTH
32
Landmark
AREA-DEPTH: Results
Results
A picture that plots the area versus depth, as shown in the following
example.
This isochore grid is based on true triple point geometry from fault
plane models. The area bounded by the box is processed to generate the
area depth curve.
Area Depth Curve

AREA-DEPTH.PICMAC Plot
R2003.12.0
AREA-DEPTH: Results
33
Landmark
AREA-DEPTH: Parameters

*Enter the Grid File Representing Surface
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input grid file representing the surface.

GRIDIN
C*24
All attached GRID files
No default
MFD for the Surface Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD for the input grid.

MFDGRID
I
0 through 5
Search all attached MFDs
Polygon File Defining Area of Integration

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the vertex file defining the area of the grid for which the
volume is calculated.
POLYGON
C*24
All attached VERT files
ZCL default
for the Polygon File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0
The MFD for the input polygon vertex life.

MFDPOLY
I
0 through 5
Search all attached MFDs
34
Landmark
Enter Constraining Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input fault file.

FAULTS
C*24
All attached FALT files
ZCL default
Master File for the Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD for the input fault file.

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
Constant Number to Add to All Grid Values

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Bias factor applied to input grid to shift the value up or down.

BIAS
R
0.0
Area Scale Factor of the Surface Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Area scale factor.

AREASCAL
R
0.0001
Volume Scale Factor of the Surface Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Volume scale factor.

VOLSCAL
R
1.0
35
Landmark
Base Level to Start Slicing

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum contour level.

BASEPLAN
R
0.0
Slice Increment
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Slice thickness. Volumes are generated for slices of thickness from

the baseplane upwards to the cutoff.
SLINC
R
10.0
Top Level to Stop Slicing

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum contour level.

SLICLIM
R
100.0
Label for the Area Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Character string that labels the x axis of the area vs. depth plot.
AREALABL
C*40
Acre
Label for the Volume Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Character string that labels the y axis of the area vs. depth plot.
DPTHLABL
C*40
Feet
36
Landmark
Label Increment of Area (X) Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Value interval for labeling x axis.

LABLINCR
R
10.0
Number of Decimal Places to Label Axes

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of places to the right of the decimal point for area (x) and
depth (y) axes labels.
NDECIMAL
I
2
Specify the Format of the Area to Depth Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Format for axis labels.

LABLFRMT
Options
COMMAS
= Integers with commas
SCIENTIFIC = Scientific notation
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
SCIENTIFIC
Character Size of Plot Title

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Size of the characters to use for the title of the area vs. depth plot.
TITLSIZE
R
0.3
Color of the Plot Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Specify the color to use for the area vs. depth plot line.
LINCOLOR
I
0 through 255
7
37
Landmark
Symbol Type to Post at Plot Point

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Symbol to use to identify a point on the area vs. depth graph.

LINSYMBL
I
14
Save the Area to Depth Curve Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Decide whether to save the area vs. depth vertex file or not.
SAVEOUT
Options
NO = Do not save the vertex file.
YES = Save the vertex file.
Data Type
Default Value
C*4
NO
Enter the Name of the Output Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the vertex file for the area vs. depth plot.
AREADPTH
C*24
AREA DEPTH CURVE
Master File for the Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD for the output area vs. depth vertex file.

MFDPLOT
I
0 through 5
0 scratch MFD
*Graphics File to Hold Area to Depth Plot

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the graphics file for the area vs. depth plot.
ZGFNAME
C*80
No default
38
Landmark
New or Old Graphics File

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether the graphics file (ZGF) is new or old.

NEWZGF
Options
NEW
OLD
Data Type
Default Value
= New graphics file

= Old graphics file
C*4
OLD
*Picture Name of Area to Depth Plot

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the picture for the area vs. depth plot.

PICTURE
C*80
No default
ZCL PROCESSES
SINGLE GRID OPS
VOLUMETRICS
DELETE FILE
FILE UTILITY
SINGLE DATA OPS
BRANCH
FILE CONVERSION
POST LINES
DATA BLOCK
DATA STATISTICS
DATA BLOCK UTILITY
PICTURE
BORDER
LABEL N/E
TEXT
R2003.12.0
39
Landmark
BUBBLE-POSTING
Macro Name
BUBBLE-POSTING
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Bubble Map Posting
Purpose
Use the BUBBLE-POSTING macro to create a bubble map in which

the size of the symbol posted at each control point depends on the
z field value.
Description
Results
a control point dataset

the z field which varies the size of the symbol
up to two fields for annotation
an optional symbol code field
color, size, and location of the two annotation values
Control points posted on the current picture, as shown in the example.
Example of BUBBLE-POSTING.ZCLMAC Output
R2003.12.0
BUBBLE-POSTING
40
Landmark
BUBBLE-POSTING: Parameters

Input Data File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file to control posting. This file contains the
z field that controls the symbol size.
FILEIN
C*24
All attached DATA and DWEL files
ZCL default
MFD for the Input Data

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD that contains the input file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Z Field to Use to Determine Symbol Size

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The z field used to vary the size of the top symbols.

SIZEFLD
I
All Z VALUE fields on the input file
ZCL default
Number of Fields to Annotate Symbol (1-2)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Number of fields for annotation (specify 1 or 2).

NUMFLDS
I
1 or 2
1
41
Landmark
First Field for Annotation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
First field to post at the top location. All field types are valid.
TOPFLD1
I
ZCL default
Second Field for Annotation

Description
Macro Parameter
Second field to post at the top location. All field types are valid.
TOPFLD2
Z-MAP Plus Users See this Prompt Even If NUMFLDS = 1
If you do not want to post a second field, select (None - use no field).
Data Type
Default Value
I
ZCL default
Mode of Picking Symbol

Description
Macro Parameter
Determine the source of the symbol to post at top locations.

SYMMODE
Options
NUMBER
FIELD
Data Type
Default Value
= Use symbol given by SYMBOL parameter.

= Use symbol given by SYMFIELD parameter.
C*8
NUMBER
Symbol Number (If Using Number)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Code of the symbol to post at top locations. Used when

SYMMODE = NUMBER.
SYMBOL
I
1
42
Landmark
Mode of Picking Symbol Color

Description
Macro Parameter
Method for defining the color of the symbol at top locations.

COLMODE
Options
INDEX
FIELD
Data Type
Default Value
= Vary color based on the color index given by SYMCOLOR.

= Vary color based on a field given by COLFIELD.
C*8
INDEX
Color of Symbol (If Using Index)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index for symbols at top locations.

SYMCOLOR
I
0 through 255
5
Symbol Field (If Using Field)

Description
Symbol field used to determine the symbol to post at top locations.

Used when SYMMODE = FIELD.
Z-MAP Plus Users Receive an Error Message if there is no
Symbol Fields on the File
Z-MAP Plus users see a list of fields. If there are no fields of the correct
type, you must dismiss the dialog box.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
SYMFIELD
R
21
Color Field (if Using Field)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color field used to determine the color index for the symbol color.
Used when COLMODE = FIELD.
COLFIELD
R
41
43
Landmark
Minimum Symbol Size

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum symbol size to post at tops, in plotter units (in or cm).

You cannot enter a value smaller than the default.
MINSIZE
R
0.05 in or 0.15 cm
Maximum Symbol Size

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum symbol size to post at tops, in plotter units (in or cm).

You cannot enter a value larger than the default; to exaggerate
symbol size, make your maps smaller.
MAXSIZE
R
0.25 in or 0.65 cm
Increment for Symbol Size

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Symbol size increment at tops, in plotter units (in or cm). There

may be no more than six increments, and increments must fit in
between minimum and maximum sizes given above.
INCREMENT
R
0.05 in or 0.15 cm
Number of Increments
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Number of increments for top symbol size.

LEVELS
I
1 through 6
6
44
Landmark
Color of the First Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The color index for posting the first field of annotation.

LBLCLR1
I
0 through 255
5
Font of the First Label

Description
Macro Parameter
The font type for posting the first field of annotation.

FONT1
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN
Digits Right of Decimal - First Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The number of digits right of decimal to post for the first field of
annotation.
NUMDEC1
I
0
45
Landmark
Location of the First Label

Description
Macro Parameter
The location for posting the first field of annotation relative to the
symbol.
LOCATE1
Options
ABOVE
BELOW
RIGHT
LEFT
CENTERED
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
=
Above the top symbol

Below the top symbol
Right of the top symbol
Left of the top symbol
At the well location. Normally, this is used only when no
symbol is posted.
C*8
ABOVE
Size of the First Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The size for posting the first field of annotation, in plotter units (in
or cm).
LBLSIZE1
R
0.07 in or 0.20 cm
Color of the Second Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The color index for posting the second field of annotation.

LBLCLR2
I
0 through 255
5
46
Landmark
Font of the Second Label

Description
Macro Parameter
The font type for posting the second field of annotation.

FONT2
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN
Digits Right of Decimal - Second Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The number of digits right of decimal to post for the second field of
annotation.
NUMDEC2
I
0
Location of the Second Label

Description
Macro Parameter
The location for posting the second field of annotation relative to

the symbol.
LOCATE2
Options
ABOVE
BELOW
RIGHT
LEFT
CENTERED
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
Above the top symbol

Below the top symbol
Right of the top symbol
Left of the top symbol
At the well location. Normally, this is used only when no
symbol is posted.
C*8
ABOVE
47
Landmark
Size of the Second Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The size for posting the second field of annotation, in plotter units
(in or cm).
LBLSIZE2
R
0.07 in or 0.20 cm
ZCL PROCESSES
POST DATA NEW
R2003.12.0
48
Landmark
CHANGE-MFD-NAME
Macro Name
CHANGE-MFD-NAME
Menu Option
Macros Utilities Change Internal MFD Name
Purpose
The CHANGE-MFD-NAME macro changes the internal name of an

MFD. The internal name is assigned when the MFD is created and is
usually the same as the MFD name.
Z-MAP Plus displays the MFD internal name in all dialog boxes that
refer to MFDs. If you change the disk file name, change the internal
name to match.
Description
You are asked to specify these input values:
Results
MFD to change
new internal name for the MFD
The internal name for the selected MFD is changed.

*Enter the MFD for Changing
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Disk file name of the MFD.

MFDNAME
C*80
No default
*Enter the New Internal Name for the MFD

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
New internal name for MFD.

HEADER
C*24
No default
ZCL PROCESSES
RENAME MFD
R2003.12.0
CHANGE-MFD-NAME
49
Landmark
CLEAN
Macro Name
CLEAN
Menu Option
Purpose
Run the CLEAN macro if you execute the SURFCORRECT macro or

ENVELOPE macro and experience a mid-stream Abnormal
Termination. The CLEAN macro cleans up the system files and
SCRATCH MFD member files left after the unsuccessful execution
attemptso you have a clean start for the next execution attempt.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
CLEAN
50
Landmark
COLOR-BAR
Macro Name
COLOR-BAR
Menu Option
Features Contouring Color Scale
Purpose
The COLOR-BAR macro draws a color scale relating a series of color

indices to a variation in some quantity. This macro is used primarily for
placing a color scale bar on a map with color-filled contours, but you
can show almost any quantity variation in this way.
Much of the information needed is also used in the CONTOURNEW
process in ZCL.
To use this macro, you must have a graphics file and a picture attached
in Z-MAP Plus. To see the resulting color bar, select View Full
Display in the Z-MAP Plus window.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
You are asked to make these specifications:
file providing the data range
field number providing data range (optional)
information about contour intervals, number of contours, and

contour minimum and contour maximum
color bar and color-fill information
line color information (optional)
contour labeling information (optional)
A color scale bar appears in the currently displayed picture.
COLOR-BAR
51
Landmark
COLOR-BAR: Parameters
PROMPT AND PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Name of Input File Providing Data Range
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file providing data range. If blank, data range
comes from SURFZMIN and SURFZMAX.
FILEIN
C*24
All attached files of type DATA, FALT, VERT, or GRID
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Field Containing Range Data

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field on the input file providing data range. If blank, data range
comes from SURFZMIN and SURFZMAX.
FIELD
I
ZCL default
Draw Contours on Output Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether or not to draw contours on the picture.

POSTCNTR
Options
POST
OMIT
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Draw the contours on the picture.

= Do not draw the contours on the picture.
C*4
POST
52
Landmark
Number of Contour Levels to Draw

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Number of basic contour levels to draw.

NCONTOUR
I
0 through 255
ZCL default
Minimum Contour Level

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Lowest contour level to draw, which is always the first contour

drawn.
CONMIN
R
ZCL default
Maximum Contour Level

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Highest contour level to draw, which is always the most recent

contour drawn.
CONMAX
R
ZCL default
Contour Interval
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Interval between successive contours.

CONINT
R
ZCL default
Minimum Color Bar Range Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum value to show in the color bar.

SURFZMIN
R
ZCL default
53
Landmark
Maximum Color Bar Range Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum value to show in the color bar.

SURFZMAX
R
ZCL default
Color Bar Location

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify placement of color bar relative to the map.

COLORBAR
Options
LEFT
RIGHT
ABOVE
BELOW
USER
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
=
Left of map
Right of map
Above the map
Below the map
According to user-defined coordinates
C*8
LEFT
Color Bar X Minimum Plot Coordinate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum x coordinate of the color bar, in plotter units (in or cm).

Used when COLORBAR = USER.
XMINBAR
R
0.00 in or 0.0 cm
Color Bar X Maximum Plot Coordinate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Maximum x coordinate of the color bar, in plotter units (in or cm).

XMAXBAR
R
1.00 in or 2.54 cm
54
Landmark
Color Bar Y Minimum Plot Coordinate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum y coordinate of the color bar, in plotter units (in or cm).

YMINBAR
R
0.00 in or 0.0 cm
Color Bar Y Maximum Plot Coordinate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum y coordinate of the window, in plotter units (in or cm).

YMAXBAR
R
10.00 in or 25.5 cm
First Color Index of First Area

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the starting color index number. The first contour fill
appears in this color.
FILLCOLR
I
0 through 255
56
How Often to Bump Fill Color

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Rate at which the contour colorfill color index is changed.

FILLRATE
I
0 through 255
1
55
Landmark
Colorfill Below Lowest Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether or not to colorfill below the lowest contour.

FILBELOW
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Colorfill below the minimum contour

= Stop colorfilling at minimum contour
C*4
YES
Colorfill Above Highest Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether or not to colorfill above the highest contour.

FILABOVE
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Colorfill above the maximum contour.

= Stop colorfilling at maximum contour
C*4
YES
Rate at Which to Label Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Rate at which the contours are labeled.

LABLRATE
I
1
56
Landmark
Contour Line Color Selection Method

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the method for changing contour colors. The method

chosen controls the meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
LINCLRTP
Options
HIGHLIGHT
INCREMENT
Data Type
Default Value
= Every LINERATE-th contour is colored in the HILTCOLR

color with all other contours being colored in the
STARTCLR color.
= For every LINERATE-th contour, the color of the contour is
changed to the next color in the color table.
C*12
HIGHLIGHT
Color Index of First Contour Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the starting color index number. The first contour appears
in this color.
STARTCLR
I
0 through 255
4
Color Index of Highlighted Contour Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
If LINCLRTP = HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATE-th contour is

colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other contours being
colored in the STARTCLR.
HILTCOLR
I
0 through 255
3
57
Landmark
Rate to Bump the Color Index

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

colored in the STARTCLR. If LINCLRTP = INCREMENT, every
LINERATE-th contour the color is changed to the next color in the
color table.
LINERATE
I
0 through 255
1
Label: Number of Digits After the Decimal

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify how many decimal places in the label.

NDECIMAL
I
0
Plot Size of All Contour Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of the contour label characters, in plotter units (in or cm).

LABLSIZE
R
0.05 in or 0.125 cm
Color of All Contour Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color index specifying color of all contour labels.

LABLCOLR
I
0 through 255
9
58
Landmark
Contour Label Scaling Factor

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify scaling factor of the contour label. Value of the label is

(LABLSCLE)*(contour level value) + LABLBIAS.
LABLSCLE
R
1.0
Contour Label Bias

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Bias value of the contour label.

LABLBIAS
R
0.0
ZCL PROCESSES
COLORBAR
R2003.12.0
59
Landmark
COLOR-CONTOURS
Macro Name
COLOR-CONTOURS
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Color-filled Contours
Purpose
Use the COLOR-CONTOURS macro to put color-filled contours and a

color bar on the current map, and to change the color of the contours on
the map. The macro uses the Profile Contouring algorithm with the
PROFILE option, indicating that the grid and profile datasets were
probably created using Point Gridding Plus. You can clip contours
either inside or outside of a polygon.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
a GRID dataset from Point Gridding Plus
a PROFILE dataset from Point Gridding Plus
a POLYGON dataset to restrict contouring (optional)
whether to clip inside or outside of polygons (only requested if a

polygon file is input)
information about contour interval, number of contours, contour

minimum and contour maximum (optional)
color-fill and color bar information
A contour map is generated that meets your specifications.
COLOR-CONTOURS
60
Landmark
COLOR-CONTOURS: Parameters

*Input Grid Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
MFD for the Input Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD that contains the input grid file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Name of the Profile File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input profile file, which contains z values that mark
gradient discontinuity.
PROFILES
C*24
ZCL default
for the Input Profiles
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input profile file.

MFDPROF
I
0 through 5
61
Landmark
Contouring Refinement
Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the smoothness of the contour line. All contours are made
up of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these lines, the
rougher (coarser) the contour looks.
SMOOTH
Options
COARSEST = Coarsest point spacing along curves. Approximately one grid
interval.
COARSE
= Coarse point spacing along curves. Approximately1/2 the grid
interval.
MEDIUM
= Medium point spacing along curves. Approximately 1/4 the
grid interval.
FINE
= Fine point spacing along curves. Approximately 1/8 the grid
interval.
VERY FINE = Very fine point spacing along curves. Approximately 1/16 the
grid interval.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
MEDIUM
Contour Interval or Increment

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Interval between successive contours. If the number of contours to

be drawn is specified, this parameter should be left blank.
CONINT
R
ZCL default computed from input data

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Lowest contour level to be drawn, which is always the first contour

drawn.
CONMIN
R
62
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Highest contour level to be drawn, which is always the most recent

contour drawn.
CONMAX
R
Number of Contours to be Drawn

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the number of contour levels. If the contour interval is

specified, this parameter should be left blank. If the contour interval
is not specified, then either the range between CONMAX and
CONMIN or the entire grid MIN and MAX range is used to derive
the number of contours to be placed on the map.
NCONTOUR
I
0 through 255
50
Rate at which to Label Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Labeling rate. Enter 5 to label every fifth contour; 10 to label every

tenth contour; 16 to label every sixteenth contour, etc.
LABLRATE
I
1
Size of the Labels on Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Height of the character in the contour label, in plotter units.

LABLSIZE
R
0.07 in or 0.2 cm
63
Landmark
Contour Label Color Index Number

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

LABLCOLR
I
0 through 255
9
Rate at which Contours are Bold

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Rate for drawing bold line contours. Enter 5 to bold every fifth
contour; 10 to bold every tenth contour; 16 to bold every sixteenth
contour, etc.
BOLDRATE
I
0
Rate at which Contours are Hachured

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Rate for drawing hachured line contours.

HACHRATE
I
0
Rate at which Contours are Dashed

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Rate for drawing dashed line contours.

DASHRATE
I
0
64
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the method for determining contour color, thereby

controlling the meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
LINCLRTP
Options
HIGHLIGHT
INCREMENT
Data Type
Default Value

STARTCLR color.
C*12
HIGHLIGHT

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
in this color.
STARTCLR
I
0 through 255
3
Color Index of Highlighted Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

colored in the STARTCLR color. If LINCLRTP and LINERATE
are defaulted, then all contours use the HILTCOLR color index.
HILTCOLR
I
0 through 255
4
65
Landmark
Rate at which to Change Line Color

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

colored in the STARTCLR. If LINCLRTP = INCREMENT, every
LINERATE-th contour the color is changed to the next color in the
color table.
LINERATE
I
0 through 255
1
Include Color-filled Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether or not the area between contours is color-filled.

COLORFIL
Options
COLORFILLED = Colorfill between the contours.
NO COLORFILL = Do not colorfill between the contours.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
COLORFILLED
Use the Contour Lines to Generate Colorfill

Description
Macro Parameter
Contour lines are used to generate colorfill polygons.

CNTRFILL
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Use the contours to help generate the polygons.

= Colorfill polygons are colored by average cell value rather than by
position between contours.
C*4
YES
66
Landmark
Draw Contour Lines on the Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether or not to draw the contour lines on the picture.

POSTCNTR
Options
POST
OMIT
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
POST
Color Bar Location (if any)

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the location of the color bar. Relative positions with regard
to the AOI are automatically positioned in the map offset areas.
COLORBAR
Options
NONE
LEFT
RIGHT
ABOVE
BELOW
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
=
Post no color bar

Left of the map
Right of the map
Above the map
Below the map
C*8
NONE
Color Index of First Fill Color

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the starting color index for the colorfill.

FILLCOLR
I
0 through 255
56
Rate at which to Change Fill Color

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Specify the rate at which to change the fill color index.

FILLRATE
I
0 through 255
1
67
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether or not to colorfill below the lowest contour

FILBELOW
Options
YES = Colorfill below the lowest contour.
NO = Stop colorfilling at the lowest contour.
Data Type
Default Value
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter

FILABOVE
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Colorfill above the highest contour.

= Stop colorfilling at the highest contour.
C*4
YES
Name of the Polygon file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input vertex file containing polygons. Contours are

clipped to the input polygon(s) for display.
POLYGONS
C*24
ZCL default
for the Input Polygon File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input vertex (polygon) file.

MFDPOLY
I
0 through 5
68
Landmark
Clip Inside or Outside the Polygon

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether or not to clip inside or outside of polygons. Used

when clipping polygon file is specified.
POLYCLIP
Options
INSIDE
OUTSIDE
Data Type
Default Value
= Clip contours inside the polygons.

= Clip contours outside the polygons.
C*8
OUTSIDE
Rate to Blank Contours with High Gradient

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Rate at which contours are allowed to be gradient blanked in steep

areas. For positive BLNKRATE, every BLNKRATE-th contour is
subject to gradient blanking in steep regions.
BLNKRATE
I
1
Minimum Allowed Distance for Blanking

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum allowed distance between contours subject to gradient

blanking, in plotter units (in or cm). Contour trace is not plotted if
the distance between that contour and its neighbors is less than
BLNKDIST.
BLNKDIST
R
0.0
0.05 in or 0.15 cm
69
Landmark
Draw the Profile Lines on the Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate whether or not to draw profile lines on the picture. The

fault profile selected at the beginning of the macro is drawn as a
solid line, using the color index specified for PROFCOLR.
PLOTPROF
Do not Answer YES Unless You Have Selected Fault Profiles
If fault profiles are not selected and YES is specified here, the job
terminates abnormally and polygons are not posted.
Options
YES = Profile lines are drawn on the picture.
NO = Profile lines are not drawn on the picture.
Data Type
Default Value
C*4
YES
Color for the Profile Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color index for drawing profile lines.

PROFCOLR
I
0 through 255
14
70
Landmark
Draw the Polygon on the Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate whether or not to draw polygon lines on the picture. These

polygons are used to clip the colorfill and the contours.
PLOTPOLY
Do Not Answer YES Unless You Have Selected Polygon Files
If polygon files are not selected and YES is specified here, the job
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Polygon lines are drawn on the picture.

= Polygon lines are not drawn on the picture.
C*4
NO
Color for the Polygon

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index for drawing polygon lines.

POLYCOLR
I
0 through 255
16
ZCL PROCESSES
BRANCH
POST DATA NEW
CONTOUR NEW
R2003.12.0
71
Landmark
CONTOUR-WNDOW
Macro Name
CONTOUR-WINDOW
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Windowed Contour Map
Purpose
Use the CONTOUR-WINDOW macro to generate a contour map of a

windowed area of a dataset.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
a grid file for contouring
a fault file
minimum and maximum rows and columns
color-fill information
information about contour interval, number of contours,

contour minimum and contour maximum (optional)
contour smoothing tolerance
contour labeling information
A contour map is generated that meets your specifications.
CONTOUR-WNDOW
72
Landmark
CONTOUR-WNDOW: Parameters

*Enter the File to Contour
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

FILEIN
C*24
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Enter the Fault File (if any)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD

AUXFILE
C*24
ZCL default
for the Fault File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

MFDAUX
I
0 scratch MFD
Minimum Row for Contouring

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Top grid row of the windowed region.

RMINWIN
I
1
73
Landmark
Maximum Row for Contouring

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Bottom grid row of the windowed region.

RMAXWIN
I
ZCL default
Minimum Column for Contouring

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum grid column (the leftmost column) of the windowed

region.
CMINWIN
I
1
Maximum Column for Contouring

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum grid column (the rightmost column) of the windowed

region.
CMAXWIN
I
ZCL default
Contour Line Color

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Initial color index used to display contours.

LINECLR
I
0 through 255
3
74
Landmark
Color-fill the Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether the area between contours is to be color-filled.

COLORFIL
Options
Data Type
Default Value
C*20
COLORFILLED
Starting Color for Colorfill

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the starting color index number. The first contour fill
appears in this color.
STARTCLR
I
0 through 255
56
Minimum Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Lowest contour level to be drawn, which is always the first contour

drawn.
CONMIN
R
Contour Interval
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

CONINT
R
75
Landmark
Maximum Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Highest contour level to be drawn, which is always the most recent

contour drawn.
CONMAX
R
Contouring Smoothness Tolerance

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify how smooth the contour line is. All contours are made up
of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these lines, the
rougher (coarser) the contour looks.
TOLER
Options
COARSE

interval.
MEDIUM
grid interval.
FINE
interval.
grid interval.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
MEDIUM
Contour Label Size

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Label size for each contour being generated, in plotter units (in or
cm).
LABLSIZE
R
0.001
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
76
Landmark
Contour Labeling Rate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Labelling rate. Enter 5 to label every fifth contour; 10 to label every

tenth contour; 16, to label every sixteenth contour, etc.
LABLRATE
I
0
1
Contour Bolding Rate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
contour; 10 to bold every tenth contour; 16, to bold every sixteenth
contour, etc.
BOLDRATE
I
0
0
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR
R2003.12.0
77
Landmark
CONTOUR-DMS-DEG
Macro Name
CONVERT-DMS-DEG
Menu Option
Macros Operations
Convert Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees
Purpose
Use the CONVERT-DMS-DEG macro to convert latitude/longitude

coordinates from degrees-minutes-seconds to decimal degrees and vice
versa. This macro executes the DMS TO/FROM DEG process from
ZCL.
The input file to convert can be a file on an attached MFD or it can be
an external ASCII file. If the input file is an ASCII file, then it must be
imported. If the file is imported, you must specify a dictionary file and
format group.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
Specify these parameters:
origin of the input file
name of the input file on an attached MFD or name of the external

diskfile for the data
name of the dictionary file and format group (if the input file
originates from an external diskfile)
direction of the transformation
name of output latitude field and longitude field
An output data file with the transformed latitude/longitude fields.
CONTOUR-DMS-DEG
78
Landmark
CONTOUR-DMS-DEG: Parameters

*Enter Origin of the Input Dataset
Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether the input dataset comes from a file on an attached

MFD or an external diskfile.
ORIGIN
Options
MFD
DISKFILE
Data Type
Default Value
= File originates on a currently attached MFD.

= File originates on an external diskfile and must be imported.
C*8
No default
Specify the Transformation Direction

Description
Macro Parameter
Direction to transform the latitude/longitude coordinates.

DIRECT
Options
DEG TO DMS = Convert floating point latitude/longitude to integer degrees,
minutes, and seconds.
DMS TO DEG = Convert integer degrees, minutes, seconds to floating point
latitude/ longitude.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*12
DEG TO DMS
79
Landmark
Enter Name of the Input File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file to transform.

FILEIN
C*24
All attached DATA, CNTR, FALT, and VERT files
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Enter External Diskfile with Input Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the external diskfile for the data to be transformed.

DISKFILE
C*80
ZCL default
Name of the Dictionary File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the external dictionary file for the format group used to
describe the input file. If none is specified, the information is
assumed to be in the external diskfile.
DICTNARY
C*80
ZCL default
Format Group Describing Input Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the format group in the dictionary file to be used to

describe the input file.
GROUP
C*40
ZCL default
80
Landmark
Name of the Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output file; output file is same file type as input file.
FILEOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD of the Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the output file.

MFOUT
I
0 through 5
Enter Name of the Output Latitude Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the latitude field on the output file.

LATFLDNM
C*20
LATITUDE
Enter Name of the Output Longitude Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the longitude field on the output file.

LONFLDNM
C*20
LATITUDE
ZCL PROCESSES
BRANCH
DATA STATISTICS
DELETE FILE
DMS TO FROM DEG
IMPORT
R2003.12.0
81
Landmark
DATA-BLANK
Macro Name
DATA-BLANK
Menu Option
Macros Operations Data Blanking (Multiple Polygons)
Purpose
Using one of the z fields on the selected data file, this macro blanks
data in all polygons in the input vertex file. The DATA-BLANK macro
is a workaround for the Blank Data process (Operations Data
Operations Blank Data in Z-MAP Plus) that only blanks data by
using the first polygon in the vertex file.
Using this technique, a flat grid is built of all ones, and the grid is then
blanked. It then back interpolates a new field from that grid, and
multiplies the field to be blanked by the new field. Because of this
approach, you need to provide a grid increment that creates at least a
250 by 250 grid over the area of the data. One more field called
MULTIPLIER is added to the output file.
If you have a lot of data close to the polygon lines, you can control
precision by reducing the grid increment to create a 600 x 600 grid or
more.
Description
file that contains the field you wish to blank
z field to blank
vertex file that is to be used for blanking
grid increment
name of the output file and where to store it
Results
Data blanking of the selected z field inside all polygons on the input
vertex file.
For example:
X
X
X
X
X
X X
O
X = Defined Value
O = Null Data Value
X
X
O O
Defined Values are Replaced by Nulls in Two Polygons
R2003.12.0
DATA-BLANK
82
Landmark
DATA-BLANK: Parameters

*Select File with Field to Blank
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input control point (DATA) or deviated well (DWEL)

file.
DATAIN
C*24
All attached DATA and DWEL files
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
*Which Z Field Do You Want Blanked

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field number of the data in the control point file that you want to
blank. You cannot use a character field.
INFLD
I
No default
*Select Vertex File to Use for Blanking

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the vertex file for the polygons.

VERTICES
C*24
No default
83
Landmark
o
MFD for the Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
MFD that contains the vertex file.

MFDVERT
I
0 through 5
Grid Increment (Make at Least 250 x 250 Grid)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The x and y increment for grid.

GINC
R
1
Name of the Output Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output file.

DATAOUT
C*24
BLANKED DATA
MFD of the Output Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the output file.

MFDOUT
0 through 5
0 scratch MFD
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK
FILESTATISTICS
DATABLOCL UTILITY
BACK INTERPOLATE
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0
BLANK GRID
DATA STATISTICS
EVALUATE
DUAL DATA OPS
84
Landmark
DATA-ENUMERATION
Macro Name
DATA-ENUMERATION
Menu Option
Macros Utilities Segment ID Generator
Purpose
The DATA-ENUMERATION macro counts records and as a result can

build a Segment I.D. field from an input dataset (such as a well dataset)
that has random records. As it builds the Segment I.D. field, the macro
assigns a different value to each record, starting with 1 and increasing
sequentially. A new record is detected when the value in the key field
changes from the previous value.
You can identify a record number by its sequence in the file. The output
field type is always 35 and, in this macros output, it is always named
CHANGE VALUE SEG ID and appended onto the input dataset as the
last field in the output dataset.
Description
Results
the data file for which you wish to create a Segment I.D. field
the key field on which to sort
the name of the output file and MFD to store it
A dataset containing a Segment I.D. field which is built from an input

dataset having random records.
In the following example, the key field is Top 1.
R2003.12.0
X (EASTING)
Y (NORTHING) TOP 1
CHANGE
VALUE SEG ID
49800.000
49900.000
49800.000
49300.000
49600.000
49500.000
49400.000
49500.000
49500.000
49200.000
207600.00
207400.00
208200.00
208300.00
208200.00
208400.00
207900.02
208100.00
207800.00
208000.00
1.0000000
1.0000000
1.0000000
2.0000000
3.0000000
4.0000000
5.0000000
6.0000000
6.0000000
7.0000000
9999.0000
9999.0000
9999.0000
8566.2002
9999.0000
8499.9004
8187.3999
9999.0000
9999.0000
8414.5000
DATA-ENUMERATION
85
Landmark
DATA-ENUMERATION: Parameters

*Enter the File to Number
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file to enumerate.

FILEIN
C*24
All attached files except GRID files
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
*Enter the Key Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The field to base the enumeration process on.

FIELDIN
I
No default
Output File Is
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Enter the name of the output data file.

FILEOUT
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD to use for storing the output file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
86
Landmark
The New Field Name for the SEG ID Type Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name for the new Segment I.D. field added to the output file.
FLSNUM
C*20
CHANGE VALUE SEG ID
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA ENUMERATION
R2003.12.0
87
Landmark
DATA-HISTORY
Macro Name
DATA-HISTORY
Menu Option
Macros Utilities Data File History
Purpose
Use the DATA-HISTORY macro to print the history of a selected file to

the monitor.
Description
You are asked to select the data or grid file for which the history is
requested.
Results
The history of the selected dataset is printed to the screen.

For example:
DATA FILE: ANTICLINE SEISMIC
CREATED: 19 MAY 92
AT: 17:23
!
!
!
DATA FILE: ANTICLINE SEISMIC

CREATED: 19 MAY 92
AT: 17:23
SINGLE DATA OPS:

! EXTENDED HISTORY OUTPUT,
DATAIN
=BIASED ANTICLINE
, MFDIN
= 0, ! DATAIMFD =
!SCRATCH FILE,
DATAOUT =ANTICLINE SEISMIC
, MFDOUT
= 1, ! DATAOMFD =
!ANTICLINE.MFD,
INFLD
=
4,! INFLDNAM =Y-FIELD
,
OUTFLD
=
4, FLDNAME =Y-FIELD
,
OPNAME
=BIAS
, PARAM
= -0.23100E+08,
ZNON
= 0.10000E+31
/ 91.11
!
DATA FILE: BIASED ANTICLINE
!
GENERATION:
1
CREATED: 19 MAY 92
!
AT: 17:23
SINGLE DATA OPS:
! EXTENDED HISTORY OUTPUT,
DATAIN
=ANTICLINE SEIS
, MFDIN
= 0, ! DATAIMFD =
!SCRATCH FILE,
DATAOUT = BIASED ANTICLINE
, MFDOUT
= 1, ! DATAOMFD =
!SCRATCH FILE,
INFLD
=
3,! INFLDNAM = X-FIELD
,
OUTFLD
=
3, FLDNAME = X-FIELD
,
OPNAME
= BIAS
, PARAM
= -0.17000E+07,
ZNON
= 0.10000E+31
/ 91.11
R2003.12.0
DATA-HISTORY
88
Landmark
DATA-HISTORY: Parameters
PROMPT and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Enter the File for the History
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the file whose history you want to view.

DATA
C*24
All attached DATA and GRID files
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD the input file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
FILE HISTORY
R2003.12.0
DATA-HISTORY: Parameters
89
Landmark
DATA-PROFILES
Macro Name
DATA-PROFILES
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Dataset Profile Generator
Purpose
Use the DATA-PROFILES macro to generate profiles along all lines of

a dataset that have a line I.D. field (such as a z or Seg I.D. field). The
profiles are of a z field in the file and are for display on a map. The
profiles look similar to a well log trace, where the line is the bore hole
and the profile is the log trace.
In a typical application, you might save the cross-section profile data in
the Cross Section task and post the profiles along the cross-section
baseline to show elevation above and below a datum (the baseline
used). You might do the same thing along a single seismic line to see a
side-on view of the seismic line as digitized for an event along the
geographic location of the line. In another example, you might generate
profiles along centerline fault traces.
The input file contains x, y, z (for the profile), and an I.D. field. The I.D.
field may be of any field type, but consecutive points in the same line
must have the same value in this field.
You can control:
R2003.12.0
the z value at the baseline
whether z values higher than the baseline value are positioned to

the right or the left of the line
whether the polygons for shade represent the area above (higher)
or below (lower values) the baseline value
a scaling factor to control the distance of the profile from the

baseline
DATA-PROFILES
90
Landmark
DATA-PROFILES
Description
Results
the x, y, z and I.D. fields

maximum shift from the line
z value positioned on the baseline
direction in which high values are deviated
shading information
name of the output fault file and where to store it
name of the output vertex file and where to store it
method for drawing the data profiles on the map
profile line color and fill color
Two files are created: a fault file and a vertex file. The fault file
represents the profile both above and below the baseline. The vertex file
is used to create shading that represents the area between the baseline
and the profile (either above or below). Profiles can be added to the
current picture, but they are optional.

*Name of the Input Data or Vertex File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the file to obtain statistics for.

FILEIN
C*24
All attached DATA, VERT, FALT, XSEC, SSEC, WLOG,
DWEL, and CNTR files
No default
for the Input Data
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
DATA-PROFILES
91
Landmark
DATA-PROFILES: Parameters
Select the X-Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The X (Easting) field of the dataset.

XFLD
I
All fields of type 1, X (Easting)
ZCL default first field of appropriate type
Select the Y-Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The Y (Northing) field of the dataset.

YFLD
I
All fields of type 2, Y (Northing)
Select the I.D. Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The field that identifies the line. The I.D. field may be of any field
type, but consecutive points in the same line must have the same
value in this field.
This parameter identifies the baseline about which the attribute
profile is going to be drawn. When a seismic file is used as input,
this would be the line name field.
IDFLD
I
All fields on the input dataset
Select the Z-Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The z field to be profiled.

ZFLD
I
All fields of type 3, Z Value
92
Landmark
Maximum Shift from the Line-? x Map Diagonal

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The value to scale the z field for inclusion on the x,y plane. This
number multiplied by the diagonal distance across the input file
AOI is the mapped maximum shift (in scaled map units) from the
baseline to display the profile in map view.
SCALE
R
0.03
Z-Value Positioned on the Baseline

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The value of the z field positioned on the seismic line (baseline)

being profiled. You can control how the profile crosses the line of
section (baseline) with this parameter. For example, where z values
= 200 to 300, BASEVAL = 250; some profiles fall above the
baseline and some fall below the baseline.
BASEVAL
R
0
Which Direction are High Values Deviated

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate whether to deviate high values to the left or the right, as

you walk in the direction of the baseline being profiled.
HIGHDEV
Options
RIGHT
LEFT
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Right of the line as drawn from first to last SP (or first to last
sequential point)
= Left of the line as drawn from first to last SP (or first to last
sequential point)
C*8
RIGHT
93
Landmark
Shade Above or Below the Baseline Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate whether to shade above or below the baseline value.

SHADE
Options
ABOVE = Shade the area with z values greater than the base value.
BELOW = Shade the area with z values less than the base value.
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
ABOVE
*Name of the Output Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The FALT type file containing the profile line reflected in the x, y
plane for addition to your picture.
FAULTOUT
C*24
No default
MFD of the Output Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output fault file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
*Name of the Output Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The VERT type file containing the shading polygons on the x,y
plane for addition to your picture.
VERTOUT
C*24
No default
94
Landmark
MFD of the Output Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output vertex file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
Type of Drawing to Current Map

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate which of the Data Profile features is to be drawn on the

map.
DRAW
Options
NONE
LINE+FILL
SEISMIC+LINE+FILL
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw no features on the map.

= Draw only the profile and shading on the map.
Shading uses the COLOR-FILLED POLYGONS
feature (LGB) type.
= Draw the profile, shading and seismic lines on the
map. This option performs simple baseline posting
of the profile tracks across your map. It is added to
the picture as a SEISMIC LINES feature (LGB)
type.
C*20
SEISMIC+LINE+FILL
Color of the Profile Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color index for drawing the profile lines.

LINECOLR
I
0 through 255
25
95
Landmark
Color to Fill Above (Below) the Base

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index for colorfilling the shaded polygons.

FILLCOLR
I
0 through 255
27
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK
FILE STATISTICS
BRANCH
FILE CONVERSION
FILE UTILITY
DATA ENUMERATION
SINGLE DATA OPS
DATA STATISTICS
FAULT PROFILING
POST DATA NEW
COLOR POLYGONS
POST SEISMIC
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0
96
Landmark
DATA-SUMMARY
Macro Name
DATA-SUMMARY
Menu Option
Macros Utilities Data File Summary
Purpose
Use the DATA-SUMMARY macro to display a list of all member files

of the type DATA, GRID, FALT, VERT, CNTR, or TEXT in the
attached MFDs. Files are sorted by type. The file list appears on the
monitor.
Description
All attached MFDs are used as input.

For Z-MAP Plus Users
No parameter panels are used in executing this macro.
Results
R2003.12.0
A list of all files on the attached MFDs sorted by type. See the
following example.
DATA-SUMMARY
97
Landmark
DATA-SUMMARY: Results
For example:
******
PROCESS
SHOWFILES
USE
5538 ******
CONTENTS OF DIRECTORY:
NAME
TYPE
MASTER FILE
CoordTrans5-3
DATA
ARGENTINA.MFD
DRAKE SEISMIC TIMES
DATA
DRAKE.MFD
seismic with 352 names
DATA
DRAKE.MFD
REEF DATA
DATA
DRAKE.MFD
mara test 1
DATA
DRAKE.MFD
MASTER FILE - ARGENTINA.MFD
RECORDS ALLOCATED
312 RELEASED
0 TOTAL USED
MASTER FILE - DRAKE.MFD
RECORDS ALLOCATED
332 RELEASED
0 TOTAL USED
TOTAL MEMBER FILES LISTED

******
PROCESS
SIZE
5
6
131
8
7
312
332
5
SHOWFILES
USE
5539 ******
CONTENTS OF DIRECTORY:
NAME
TYPE
MASTER FILE
G/TIME HORZ R
GRID
DRAKE.MFD
G/TIME HORZ R
V-02
GRID
DRAKE.MFD
G/TIME HORZ R
V-03
GRID
DRAKE.MFD
bad G/G/TIME HORZ R
GRID
DRAKE.MFD
G/TIME HORZ R
V-04
GRID
DRAKE.MFD
G/TIME HORZ R
V-05
GRID
DRAKE.MFD
REEF - NO SLOPES
GRID
DRAKE.MFD
MASTER FILE - DRAKE.MFD
RECORDS ALLOCATED
332 RELEASED
0 TOTAL USED
TOTAL MEMBER FILES LISTED
SIZE
14
14
14
13
14
7
7
332
ZCL PROCESSES
SHOW FILES
R2003.12.0
DATA-SUMMARY: Results
98
Landmark
DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE
Macro Name
DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE
Menu Option
Tools SIL Debug Print Switch
Purpose
Use the DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE macro to toggle on or off the SIL

debug flag.
Description
When you start Z-MAP Plus, the SIL debug switch is off. If the SIL
debug switch is off, running the macro turns it on, and if the SIL debug
switch is on, running the macro turns it off. When on, each SIL module
prints its input and output parameters. This information is useful when
debugging. This macro has no parameters.
Results
Changes the status of the SIL debug flag.
R2003.12.0
DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE
99
Landmark
DIP-PLOT-DATA
Macro Name
DIP-PLOT-DATA
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Dip Vector Map (from Data)
Purpose
Use the DIP-PLOT-DATA macro to produce an arrow on a map that

points in the direction of dip or gradient. Vector arrows can be varied in
color according to their magnitude values.
Description
If the data is in gradients, the dataset must contain DZ/DX and DZ/DY
fields. If the data is in radians or degrees, the dataset must contain Dip
Angle and Dip Azimuth Angle fields.
Creating the Required Fields
You can create the following required fields: DZ/DX, DZ/DY or Dip Angle
and Dip Azimuth Angle. Create the required fields by back interpolating the
corresponding grids before executing this macro.
A major benefit of this macro is the graphical representation of all dip

angles within an area of interest. Color variation options allow users to
make quick comparisons of magnitude in the gradients within an area.
R2003.12.0
DIP-PLOT-DATA
100
Landmark
DIP-PLOT-DATA
Results
When this macro executes, it positions dip vectors at each control point
location on the current picture. You must re-open the picture to see
your results.
Dip Plot Vectors at Control Point Locations

The direction of the vectors in the picture above shows the azimuth of
the dip, while the length of the vectors shows the magnitude of the dip.
R2003.12.0
DIP-PLOT-DATA
101
Landmark
DIP-PLOT-DATA: Parameters

Input Data for Dip Vectors
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The input data file that already contains the necessary Dip and
Azimuth or gradient fields.
DATAIN
C *24
ZCL default
MFD Number for the Input File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD that contains the input data file.

MFDDATA
I
0 through 5
Data Units
Description
Macro Parameter
Specify how the dip angle is measured or select gradient option.

DEGORRAD
Options
DEGREES
RADIANS
GRADIENT
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
RADIANS
Clip Vectors at Border

Description
Macro Parameter
Clip vectors against the AOI border.

CLIP
Options
NO CLIP VECTOR = Vectors appear beyond the map border.
CLIP VECTOR
= Vectors stop at the map border.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*16
NO CLIP VECTOR
102
Landmark
Post Symbol if Length Is Less Than Minimum

Description
Macro Parameter
You may post a symbol at locations with dip magnitudes resolving

to less than a specified minimum arrow length.
POST
Options
POST
OMIT
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw a symbol where dip magnitudes resolve to less than the

minimum arrow length.
= Do not draw a symbol where dip magnitudes resolve to less than the
C*4
OMIT
Symbol Number (if posting)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Symbol to post at less than specified minimum arrow.

SYMBOL
I
14
Minimum Arrow Length

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Minimum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter units (in or

cm).
MINARROW
R
0.01 through 10.in or 0.0 through 25.5 cm
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Maximum Arrow Length

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Maximum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter units (in or

cm).
MAXARROW
R
0.05 through 20.0 in or 0.15 through 50.8 cm
0.8 in or 2.03 cm
103
Landmark
Color Mode
Description
Macro Parameter
Specify if the plot is to be color coded based on dip magnitude.

COLORMOD
Options
NO COLOR CODE = Variations in magnitude are not reflected in dip vector
colors.
COLOR CODE
= Variations in magnitude result in different color
vectors.
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
COLOR CODE
Number of Color Levels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
If the COLOR CODE option was selected, you must enter the
number of color levels to be used.
COLORNUM
I
1 through 6
4
Start Color
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The starting color index value must be entered when the Color
Code option is selected. Z-MAP Plus users can click on the palette
to view the attached color table.
START
I
0 through 255
17
ZCL PROCESSES
DIP VECTOR PLOT
R2003.12.0
104
Landmark
DIP-PLOT-GRID
Macro Name
DIP-PLOT-GRID
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Dip Vector Map (from Grid)
Purpose
Use the DIP-PLOT-GRID macro to add dip vectors at grid locations to

a plot. A major benefit of this process is the graphical representation of
all dip angles in an area of interest. Color variation options enable you
to quickly compare gradient magnitudes in an area.
Area of Interest Must be Exactly the Same
To use DIP-PLOT-GRID, the AOI of the picture and the grid must be exactly
the same. This is true because the vectors used to plot the picture are based on
vectors generated from the grid. If your picture and grid do not have the same
AOI, you can make a picture specifically for the dip plots and then overlay
this onto the picture that does not have the correct AOI.
Description
This macro makes use of five ZCL processes:
Single Grid Ops to create the Dip Magnitude grid

Single Grid Ops to create the Dip Azimuth grid
Dip Vector Plot to add the vectors to the plot
Delete File to delete the Dip Magnitude grid
Delete File to delete the Dip Azimuth grid
Transparent to users, the Dip Magnitude and Dip Azimuth grids are
input to the Dip Plot Vector process and then deleted.
R2003.12.0
DIP-PLOT-GRID
105
Landmark
DIP-PLOT-GRID: Results
Results
Dip vectors at each grid node on the current picture. You must re-open
the picture to view the results of this macro.
Dip Plot Vectors on Posted Grid Nodes

The direction of the vectors in the picture above shows the azimuth of
the dip, while the length of the vectors shows the magnitude of the dip.
Clusters of longer vectors indicate location of pinnacle reefs.
R2003.12.0
DIP-PLOT-GRID: Results
106
Landmark
DIP-PLOT-GRID: Parameters

Input Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Input grid file for computing dip directions and dip magnitudes.
GRIDIN
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the First Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD that contains the input magnitude grid (GRIDIN).

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Clip Vectors at Border

Description
Macro Parameter
Specification for whether vectors are clipped against the AOI

border.
CLIPVECT
Options
NO CLIP VECTOR = Vectors appear beyond the map border.
CLIP VECTOR
= Vectors stop at the map border.
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
NO CLIP VECTOR
Post a Symbol
Description
Macro Parameter
Specification for posting a symbol at grid locations with values less

than the specified minimum.
POST
Options
POST
OMIT
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Draw a symbol where dip magnitudes resolve to less than the

= Do not draw a symbol where dip magnitudes resolve to less than
the minimum arrow length.
C*4
POST
107
Landmark
Symbol Number (if posting)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Symbol to post at points with values less than the specified

minimum value.
SYMBOL
I
14
Minimum Arrow Length

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Minimum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter units (in

or cm).
MINARROW
R
0.01 through 10.in or 0.0 through 25.5 cm
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Maximum Arrow Length

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Maximum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter units (in

or cm).
MAXARROW
R
0.8 in or 2.03 cm
Maximum Dip Magnitude

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Upper limit for dip magnitude. All magnitudes above this value are
equated to the maximum arrow length.
MAGNITUD
R
ZCL default the maximum z value of the dip magnitude grid
created
108
Landmark
Color Mode
Description
Macro Parameter
Specify if the plot is to be color coded based on dip magnitude.

COLORMOD
Options
NO COLOR CODE = Variations in magnitude are not reflected in dip vector
colors.
COLOR CODE
= Variations in magnitude result in different color
vectors.
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
COLOR CODE
Number of Color Levels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Enter the number of color levels to use.

COLORNUM
I
1 through 6
4
Start Color
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The starting color index value must be entered when the Color
Code option is selected. To view the attached color table, click the
color box next to the parameter box.
START
I
0 through 255
56
ZNON or Null Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Default Value
Specify the null data value associated with the grid.

ZNON
0.1000E+31
ZCL PROCESSES
SINGLE GRID OPS
DIP VECTOR PLOT
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0
109
Landmark
ENVELOPE
Macro Name
ENVELOPE
Menu Option
CARM Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics
Purpose
The purpose of this macro is to produce net hydrocarbon pore thickness

grids and to perform quick, visual, reportable results for HC
volumetrics for a prospect or field.
Description
The macro analyzes a two phase reservoir system using basic grid file
and numerical input. Quick turnaround and accurate results make this
workflow ideal for use in sensitivity analysis.
Results
The output of the macro consists of a montaged picture for each phase
that shows these elements:
a Gross Rock Volume Isochore for each HC zone that can display
unconformities
a Net Hydrocarbon Volume Isochore posted with information as in
the map described above
a map with the primary polygon Net HC Volumes Posted, with
units
a map with the secondary polygon Net HC Volumes Posted, with
units
Additionally, all pertinent data files made in modeling and
evaluation steps are saved to an attached MFD and can be assigned
a unique numerical suffix ID.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE
110
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
Summary of the ENVELOPE Macro

The ENVELOPE macro is designed for production geologists.
Z-MAP Plus has historically had two main uses: creating quality base
maps, and assessing hydrocarbon in place using the Volumetrics
application tools.
You should be well versed in the use of the product to get the most out
of the two applications mentioned above. By offering the ENVELOPE
and the SURFCORRECT macro applications, we hope to provide you,
as the production geologist, with two extremely valuable, encapsulated
workflows. These workflows will help speed up productivity, especially
in performing the ongoing update of hydrocarbons in place in a
reservoir that is being actively developed.
The typical scenario is that a reservoir with several zones of production
is being drilled. There will be structural control for the underground
form of the reservoir and usually, but not always, grids for the gross
unit top and base of production. Alternatively, there could only be a
gross hydrocarbon isochore available for a particular phase of
production. In either case, you can use the ENVELOPE macro to
evaluate the hydrocarbons in place (HIP).
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
111
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
Understanding the ENVELOPE Macro

A typical execution of the ENVELOPE macro, requires that you have:
A Z-MAP Plus grid that is tied to an existing well control for the
top of the producing system
A Z-MAP Plus grid that is tied to an existing well control for the
structure base
Information from well log analysis that pinpoints the common

OWC (oil/water contact) and GOC (gas/oil contact) for the entire
field
Secondary rock property gridded surface models or numerical

values
Conversion numeric constants and units for posting results on the

maps
Optionally, you can also have primary and secondary polygons.

The system may have vertical faults through the producing zone.
Hence, there can be a fault file associated with the top and base
structure surfaces.
If the structure pinches out in the hydrocarbon production areas of
interest, you must make sure that the Top and Base are built to reflect
this. In other words, you must produce the zero line of gross pinchout
when the corresponding isopach (produced in dual grid operations) has
the zero line contoured on a basemap. Logic internal to the macro
shows the pinchouts position and correctly treats the gross and net
isochores for the HIP calculations.
Units of Measurement
All structural surfaces supplied to the macro must be in elevation relative to

sea level. Negative Feet Sub-Sea or Negative Meters Sub-Sea are acceptable.
Positive depth (TVD) is NOT acceptable. If you do not have elevation grids
or fluid contact numbers for input, then use surface operations and the well
data to convert the grid models and contact constants to Sub-Sea values.
If the contacts are not constant over the entire field and can be modeled
by grids, then these grid models can be supplied for both or either the
OWC or GOC.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
112
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
A typical situation where this case might apply is when a fault block
within the top and base surfaces is sealed and has a different OWC
and/or GOC from the rest of the unit in the field. You must build these
grids using polygon blanking on the field-wide constant elevation grid
that represents the appropriate contact. Build the blanking polygons
using the structural fault files. When the macro takes these grids as
input with the supplied structural fault files, it treats the gridded contact
surfaces correctly, derives gross and net hydrocarbon isopachs, and
then correctly integrates the isopachs for volumes.
The secondary rock properties referred to here are:
UNIT POROSITY GRID - or value as a decimal fraction of 1.0

(15% porosity has a node or numeric value of 0.15)
NET to GROSS ratio as a gridded surface over the units extent, or

a numeric value (80% N/G = node or numeric value of 0.8)
GAS SATURATION as a gridded surface model or a numeric

value (75% gas saturation = node or numeric value of 0.75)
OIL SATURATION as a gridded surface model or a numeric value

(65% Oil Saturation = node or numeric value of 0.65)
OIL FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR- A decimal value or

gridded model that has a value representing a combination of PVT
parameters that bring the hydrocarbons to surface conditions. You
could also build a recovery factor into this value. Typically, it is a
constant input.
GAS FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR- Similar to the oil

formation volume factor, but is applied only to the evaluation of
the gas system by the macro.
Grids and Constants
All of the above parameters can be supplied as grids or constants. In the
macro user interface, the grids are asked for first. If you do not have a grid for
the appropriate parameter, the correct choice from the lists is none - use no
file. Within the macros processing logic, a grid supplied for one of the
above parameters is used even if a numeric value is supplied later in the user
interface. In all cases, grid inputs override numeric value inputs.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
113
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
The primary and secondary polygons are stored as Z-MAP Plus vertex
files. For the ENVELOPE macro, each vertex file can contain a
maximum of 40 separate polygons. The ENVELOPE macro makes
separate volumetric calculations and postings on maps, depending on
which files are supplieda primary polygon file, a secondary polygon
file, both polygon files, or neither file. If no secondary polygon file is
supplied, only the primary polygons are evaluated. If no primary file is
supplied, the entire reservoir is evaluated and a report is generated in
picture and file output. If neither polygon file is supplied, the entire
reservoir area of interest is evaluated in picture and file output only.
Complex Fraction Operations
No complex fraction or overlapping polygonal operations are used to derive

and report polygonal area volumes.
The conversion numeric constants and units that are used for posting
results on the maps convert map units into the desired reportable area
units and volume (Map X Depth) units to the desired reported
volumetric units. Along with the conversion constants, you are asked to
supply an alphanumeric representation of the output unit. These
supplied strings are concatenated with the results from the volumetric
calculations and posted on the output maps, with the requested result
rounded up to the desired number of decimal places. Both area and
volumetric output are posted on the map for each polygon evaluated.
Conversion Numeric Constants and Decimal Representation
You can enter conversion numeric constants in exponential formatso you

can use your companys standard values. (For a list of the most commonly
used area and volume conversion constants, see the Volumetrics topic in
the CARM section of the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.)
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
114
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
Modeling the Envelope Control Parameters

In addition to the input listed above, the macro has several complex
modeling workflows built into it.
Discontinuity Use
When we produce the structural contour maps for gross or net reservoir
planimetered volumetric calculations, we know that there are
distinctive wedge zones in the reservoirs dimensions. Examples of
these are located on the edge of the OWC and GOC, and at the
intersection of these contacts and the base structural limits of the
reservoir.
These intersections separate contour forms on either of their sides.
They are considered discontinuity lines. In grid modeling and
evaluation terms, these boundaries should be treated as faults.
Z-MAP Plus deals with discontinuities by treating them as faults.
To treat these areas of special characteristics correctly, the macro
compares the gridded input you supply to the description of the
system-generated contacts and graphically identifies where these
discontinuities appear.
You may choose to incorporate or ignore the correct treatment of the
discontinuities in the modeling and mapping procedures. This choice is
allowed because many times there are historical results where the
discontinuities have been ignored and because we want to provide a
means of verification of past results with the workflow.
Therefore, it is desirable to be able to turn this part of the workflow on
or off. Technically speaking, it should always be on and the
discontinuities should always be used. Being able to turn discontinuity
usage on and off simply allows for sensitivity analysis of the results.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
115
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
Discontinuity Generalization Tolerance

The Z-MAP Plus Volumetrics Integration module runs into efficiency
problems when it has to use densely sampled fault files. Segments of
discontinuities that are defined by many points through a grid cell slow
the execution down excessively.
To alleviate this decrease in performance without giving up accuracy,
you can generalize the fault segments that are oversampled through
cells. Oversampling often happens when fault file input is derived from
unconformities that are defined by surface intersections.
This generalization has been built into the workflow for you. You can
turn the generalization off, use the default, or use the user tolerance
mode. In default mode, the macro uses the fault file AOI to derive a
generalization tolerance. Alternatively, you can specify a desirable
tolerance. The ability to switch modes saves you time.
Quantized Contours
Often, when you build surface models to condition the final gross or net
HPV isochore, there are areas in the secondary parameter grids that,
when multiplied together, give a zero or positive resulting node value
outside of the positive evaluation area of the isochore.
Generating positive volumes at these sites causes great concern and
problems among users. The most typical example of a grid that causes
this problem is the So grid, which can be derived from the Z-MAP Plus
water saturation module. It typically has 0.0 as a node value outside the
OWC.
When the gross hydrocarbon grid is conditioned by another such grid,
the zero edge is no longer defined in the map nor used in the
volumetrics calculation, because its occurrence is modeled as a
unconformity without a fault file to show it. What you must do is to
reconstruct the grid so that the product Net HPV goes through to
negative values as the zero edge is crossed.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
116
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
The method for correcting this situation is called Quantized

Contours. A version of this method has been implemented to quantize
the zero line on all output isochores from your macro. There is a switch
to turn the feature on or off. It is always on except when you supply
input constants with no secondary parameter grids. In this case the
macro is in charge of creating the secondary parameter grids, and it will
not let a grid stray from the correct values.
With the function turned off, the resulting net isochore is made,
displayed, and integrated without consideration for the possible
problem. In the graphical results, the user may be astounded at the
number of mistakes.
Again, this is an interesting sensitivity analysis tool. Implementing it in
the workflow is another time saver, because manual, interactive
correction of this problem is very tedious and time consuming.
Map Design Parameters
These map design parameters are simple and not too numerous.
R2003.12.0
Map Scale and Units

Map scale is specified in absolute map scale (1:10,000 - means one
meter on a map is representative of 10,000 real meters on the
ground). All text and features are dynamically sized and placed on
the individual pictures created by the macro. The choice of map
units is either METERS or FEET.
Contour Interval for the Gross Rock Volume and Net Rock
Volume Isochore
You can specify this interval or have the macro calculate it. The
latter is usually the preferred method, because sometimes you are
not sure what an optimum choice would be. The workflow usually
comes up with an optimized choice that will deliver 10 to 20
contours on each map with a color bar, the correct number of
decimal places, legible contour annotation labels, etc.
ENVELOPE: Summary
117
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
Name of a Well Data File

If this name is supplied, the macro posts the wells and their names
on the gross and net isochore maps. On the volumetric report
pictures it posts the well positions only, so that no text interferes
with the volumetric report numbers displayed on the maps.
A Project Title
This text string is the title for your project. It appears on all
pictures in the project. All other text titles are controlled by the
macro and in all cases are descriptive and meaningful. All maps
are also time and date stamped. The time stamp displays the
interval from the time the macro began execution to the time the
map was completed, further graphically documenting the macros
output.
File Saving
The last significant input is a six-digit unique identifier for all pertinent
files created in any particular execution of the workflow. The files can
be directed to any MFD attached at runtime, including a scratch MFD
file. Even text files with all of the different runtime parameter values
are saved as MFD file members with this identifying suffix. File saving
is optional.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
118
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
Framework Logic
The ENVELOPE macro has certain requirements for input. When the
macro receives the proper inputs, it follows specific file saving
constraints and produces a standard graphical output. Also, you have
the option of using Gross Rock Volume modeling as opposed to top and
base structure grid inputs.
Minimal Input Requirements
The workflow macro is sensitive to what information you supply. The
minimal input required for a successful execution is a top structure grid
and an OWC or GOC/GWC that has an elevation value less than the
ZMAX of the top structure grid.
All other logical defaults will produce the volumetric evaluation with
all relevant report pictures. If minimal input requirements are not met,
the run will abort to the end of execution and give the appropriate
warning messages indicating why.
Some instances where requirements are not met are listed below, along
with the associated consequences.
R2003.12.0
If only one contact is supplied as a grid or a numerical elevation

input, then only that phase of the reservoir will be analyzed.
If no top structure is supplied, no envelope analysis is performed
If any of the structural or secondary parameter grids are a

mismatch for the exact AOI or grid interval of the top structure
grid, then they will be resampled so that they do match. At the end
of execution, the user is warned and told which grids had
corrections made.
If the ZMIN of the OWC or GOC elevation numbers or grids is

greater than the ZMAX of the top structure grid, or if the OWC is
higher than the GOC, the run is aborted to the end of execution and
you are given a message in the processing window near the end of
the processing stream.
ENVELOPE: Summary
119
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
File Saving
Files that are saved to the selected MFD are complete and
all-encompassing. All grids and fault files, plus primary user input files,
are saved with the requested suffix at the end of the macro hard-coded
names. An index of these names and their technical description is in
this document.
If you have performed complex volumetric evaluations of reservoir
envelopes, such as those handled by this workflow, you will be able to
interactively reproduce all of the graphics and volumetric results that
the workflow produces from the saved files.
The parameters used in the macro execution and any warning messages
generated are also saved to the chosen MFD with the same suffix as
other files. Only the files that are pertinent to the level of complexity of
the hydrocarbon envelopes that were built are saved. If the case
analyzed is stratigraphically simple, then fewer files will be saved to
document its creation.
Overall, every effort has been made to document this workflow so that
saved graphical and file output could supply a future user with all of the
information needed to reproduce previous results. The source files for
execution could supply a future production geologist with a starting
point for updating a reservoir model with more recent wells and
petrophysical data.
Gross Rock Volume Modeling
As an option, the macro can also be run against your Gross Rock
Volume isochore grid models. You are prompted for these after the
structural top and base input parameters. If you supply the top and base
information and the grids for the gross rock volume isopachs of either
phase, then the macro will use the isopachs and will not process the top
base analysis. Gross Rock Volume modeling overrides the top/base
structural approach.
You can not analyze one phase using gross rock volume input while
analyzing the other using top/base information. Separate runs of the
macro must be made if you want to use different modes of input. The
workflow can only guarantee integrity on envelope models it creates.
You are responsible for the accuracy of the isochores that you supply.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
120
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
Graphical Outputs
The pictures produced by the workflow are intended to be of a high
enough quality so that they could be presented at low-level
management reviews. Color tables are supplied that optimize both
hardcopy and screen display media. The montage reports for the oil
and/or gas phase analysis are acceptable as documents that represent
your efforts. All of the member pictures of the report montages are time
and date stamped in an index map on the top right-hand corner.
A maximum of ten pictures are written to the output ZGF created by
the workflow. There is a possibility of five pictures for each phase of
the reservoir analyzed. The five descriptive titles are:
1.
GROSS ROCK VOLUME OIL ZONE

This is the supplied or work-flow-created grid model of the gross
rock volume for the oil window. The same picture title with the
word OIL replaced by GAS is representative of the gas phase
analysis. The map is color filled with a color bar and has a time
date stamp. The supplied project title is central to the top offset
margin. A scale bar is on the bottom left margin area and
descriptive title information appears on the bottom right margin
area.
Any subcrops of the hydrocarbon envelope with the base of the
reservoir appear on the map, at a minimum, as a yellow dashed
line. Any truncations by a phase above the GOC appear, at a
minimum, as a red dashed line.
If you specify to use unconformities, the yellow and red dashed
lines are hidden on the picture by a solid brown line that is merged
with other faults in the reservoir. To see the truncation by the oil
contact on the basemap, clear fault traces from the display list in
Z-MAP Plus and redisplay the picture. The red and yellow dashed
vertex unconformities appear. If you decide not to use
unconformities, the red and yellow dashed lines appear if they
occur. However, the contours do not terminate angularly against
them, because the unconformities in the wedge zones are ignored.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
121
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
If you describe well data to the workflow, solid red, circular well
symbols are posted with the well names displayed above them. All
map features, including text, are resized internally in the macro to
optimize display quality.
2.
NET ROCK VOLUME OIL ZONE

This map has all the features that are described above, but the
surface model contoured is that of NET HYDROCARBON PORE
VOLUME. This grid is the product of all modeling procedures and
produces the model that is evaluated by the volumetrics task.
NHPV = GVR x NGx POR x So/g x FVFo/g
Table 2: Key to Formula
NHPV
GRV
POR
So/g
N/G
FVFo/g
Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume

Gross Rock Volume
Porosity
Saturation of oil/gas
Net to Gross Ratio
Formation Volume Factor for oil/gas
This map shows the results of several different modeling

procedures.
If Quantized Contours is performed by the workflow, the map
shows the results. If unconformities are involved, they also are
shown. If either procedure introduces artifacts or errors, they
are evident in the map.
If you have secondary rock parameter grids that distribute grid
node values discontinually, the effects of this are evident in the
contour form of this map. An example of a discontinuous grid
would be a porosity-gridded surface model created with the
random closest point algorithm in Z-MAP Plus.
If you turn off the Quantized Contour workflow and get a zero
contour that covers all of the non-net areas of the reservoir, it
shows in this picture. This contour map is your visual quality
check for the model being evaluated. If a GAS zone is
evaluated, a second picture with the word GAS instead of OIL
in the title is also created.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
122
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
3.
REPORTED VOLUMES OIL ZONE PRIMARY POLYGONS

There is no contour map on this picture. Instead, it has the color fill
polygons that are in the primary polygon file that was assigned to
the macro. If no primary polygons were selected, then the map is
color back-filled with a base color fill.
The total projected surface area for the Net Hydrocarbon Pore
Volume grid is centrally located in each of the polygons or in the
center of the map if no polygons are supplied. This area is above
contour level 0.0 and appears in a light blue text string. It is
reported as a decimal number with the requested number of
decimal places. The unit of the number is appended after the
numerical result. Below that is a red number that is the total
hydrocarbon (GAS/OIL) for the area analyzed. Requested decimal
places and units are reported the same as in the area report
numbers.
The numbers on the picture reflect the conversion of map units to
requested area/volume units. If the macro was instructed to save
the output files, these numbers are stored in the volumetric report
files for the particular phase analyzed.
This picture is always produced for each phase of the reservoir
analyzed. No primary polygons are necessary, because the entire
AOI is assumed to be the primary polygon in the absence of a
supplied file.
4.
REPORTED VOLUMES OIL ZONE SECONDARY POLYGONS

This picture has exactly the same format and report content as the
previous one, except that the polygons and results are for the
secondary polygons supplied to the workflow. A separate run of
the Volumetrics task produces these results, which are totally
independent of the previous primary polygon calculations. This
picture is only produced if the secondary polygon file is supplied.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
123
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
5.
REPORT MONTAGE EVALUATION OIL WINDOW

The montage consists of the four pictures previously described.
The pictures are combined (to scale) as one large picture, or
montage. The montage has double borders and a title at the top that
indicates the reservoir phase represented. If no secondary
polygons are selected for the analysis, the montage has a blank
space in the lower right quadrantin the space usually occupied
by the REPORTED VOLUMES OIL ZONE picture.
All the pictures stored in the ZGF are in standard Z-MAP Plus
format, so you use the graphics editor to edit any picture element.
If you want to use the data editor to edit the pictures, however, note
that the data in the pictures is created with temporary copies of the
files created in the workflow. Therefore, the editor is unable to
attach specific grid names to contours in the pictures. If you save
the file output from the workflow by creating scratch pictures, you
can achieve the edits you want in a straightforward manner.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
124
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
Other Volumetric Evaluations

The following examples show a few ways you can customize your
approach to the workflow to achieve other zonal volumetric
evaluations.
1.
Evaluate the transition zone phase of the reservoir. For example,

complete these tasks when you use the macro:
Create a top of a transition zone gridded surface model. Use this
in the macro and call it the GOC. The resulting report montage
has the desired volumes.
Change the titles on the various pictures to show they are for the
transition zone. The pictures and files for the gas zone are all
false. You can then carefully discard the false results from
archival information.
2.
Evaluate only the Gross Rock Volumewith no HPV analysis.

To achieve this result, specify all the secondary rock parameters as
a value of 1.00 when you run the macro. All reported volumes are
BULK ROCK VOLUME for each reservoir phase.
3.
Evaluate hydrocarbons in a structure of unknown spill point.

Suppose you do not know what the OWC or GWC is in
elevation. This may occur if you have a top and base structure
map that is part of a much larger reservoir system. In this
situation, assume all of the gross rock volume is filled with the
phase of hydrocarbon for which you are running the analysis.
Before you run the macro, determine a value for the
OWC/GWC by performing grid statistics on the base structure
grid. The reported ZMIN value is the MAXIMUM value the
contact can have before it starts to baselap the base structure
surface. For safety, subtract one or two units from the ZMIN
elevation and use the result as the effective OWC/GWC. The
reported volumetrics is for a completely filled piece of a
reservoir trap.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
125
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Summary
4.
Work with exploration play fairway.

These approaches are similar to those you might use to analyze
a single production trap. Suppose you have a fairway with
multiple traps and therefore, multiple spill points. In this
situation, you can create OWC/GWC, GOC grids that change
elevation in the polygonal areas.
You can create these polygons, using the data editor in
Z-MAP Plus, by writing the polygons to individual files. Next,
use grid blanking to set node values in the polygonal areas to
the values that are correct for each trap. You can use the same
approach to produce correct results for reservoir systems that
have many fault blocks, which each have a different contact
defined. In this case, the polygon boundaries are common with
the fault traces.
5.
Work with tilting hydrocarbon contacts.

You can accommodate tilting hydrocarbon contacts if you build
surface models that represent the nature of the tilting contacts.
The idea is to truncate the OWC by the GOC. Therefore, if the
oil leg has pinchout on the gas zone, make sure the modeled
input contact grids cross at the appropriate area location to
show the termination.
To build the contacts themselves, a reasonably fast workflow is
to use surface trend gridding (three terms) to get the tilt plane
form of the surface into a grid, then run
SURFCORRECT.ZCLMAC to merge this surface to the well
picks for the contacts. Use the DEFAULT GRIDDING
technique with a trend in the strike direction of the tilt plane for
first-look results. The macros framework logic takes care of all
the geometric considerations involved in building the oil and
gas envelopes for volumetric evaluation.
R2003.12.0
ENVELOPE: Summary
126
Landmark
ENVELOPE: Parameters

ZGF to write final graphics to?
Description
The directory path and name for the new ZGF that stores the final
pictures the macro creates. Pictures are created only for the
reservoir phases that are analyzed.
Accepting the Default Value
If the default value is accepted, ENVELOPE.ZGF is created in the

runtime directory for Z-MAP Plus or the ZCL session being executed. If
the ZGF specified already exists, the macro terminates abnormally.
Macro Parameter
STRING
String Parameter
This is specified as a STRING type parameter because there is the danger

of a failed execution of the macro corrupting an old ZGF. The ZGF
created is of significant size and must always be a new ZGF.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*40
ENVELOPE.ZGF
127
Landmark
TOP STRUCTURE GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The name of the input grid file that represents the top structure
elevation of the reservoir formation or unit you are analyzing for
volumetrics. This file must be in an MFD attached to Z-MAP Plus.
To use your own gross hydrocarbon rock volume isochore grid
models as input to the macro, use the default setting.
TGRD
C*24
FILENAME NOT SPECIFIED
NAME OF THE MFD FOR TOP STRUCTURE GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the top structure grid you want to use as input.
MFDTGRD
I
0-5
0
BASE STRUCTURE GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
oNAME
Name of the input grid file that represents the base structure
elevation of the reservoir formation or unit being analyzed for
volumetrics. The grid file must be in an MFD attached to
Z-MAP Plus. To use your own gross hydrocarbon rock volume
isochore grid models as input to the macro, use the default setting.
BGRD
C*24
OF THE MFD FOR BASE STRUCTURE GRID?
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the base structure grid you want to use as input.
MFDBGRD
I
0-5
0
128
Landmark
FAULT FILE TO USE WITH STRUCTURE GRIDS?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Vertical fault file associated with the top and base formation or unit
elevation grid models.
FAULTS
C*24
MFD NAME FOR FAULT FILE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the FAULTS file you want to use as input.
MFDFAULT
I
0-5
0
NAME OF GAS/OIL or WATER CONTACT GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
oMFD
You can use either gridded surface models or a numerical elevation

number to represent the GOC/GWC elevation surface. If you want
to use a grid, this is where it must be specified. The gridded surface
model must extend past the points at which it would cross either the
base or top elevation grids. If you intend to use your own gross
hydrocarbon rock volume isochore grid models, then ignore this
parameter and let it default.
GOCGRD
C*24
NAME FOR CONTACT GRID?
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the contact grid file you want to use as input.
MFDGOC
I
0-5
0
129
Landmark
NAME OF OIL/WATER CONTACT GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
As with the GOC/GWC, you can use either gridded surface models
or a numerical elevation number to represent the OWC elevation
surface. If you want to use a grid, this is where it must be specified.
The gridded surface model must extend past the points at which it
would cross either the base or top elevation grids. If you intend to
use your own gross hydrocarbon rock volume isochore grid models,
then this parameter should be ignored and left to default.
OWCGRD
C*24
MFD NAME FOR CONTACT GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the contact grid file you want to use as input.
MFDOWC
I
0-5
0
CONSTANT GAS/OIL CONTACT VALUE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
If you do not use a gridded surface model to represent the

GWC/GOC elevation surface, you can enter the TVDSS elevation
number for the contact here. (Note: Oil and Gas contact
descriptions can be a mixture of grid or numerical input.)
GOCVAL
R
0.0
CONSTANT OIL/WATER CONTACT VALUE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
If you do not use a gridded surface model to represent the OWC

elevation surface, you can enter the TVDSS elevation number for
the contact here.
OWCVAL
R
0.0
130
Landmark
OPTIONAL USER BUILT OIL GRV ISOCHORE?

Description
Name of an Oil GRV Isochore grid model you have built outside of
the macro workflow If you specify this parameter, the macro
does not create an internal Gross Hydrocarbon Rock Volume
Isochore. You are entirely responsible for the accuracy of the
isochore model and the volumetric results reported.
Multi-Reservoir Phase Description Modes
Do not try to mix multi-reservoir phase description modes. Either use

tops and bases plus contact descriptions for the hydrocarbon zone or
zones, or use the external isochore input mode. When the gas part of the
reservoir is described as an external isochore and the oil part is defined
with tops, base, and contacts, the macro terminates abnormally. If you
need to use both types of execution modes, run the workflow once for gas
and again for oil.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
ISOO
C*24
MFD FOR THE OIL ISOCHORE

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the oil isochore file you want to use as input.
MFDISOO
I
0-5
0
131
Landmark
OPTIONAL FAULTS FOR OIL GRV ISOCHORE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Fault file associated with the Oil Gross Rock Volume Isochore
Unlike the case where the macro uses base and top grid models to
define the evaluation isochore, the faults supplied here for the gas
and oil zone user-built isochores can be different files.
ISFO
C*24
No default
MFD FOR THE OIL ISOCHORE FAULTS

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the oil isochore faults file you want to use as
input.
MFDISFO
I
0-5
0
OPTIONAL USER BUILT GAS GRV ISOCHORE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
oMFD
Name of a Gas GRV Isochore grid model you built outside of the
macro workflow If you specify this parameter, the macro does
not create an internal Gross Hydrocarbon Rock Volume Isochore.
You are entirely responsible for the accuracy of the isochore model
and the volumetric results reported.
ISOG
C*24
FOR THE GAS ISOCHORE
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the gas isochore file you want to use as input.
MFDISOG
I
0-5
0
132
Landmark
OPTIONAL FAULTS FOR GAS GRV ISOCHORE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Fault file associated with the Gas Gross Rock Volume Isochore
Unlike having the macro use base and top grid models to define the
evaluation isochore, you can specify different files to add gas and
oil zone user-built isochores.
ISFG
C*24
MFD FOR THE GAS ISOCHORE FAULTS?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the gas isochore faults file you want to use as
input.
MFDISFG
I
0-5
0
133
Landmark
NAME OF POROSITY GRID?

Description
The ENVELOPE macro enables you to define secondary rock

parameter distributions in the reservoir system as either gridded
surface models or as numerical constants. If you use a gridded
porosity surface model to define the 2D distribution of porosity
over the oil and gas window, use this parameter to specify the name
of the porosity grid. You can use a mixture of constants and grids
for the secondary parameter input values you specify for the HPV
equation.
Node Values
Node values must be in fractional decimal form (for example, 21% =

0.21). To use different grids to represent the 2D distribution of this
parameter for each hydrocarbon phase, you must execute two separate
runs of the macro (one for each phase). Each grid you supply as input to
the macro is force resampled to the AOI and grid interval of the Top
Structure or to the Oil/Gas isochore grid you specify as input.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
PORGRD
C*24
MFD NAME FOR POROSITY GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input porosity grid (PORGRD).

MFDPOR
I
0-5
0
134
Landmark
NAME OF NET/GROSS RATIO GRID?

Description
To use a gridded net to gross surface model for defining the 2D

distribution of N/G over the oil and gas window, use this parameter
to specify the name of the N/G grid. You can use a mixture of
constants and grids for the secondary parameter input values you
specify for the HPV equation.
Node Values
Node values must be in fractional decimal form (for example, 21% =

0.21). To use different grids to represent the 2D distribution of this
parameter for each hydrocarbon phase, you must execute two separate
runs of the macro (one for each phase). Each grid you supply as input to
the macro is force resampled to the AOI and grid interval of the Top
Structure or to the Oil/Gas isochore grid you specify as input.
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
NTGGRD
C*24
MFD NAME FOR N/G RATIO GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input N/G ratio grid (NTGGRD).
MFDNTG
I
0-5
0
135
Landmark
NAME OF GAS SATURATION GRID?

Description
To use a gridded gas saturation surface model for defining the 2D

distribution of Sg over the gas window, use this parameter to specify
the name of the Sg grid. You can use a mixture of constants and
grids for the secondary parameter input values you specify for the
HPV equation.
Node Values
Node values must be in fractional decimal form (for example, 21% = 0.21).
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
GSATGRD
C*24
MFD FOR GAS SATURATION GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input gas saturation grid (GSATGRD).
MFDGSAT
I
0-5
0
136
Landmark
NAME OF OIL SATURATION GRID?

Description
To use a gridded oil saturation surface model for defining the 2D

distribution of So over the oil window, use this parameter to specify
the name of the So grid. You can use a mixture of constants and
grids for the secondary parameter input values you specify for the
HPV equation.
Node Values
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
OSATGRD
C*24
MFD FOR OIL SATURATION GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input oil saturation grid (OSATGRD).
MFDOSAT
I
0-5
0
137
Landmark
NAME OF OIL FVF GRID?

Description
To use a gridded Formation Volume Factor surface model for

defining the 2D distribution of FVF oil over the oil window, use this
parameter to specify the name of the oil FVF grid. (Note: This type
of surface is not commonly gridded as a 2D attribute.) You can use
a mixture of constants and grids for the secondary parameter input
values you specify for the HPV equation.
Node Values and Recovery Factors
If you want to incorporate a Recovery Factor, this is the obvious attribute

for factoring it in.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
FVFOGRD
C*24
MFD FOR OIL FVF GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input oil FVF grid (FVFOGRD).
MFDFVF
I
0-5
0
138
Landmark
NAME OF GAS FVF GRID?

Description
To use a gridded Formation Volume Factor surface model for

defining the 2D distribution of FVF gas over the gas window, use
this parameter to specify the name of the gas FVF grid. (Note: This
type of surface is not commonly gridded as a 2D attribute.) You can
use a mixture of constants and grids for the secondary parameter
input values you specify for the HPV equation.
Node Values and Recovery Factors
If you want to incorporate a Recovery Factor, this is the obvious attribute

for factoring it in.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
FVFGGRD
C*24
No default
MFD FOR GAS FVF GRID?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input gas FVF grid (FVFGGRD).
MFDFVFG
I
0-5
0
139
Landmark
CHOOSE PRIMARY POLYGONS FOR VOLUMETRICS?

Description
A vertex file that contains polygons that are used in the volumetric
integration of the Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume grid that is
conditioned or built in the ENVELOPE operation. The polygons
are used to break up the envelopes for the different hydrocarbon
phases into areas of separate and discrete integration.
Separate scaled and labeled Area and Volume numbers are reported
to a file and posted to a map for each one of the polygons. The
maximum number of polygons allowed in the file is 40. The format
for the file records is a simple X, Y, SEG ID format of the VERT
type file in Z-MAP Plus. Each polygon is colorfilled on the
volumetrics report picture for each phase. If any of the polygons
overlap, the colorfill overlaps as well, and duplicate volumes are
reported. No intersecting polygon logic is used.
If this file is not specified and the default value is used, the
Volumetrics run is still executed and the picture is created.
However, the evaluation area for the integration is the entire AOI of
the macro-derived Net HPV grid by default. The numbers, with
their appropriate labels, are posted in a size-scaled manner in the
middle of the report picture, AOI.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
PRMPOLY
C*24
No default
THE MFD FOR THE PRIMARY POLYGONS?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input primary polygon file

(PRMPOLY).
MFDPMPS
I
0-5
0
140
Landmark
CHOOSE SECONDARY POLYGONS FOR VOLUMETRICS?

Description
A second set of polygons allowed for a separate run of volumetrics

for each reservoir phase. The file size and definition the same as for
primary polygons. However, a separate report picture with a
different color scheme for the polygon fill is created. The numbers
posted on the picture and saved to file, if requested, are totally
unique for each polygon in the file. If you do not specify this file
name and allow the default name to be used, the second volumetrics
run is bypassed and the second separate report picture is not
created. Only three maps appear on the final report montage for
each phase that is analyzed.
Macro Parameter
SECPOLY
C*24
Data Type
Default Value
o
THE MFD FOR THE SECONDARY POLYGONS

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the input secondary polygon file

(SECPOLY).
MFDSCPS
I
0-5
0
CONSTANT NET/GROSS RATIO VALUE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
A numerical value used to condition the Gross Hydrocarbon Rock

Volume Isochore to give the Net HPV result for each phase if no
grid is specified to represent the N/G ratio in the reservoir for oil
and gas. The value entered must be in decimal form and the
precision carried in the entry is that of a real number of 8 significant
digits. If different N/G constants are required for the evaluation of
each phase, the macro should be run twice, once for each phase
with the appropriate constants.
NTGVAL
R
0.0-1.0
0.88
141
Landmark
CONSTANT AVERAGE POROSITY VALUE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

grid is specified to represent the porosity distribution in the
reservoir for oil and gas. The value entered must be in decimal form
and the precision carried in the entry is that of a real number of 8
significant digits. If different Porosity constants are required for the
evaluation of each phase, the macro should be run twice, once for
each phase with the appropriate constants.
PORVAL
R
0.0-1.0
0.21
CONSTANT GAS SATURATION VALUE

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

grid is specified to represent the Gas Saturation distribution in the
reservoir. The value entered must be in decimal form and the
digits.
GSATVAL
R
0.0-1.0
0.75
142
Landmark
CONSTANT OIL SATURATION VALUE

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

grid is specified to represent the Oil Saturation distribution in the
digits.
OSATVAL
R
0.0-1.0
0.68
OIL FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

grid is specified to represent the Oil FVF distribution in the
digits. The Recovery Factor for the Reservoir can also be built into
this scaling factor.
FVFO
R
0.37
GAS FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

grid is specified to represent the Gas FVF distribution in the
digits. The Recovery Factor for the Reservoir can also be built into
this scaling factor.
FVFG
R
0.75
143
Landmark
GRV CONTOUR INTERVAL DETERMINATION?

Description
Macro Parameter
Use this parameter to perform one of these actions:

Set the macro to calculate a suitable contour interval to display the
Gross Rock Volume maps of each phase, or
Contour by using contour intervals that you supply.
Of the four maps made and incorporated into the report montage
picture for each reservoir phase analyzed, two are isochore
displays. The top left on the montage is the Gross Rock Volume
Contour map, and the bottom left is the Net Rock Volume map.
This last isochore is the one integrated by the volumetrics module.
Production geologists usually have a preferred interval for
contouring these maps with either oil or gas phases. The Net
Hydrocarbon Pore Volume maps use the automated approach in all
cases.
AUTO
Options
AUTOMATIC =
USE BELOW =
Data Type
Default Value
The GRV contour interval is automatically calculated

You input data to calculate the GRV contour interval.
C*12
AUTOMATIC
CONTOUR INTERVAL FOR THE OIL ISOCHORE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
If the response to the previous parameter (AUTO) is USE BELOW,

then this number is the contour interval used for the Oil Gross Rock
Volume Isochore.
CNTO
R
1.5
CONTOUR INTERVAL FOR THE GAS ISOCHORE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
If the response to the previous parameter (AUTO) is USE BELOW,

then this number is the contour interval used for the Gas Gross
Rock Volume Isochore.
CNTG
R
2.0
144
Landmark
USE HC CONTACT DISCONTINUITIES?

Description
Macro Parameter
This allows you to choose whether or not to use HC Contact

Discontinuities. For a full explanation of this feature, see
Discontinuity Use on page 115.
DISC
Options
YES =
NO =
Data Type
Default Value
Use HC contact discontinuities

Do not use HC contact discontinuities.
C*4
YES
DISCONTINUITY GENERALIZATION TOLERANCE?

Description
Macro Parameter
This allows you to choose a value for the discontinuity

generalization tolerance. See Discontinuity Generalization
Tolerance on page 116. for a full explanation.
GENC
Options
NONE
=
DEFAULT =
USER
=
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Do not use a discontinuity generalization tolerance.

Use the default discontinuity tolerance.
You must input a value for discontinuity tolerance.
C*8
NONE
145
Landmark
USER DISCONTINUITY TOLERANCE:

Description
The discontinuity tolerance is a number entered in map x, y units

(meters or feet). If the DISCONTINUITY GENERALIZATION
TOLERANCE value is set to DEFAULT, the program calculates
the parameter value based on the AOI of the combined faults and
discontinuities, if they are used. If the DISCONTINUITY
GENERALIZATION TOLERANCE value is set to USER, this
parameter value is the number used by the line generalization task.
Generalization tolerance works in the following way: Three
consecutive points in a line segment of the fault file are compared.
Imagine that a line is drawn to connect the two end points. If the
middle point falls further away from the connecting line than the
specified GENF value, the middle point is preserved. If the middle
point is within the distance specified by the GENF value, the point
is discarded.
In the map outputs the macro creates, close examination around
faults and discontinuities reveals whether the lines are
over-generalized. This is exemplified by lines that fall on the wrong
side of grid nodes and the appearance of bulls eye contour patterns
close to discontinuities.
The main goal of using generalization is to reduce execution time
for the volumetrics operation. If you see errors due to
over-generalization in the Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume Isochore
contours, reduce the GENF parameter value until the errors
disappear.
If the File Save option is used in the first execution of the macro, the
generalized files are saved along with the combined original fault
and discontinuity lines. You can interactively run line
generalization to fine-tune the GENF value. For large grids and
fault files, the default value typically produces a fair to good
first-part result. For small grid files (150X150 nodes) and small
fault patterns with inextensive discontinuity lines, you can
eliminate generalization.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
GENF
R
2.0
146
Landmark
SAVE THE OUTPUT FILES?
Macro Parameter
All significant output grids, data, fault, and vertex files can be saved
by the macro to a scratch MFD or an MFD attached to Z-MAP Plus
or the ZCL stream running. When the save option is used, the
macro is in control of the prefix naming convention of all files.
SAVE
Options
NO =
YES =
Data Type
Default Value
Do not save the output files.

Save the output files.
C*4
NO
INTEGER 6 CHARACTER SUFFIX ON SAVE FILES?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
If SAVE=YES an integer ID number, up to six digits in length, is

attached as a suffix to the previously determined, saved file names.
SUFFIX
I
000000 to 999999
111111
OUTMFD
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD to use for storing the output files.

OUTMFD
I
0-5
0
147
Landmark
DO YOU WANT QUANTIZED CONTOURS?

Description
Macro Parameter
This allows you to choose whether or not quantized contouring is

used. For a detailed description of this feature, see Quantized
Contours on page 116.
QUANT
Options
YES =
NO =
Data Type
Default Value
Use quantized contours.

Do not use quantized contours.
C*4
YES
NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES POSTED ON PICTURE?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
In the volumetric report pictures produced by the macro, the

numerical results for projected surface area and volume are posted
on the pictures at polygon centroidal locations. This parameter
controls how many significant numbers appear after the decimal
place in the posting of these numerical results. The results are
rounded up to the last requested decimal position.
NDEC
I
3
AREA SCALAR FOR VOLUMETRICS?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
This is the area scalar used in the integration of hydrocarbon

projected surface areas from the Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume
grid produced by the ENVELOPE operation. The number entered is
used as a scalar to convert area map units to desired reported
projected area units of the hydrocarbon phase being analyzed (for
example, m^2 x 2.471054E-4 = ACRE). (For a list of the most
commonly used volume and area conversion constants, see the
Volumetrics topic in the CARM section of the Z-MAP Plus
Reference Manual.)
AREA
R
2.47105E-4
148
Landmark
UNITS OF AREA?
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This entry is a label. It is appended to all of the numbers reported

on the maps for the projected surface area of your hydrocarbon
volumetric results for each phase analyzed. It appears on the maps
just as specified here.
AREU
C*8
ACRES
VOLUME SCALAR FOR OOIP?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the volume scalar that is used in the integration of

hydrocarbon volumes from the Oil Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume
grid produced by the macro. The number entered is used as a scalar
to convert map volume units (i.e., area units X depth units) to the
desired reported volumetric units for the hydrocarbon phase being
analyzed (e.g., m^3 x 6.2898 = BARREL).
VSOR
R
6.289811E-6
UNITS OF OIL VOLUME?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

on the maps for the volume of the oil phase of the reservoir. It
appears on the maps just as it is typed here.
VUOR
C*8
MBBLS
149
Landmark
VOLUME OF SCALAR FOR OGIP?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the volume scalar that is used in the integration of

hydrocarbon volumes from the Gas Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume
grid produced by the macro. The number entered is used as a scalar
to convert map volume units (i.e., area units X depth units) to the
desired reported volumetric units for the hydrocarbon phase being
analyzed (e.g., m^3 x 3.531466E-5 = million ft^3).
VSGR
R
35.31466E-6
UNITS OF GAS VOLUME?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

on the maps for the volume of the gas phase of the reservoir. It
appears on the maps just as it is specified here.
VUGR
C*8
MCF
150
Landmark
Data file for posting on maps?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
On all of the four maps the macro can create in a phase evaluation,
well data locations are displayed from this input MFD DATA file.
The well location and well name are posted on the two isochore
displays. Only the well location is posted on any of the volume
report maps. If you do not specify this file, no postings occur. The
fields required from an input file are x, y, and a field to use as the
well name. Deviated well files are not selectable and cannot be
posted by the ENVELOPE operation.
MWELLD
C*24
MFD number for input

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the input file for posting (MWELLD).
MFDINF
I
0-5
0
Input X-FIELD from data file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
If MWELLD is specified in Z-MAP Plus, a selection dialog box

appears with all the X-FIELDS of the data file listed. You must
select the appropriate field to use.
INFLA
I
none
Input Y-FIELD from data file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

appears with all the Y-FIELDS of the data file listed. You must
select the appropriate field to use.
INFLB
I
none
151
Landmark
Input WELL NAME field from data file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

appears with all field types of the data file listed. You must specify
an appropriate field to post as the well name.
INFLD
I
No default
CHOICE OF ABSOLUTE MAP SCALE?
Macro Parameter
This is a map design parameter that determines at what absolute

scale the output maps, including montage reports, are made. Any
one of the absolute scales listed below is a correct response.
MPSCAL
Options
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1:200
1:500
1:1,000
1:2,500
1:4,000
1:5,000
1:10,000
1:20,000
1:25,000
1:50,000
1:75,000
1:100,000
C*12
1:5,000
152
Landmark
DATA GROUND UNITS?

Description
Macro Parameter
This is a map design parameter that assigns what the map units will
be for the coordinate system of the grids, faults, and data.
MPUNIT
Options
METERS =
FEET
=
Data Type
Default Value
The data appears in meters.

The data appears in feet.
C*8
METERS
TITLE on top of the map?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
This title is the only one you have control of. It is placed
prominently, centered in the top offset margin of each map
produced by the macro. It is advisable to use the reservoir or
prospect name as an entry.
ISOTITB
C*30
Z-MAP Plus OIL AND GAS RESERVOIR
153
Landmark
EVALUATE-CONGRID
Macro Name
EVALUATE-CONGRID
Menu Option
Modeling Constant Grid
Purpose
This macro builds a constant grid from user defined input.
Description
Results
name of the output grid file
the constant value to insert in the output grid nodes
the minimum and maximum x and y values for the output gridding
area
the x, y gridding increment
A constant grid built with the input value.

Enter the Output Grid Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD

GRID
C *24
ZCL default
Number for the Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD to use for storing the output grid file.

MFD
I
0 through 5
0 scratch MFD
EVALUATE-CONGRID
154
Landmark
EVALUATE-CONGRID: Parameters
Value of the Constant Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The value of all the grid nodes in the output constant grid.
VALUE
R
0
*Minimum X Value
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum x coordinate of the output gridding area.

XMIN
R
No default
*Maximum X Value
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum x coordinate of the output gridding area.

XMAX
R
No default
*Minimum Y Value
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum y coordinate of the output gridding area.

YMIN
R
No default
*Maximum Y Value
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Maximum y coordinate of the output gridding area.

YMAX
R
No default
155
Landmark
Grid Increment
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The value you enter applies to both the x and y increments.

INC
R
0.0
ZNON or Null Data Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the output grid.

ZNON
R
1.E+30
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK
EVALUATE
SINGLE GRID OPS
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0
156
Landmark
EVALUATE-POLYN
Macro Name
EVALUATE-POLYN
Menu Option
Modeling Polynomial Grid
Purpose
This macro evaluates a polynomial function over a user defined area

and stores the results as a new grid. Polynomial trends of up to the 2nd
order can be handled by the macro. That means a maximum 9 term
polynomial function in which the highest order of term in the function
is x2 or y2. The macro produces a grid with the node values being the
values calculated by the polynomial. You can control the AOI of the
grid, as well as the x and y grid increments. You can also input the
coefficient for each of the corresponding terms in the polynomial.
Use EVALUATE-POLYN to Create a Polynomial Trend Grid
Start with reasonable coefficients for a polynomial surface expressed in terms

of surface location x and y. Use EVALUATE-POLYN to create a polynomial
trend grid.
For instance, the most simple geological trend is a monocline (a flat dipping
surface). In terms of x,y, the monocline surface can be expressed as a first
order polynomial with four terms. Accordingly, you can describe the
polynomial as 1st order and can supply the appropriate four coefficients for
those four terms. The macro creates a grid of that polynomial trend with the
AOI and grid increment you supply.
Remember that the x and y in the grid need not be map coordinates. They
could be any other two field values, such as porosity and V shale (from log
analysis); the node value (z) could be permeability.
More complex polynomials can be evaluated by the ZCL EVALUATE

process that is used in this macro. However, the macro is limited to 2nd
order because it is impractical to incorporate more terms for interactive
prompt input. If you want to create a grid of higher order, you can
create a ZCL script for a 3rd or higher order polynomial.
Description
R2003.12.0
name of the output grid you are creating
MFD on which to store the output grid
grid parameters (x and y min and max)
whether you describe the grid by giving increments or by

specifying rows and columns
ZNON value for the output file
degree of the polynomial and the value of the coefficients
EVALUATE-POLYN
157
Landmark
EVALUATE-POLYN
The following boxes illustrate the first and second polynomials:

Example 1st Degree Polynomial
Example 2nd Degree Polynomial
Degree of Polynomial = 1
Degree of Polynomial = 2
Equation = A + B[X] + C[Y] +D[XY]
Equation: A = B[X] + C[Y] + D[XY] =

E[X**2] + F[Y**2] + G[(X**2)Y] +
H[(Y**2)X] + I[(X**2)(Y**2)]
Enter A polynomial [constant] term = 10

Enter B [X] term coefficient = 2
Enter C [Y] term coefficient = 4
Enter D [XY] term coefficient = 6
Where:
A is a Constant, B D are Coefficients,
and
X and Y are the x,y coordinates
Enter A polynomial [constant] term = 10

Enter B [X] term coefficient = 2
Enter C [Y] term coefficient = 4
Enter D [XY] term coefficient = 6
Enter E [X**2] term coefficient = 8
Enter F [Y**2] term coefficient = 10
Minimum X & Y = 0
Enter G [(X**2)Y] term coefficient = 12
Maximum X & Y = 10
Enter H [(Y**2)X] term coefficient = 14
Grid Increment = 1
Enter I [(Y**2)(X**2)] term coefficient= 16
Check with Grid Statistics:
Where:
Minimum Surface Value = 10.00
A is a Constant, B I are Coefficients, and

X and Y are the x,y coordinates
Maximum Surface Value = 670.00
Minimum X & Y = 0
Maximum X & Y = 10
Grid Increment = 1
Check with Grid Statistics:
Minimum Surface Value = 10.00

Maximum Surface Value = 188470.00
Results
R2003.12.0
A grid with the requested AOI and grid increment and node values that
are resolved by the polynomial expansion using the supplied constant
and coefficients.
EVALUATE-POLYN
158
Landmark
EVALUATE-POLYN: Parameters

Enter the Output Grid Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is a new grid for storing the output of the polynomial

evaluation.
GRID
C*24
TEST GRID
MFD Name For The Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFD
I
0 through 5
*Minimum X Value
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum x coordinate of the output grid AOI.

XMIN
R
No default
*Maximum X Value
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum x coordinate of the output grid AOI.

XMAX
R
No default
*Minimum Y Value
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum y coordinate of the output grid AOI.

YMIN
R
No default
159
Landmark
*Maximum Y Value
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum y coordinate of the output grid AOI.

YMAX
R
No default
Specify Grid Density

Description
Macro Parameter
Method of determining grid increment of the new grid. This is done

by specifying either the number of rows and columns or the grid
increment as a coordinate distance. If the number of rows and
columns are input, the increments are derived using the AOI limits.
METHOD
Options
INCREMENTS
ROWS&COLS
Data Type
Default Value
= User supplies grid increment.

= User supplies number of rows and columns.
C*12
INCREMENTS
*Grid Increment
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the coordinate distance to use for the grid increment of the
new grid. The resulting x and y grid increments are both this value.
INC
R
No default
Number of Rows in Grid Array

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Number of rows of grid nodes in the output grid. Required when

METHOD = ROWS&COLS.
ROWS
I
No default
160
Landmark
Number of Columns in Grid Array

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of columns of grid nodes in the output grid. Required when

METHOD = ROWS&COLS.
COLS
I
No default
ZNON or Null Data Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the output grid node if evaluated as null.
ZNON
R
1.0000E+30
What to Enter
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
This prompt supplies a popup menu in Z-MAP Plus containing help

information about values needed for each degree of the polynomial.
Changing the selection in this popup has no effect on input values

for the macro.
HELP1
C*64
PARAMETERS FOR DEGREE = 0 OR DEGREE = 1
161
Landmark
Term Expansions 0, 1, 2 Degree Equations

Description

information on values needed for each degree of the polynomial.
*
.
HELP ON EXPANSION
-------------------------------------------------Expansions for 0, 1,2 Degrees of freedom are:
degree -0: A
degree -1: A + B[X] + C[Y] + D[XY]
degree -2: A + B[X] + C[Y] + D[XY] + E[X**2] +
F[Y**2] + G[(X**2)Y] + H[(Y**2)X] +
I[(x**2)(Y**2)]
-------------------------------------------------COEFFICIENT
TERM
-------------------------------------------------A
CONSTANT
B
[X]
C
[Y]
D
[XY]
E
[X**2]
F
[Y**2]
G
[(X**2)Y]
H
[(Y**2)X]
I
[(X**2)(Y**2)]
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

for the macro.
HELP2
C*64
HELP ON EXPANSION
Degree of Polynomial
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Indicate the highest degree of the polynomial. For example, if X2 is

the highest term in the polynomial, then DEGS=2. If only a flat
(constant) grid is derived, then DEGS=0.
DEGS
I
0 through 3
0
162
Landmark
Enter A Polynomial [Constant] Term

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Real number which is the constant term for the desired polynomial
expansion.
CONSTANT
R
0.0
Enter B [X] Term Coefficient

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Real number that is the coefficient for the X term in the polynomial
expansion.
XCOF
R
0.0
Enter C [Y] Term Coefficient

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Real number that is the coefficient for the Y term in the polynomial
expansion.
YCOF
R
0.0
Enter D [XY] Term Coefficient

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Real number that is the coefficient for the XY term in the

polynomial expansion.
XYCF
R
0.0
163
Landmark
What to Enter on this Panel

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

information about values needed for each degree of the polynomial.

for the macro.
HELP3
C*64
PARAMETERS FOR DEGREE = 0 OR DEGREE = 2
Term Expansions 0, 1, 2 Degree Equations

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

information on values needed for each degree of the polynomial
(see an example on page 162).
for the macro.
HELP2
C*64
HELP ON EXPANSION
164
Landmark
Enter E [(X**2)] Term Coefficient

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Real number that is the coefficient for the X2 term in the

X2CF
R
0.0
Enter F [(Y**2)] Term Coefficient

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Real number that is the coefficient for the Y2 term in the

Y2CF
R
0.0
Enter G [(X**2)Y] Term Coefficient

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Real number that is the coefficient for the X2Y term in the
X2YC
R
0.0
Enter H [(Y**2)X] Term Coefficient

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Real number that is the coefficient for the Y2X term in the
Y2XC
R
0.0
165
Landmark
Enter I [(Y**2)(X**2)] Coefficient

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Real number that is the coefficient for the Y2X2 term in the
X2Y2
R
0.0
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK
EVALUATE
BRANCH
DATA BLOCK UTILITY
R2003.12.0
166
Landmark
EXPORT-CPS-FILE
Macro Name
EXPORT-CPS-FILE
Menu Option
File Save As CPS-1 File
Purpose
This macro exports a member file from an MFD to a CPS SAVE file.
You have the option of exporting an original or extended file.
Description
You must input a member file of the type GRID, DATA, VERT, FALT,
or CNTR.
Results
A CPS SAVE file on the requested file number.

Input File Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the file.

FILEIN
C*24
All attached GRID, DATA, VERT, FALT, and CNTR files.
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Enter the Name of the CPS Save File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the CPS SAVE File.

CPSFILE
C*80
ZCL default
EXPORT-CPS-FILE
167
Landmark
EXPORT-CPS-FILE: Parameters
Save File Number on the File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the output SAVE file number on the disk file for the CPS
data. If SAVENUM = 1, then a new file is created; otherwise, an old
file is opened and appended to.
SAVENUM
I
1 through 100
1
Format Type of the Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the type of format to use. While XYZ is the default, a better
default for a grid file is EXTENDED.
FRMTTYPE
Options
EXTENDED
= Store the minimum and maximum X, Y and Z values, grid

increments and the number of rows and columns with the
grid file.
ORIGINAL
= Store only the number of rows and columns with the grid
file.
XY
= Output the data in an X, Y format, i.e., contour files.
XYZ
= Output the data in X,Y, Z format, i.e., fault and vertex files.
XYZABW
= Output the data in an XYZ, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, Z WT format.
XYZABCDW = Output the data in an X, Y, Z, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, DZ2/DXDY,
X WT, Y WT
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
XYZ meant for a data file
ZCL PROCESSES
EXPORTCPSFILE
R2003.12.0
EXPORT-CPS-FILE: Parameters
168
Landmark
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE
Macro Name
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE
Menu Option
File Save As ZGF Flat File
Purpose
This macro converts a graphics file (ZGF) to a flat ASCII file.
Description
You must input a ZGF.
Results
A flat (ASCII) graphics file.

Enter the ZGF Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the input ZGF graphics file.

ZGFNAME
C*80
ZCL default
Enter the Flat File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the neutral graphics file for the flat file version of the
entire ZGF.
DISKFILE
C*80
ZCL default
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE
169
Landmark
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE: Parameters
Do You Want a Printed Report

Description
Specify if a status report is to be produced. This report is output to

the processing window and gives you a message as each picture
name is transferred to the flat file.
Macro Parameter
DISKFILE
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Status report produced.

= No status report
produced.
C*4
YES
ZCL PROCESSES
EXPORT ZGF FILE
R2003.12.0
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE: Parameters
170
Landmark
FASTCONTOURMAP
Macro Name
FASTCONTOURMAP
Menu Option
Features Contouring Fast Contour
Purpose
This macro builds a grid and then generates a contour map from the
selected z field on your data file.
Description
You are asked to supply the following input values:
Results
well dataset
z field on the well dataset
a fault dataset (optional)
grid interval (optional)
contouring interval (optional)
ZGF name and picture name
A contour map of the grid created from the z field.

This Macro Uses Point Data
Use FASTMAPFROMGRID.ZCLMAC to make a fast map using gridded

data.

*Name of Data File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input control point file.

DATA
C*24
No default
for the Data File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input control point file.

MFDDATA
I
0 through 5
FASTCONTOURMAP
171
Landmark
FASTCONTOURMAP: Parameters
Number of Field in Data File to Grid/Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the field on the control point file to grid and contour.
INFLD
I
ZCL default first Z Value field
Name of Fault File (Optional)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value:

FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD that contains the input fault file.

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
Grid Interval
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Desired grid increment.

Note: Seismic data runs very slowly with a small grid interval
GINC
R
No default
Contour Interval
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Interval between successive contours. Used when NCONTOUR is

less than or equal to zero.
CONINT
R
50.0
172
Landmark
*The Graphics File Name for the Map

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the graphics file (ZGF) and picture ready to receive

graphics. If the map is projected, the PROJECTION setup
commands must be executed before the picture is opened. The
latitude and longitude parameters are required for projected maps
and are ignored otherwise.
ZGF
C*80
No default
Is the Graphics File New or Old

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether the graphics file is old or new.

OLDZGF
Options
NEW
OLD
Data Type
Default Value
= New graphics file

= Old graphics file
C*4
OLD
The Picture Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the picture file to be created.

PIC
C*80
ZCL default
ZCL PROCESSES
POINT GRIDDING
PICTURE
BORDER
LABEL N/E
CONTOUR
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0
173
Landmark
FASTMAPFROMGRID
Macro Name
FASTMAPFROMGRID
Menu Option
Features Contouring Fast Contour
Purpose
This macro builds a contour map using a grid file. A map border and
border labels are also added to the map.
Description
Results
a grid dataset
contouring interval (optional)
graphics file and picture names
A contour map of the grid.

*Name of Grid to Contour
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the grid to contour.

GRIDIN
C*24
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input grid.

MFDGRID
I
0 through 5
FASTMAPFROMGRID
174
Landmark
FASTMAPFROMGRID: Parameters
Name of Fault File (Optional)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the fault file.You should specify this parameter if the input
grid was built using faults.
FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Input Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
0 scratch MFD
Contour Interval
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Interval between successive contours. Specified in grid attribute

units.
CONINT
R
50.0
The Graphics File Name for the Map

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

graphics. If the map is projected, the PROJECTION setup
Latitude and Longitude parameters are required for projected maps
and are ignored otherwise.
ZGF
C*80
ZCL default
175
Landmark
Is the Graphics File New or Old

Description
Macro Parameter

OLDZGF
Options
NEW
OLD
Data Type
Default Value
= New graphics file

= Old graphics file
C*4
NEW
The Picture Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

PIC
C*80
DEFAULT PICTURE
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR
LABEL N/E
PICTURE
BORDER
R2003.12.0
176
Landmark
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS
Macro Name
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS
Menu Option
Operations Faults Calculate Fault Fields
Purpose
You can use this macro to edit center-line fault files. When center-line
fault files are output from certain macros, they require editing before
you process them further in Point Gridding Plus. Once you have edited
the fields in a center-line fault file, you can use the enhanced fault
processing available in Point Gridding Plus.
The three field types used by Point Gridding Plus are:
vertical separation
heave
fault dip angle

When center-line fault traces emerge from the FAULT-SHRINKER
macro, the unedited fields usually do not have consistently good
vertical separation and heave values. In editing the center-line fault files
we have a good idea what the vertical separation values should be, but a
poor understanding of what the heaves should look like. Since these
heaves are used in Point Gridding Plus to produce the geometry of the
expanded fault polygon traces, they are the focus of the field value
editing.
Fault Dip Angle Field
Point Gridding Plus does not presently use the fault angle in the center-line
fault file. However, fault dip angle usually varies in a smooth and predictable
fashion, and we can concentrate our efforts on editing this field value. Then
we use FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS to recalculate the heave field values.
Description
You must input a center-line fault file. The file must have vertical
separation, heave, and fault dip angle fields.
You select either the vertical separation or heave field to be backfilled.
This macro overwrites the values of the field you select with new values
based on the input values of the other two fields.
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS uses simple right angle trigonometry in the
calculations. If one of the fields being used in the calculations has a
ZNON value, the ZNON is propagated to the new output field.
Results
R2003.12.0
A fault file with a calculated third field value. The calculated value is
derived from the known values of the other two (out of three) fields:
vertical separation, heave, and fault dip angle fields.
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS
177
Landmark
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS: Workflow
A typical workflow for preparing a center-line fault file for use in Point
Gridding Plus appears below.
Generate a pseudo-seismic file from grid nodes
using the GRID-TO-SEISMIC macro.
Convert hand-interpreted fault polygons to

center-line fault traces using the FAULT-SHRINKER
Post the fault traces derived from

FAULT-SHRINKER on a map. Visually check heave
and vertical separation values by using the
FAULT-PROFILING macro.
Backfill the fault angle field in the center-line fault file
using the FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS macro.
Examine the new fault angle fields by using the

FAULT-PROFILING macro. Using the Z-MAP Plus
Edit Edit/Create Data task, edit the fault angle
and vertical separation values.
Run the FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS macro again.

This brings the heave field values in line with the
edited vertical separation and fault angle fields.
Recheck the resulting heaves by running the

FAULT-PROFILING macro again on the new heave
values. Re-run Point Gridding Plus to obtain better
expanded fault geometries.
Workflow for Preparing a Center-line Fault File for Use in Point Gridding Plus
R2003.12.0
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS: Workflow
178
Landmark
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS: Parameters

Select Input Center Line Fault File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
This is the input file for which you want a new field value to be
calculated.
FAULTIN
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD that contains the input fault file you want to use.
MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Choose the Correct X Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the x field in the input fault file you want to use.
XFLD
I
All X (EASTING) fields in the input file
ZCL default first field of the appropriate type
Choose the Correct Y field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the y field in the input fault file you want to use.
YFLD
I
All Y (NORTHING) fields in the input file
Choose the Correct SEG I.D. Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Select the SEG I.D. field in the input fault file you want to use.
SEGID
I
All SEG I.D. fields in the input file
179
Landmark
Choose the Correct Vertical Separation Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Vertical separation field in the input fault file.

VSEP
I
All DELTA Z-THROW fields in the input file
Choose the Correct Fault Angle Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Fault dip angle field in the input fault file. This field can be either in
radians or decimal degrees.
Note: FAULT-SHRINKER results are in decimal degrees.
ANGL
I
All DIP ANGLE fields in the input file
Choose the Correct Heave field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Fault heave field in the input fault file.

HEAV
I
All HEAVE fields in the input file
What Field Would You Like To Solve For

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the field whose value you want to calculate.

METHOD
Options
BACKFILL ANGLE
BACKFILL HEAVE
BACKFILL THROW
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*16
BACKFILL ANGLE
180
Landmark
Values in the Angle Field Are In

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the units in which fault dip angle is currently measured. If

METHOD (above) is BACKFILL ANGLE then this parameter is
ignored and the angle field is written out in decimal degrees.
ANGLE
Options
DECIMAL DEGREES
RADIANS
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
DECIMAL DEGREES
Name of the Output Back-Filled Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output file to which the new field values are to be
written.
FLTOUT
C*24
FAULTS ANGLE FILLED
MFD to Write the Fault File to

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the output fault file.

FLTOMFD
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE
FILE UTILITY
BRANCH
DUAL DATA OPS
SINGLE DATA OPS
R2003.12.0
181
Landmark
FAULT-BALANCER
Macro Name
FAULT-BALANCER
Menu Option
Operations Faults Balancer
Purpose
This macro:
locates bifurcations in a centerline fault file

removes small segments of the crossing faults that are not needed
extends (snaps) fault traces that almost touch another fault so that
the two faults meet
adds vertices to each fault at the bifurcation points
balances vertical separation at the bifurcations
reports the Segment I.D. of faults that appear to have incorrect
patterns of vertical separation
You would normally use this macro before running Point Gridding Plus
and after running the FAULT-SHRINKER macro.
Description
You are asked to specify:
Results
name of the input fault file and its associated MFD

the vertical separation (throw) field on the input fault file
extent of the output report
tolerance distance to be used in determining whether one fault
touches another
maximum distance to extrapolate vertical separation (throw) along
the fault
name of the output balanced centerline fault
MFD for the output balanced centerline fault
Output from the macro includes a centerline fault file with
centerline fault traces snapped and clipped at bifurcation or

compensation points
the vertical separation along splitting faults balanced at the fault

trace intersection
You may need to perform minor touch up to the vertical separation

values calculated in this macro before running Point Gridding Plus.
R2003.12.0
FAULT-BALANCER
182
Landmark
FAULT-BALANCER: Parameters

*Select Input Fault File (Center-Line)
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

FAULTIN
C*24
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Fault File Throw Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Vertical separation (Throw) field in the input fault file.

FLTVSFLD
I
All vertical separation fields in the input fault file
Report Information During Execution

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the extent of the processing analysis report.

REPORT
Options
NONE = No report, except error messages.
FULL = Full report.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*4
FULL
183
Landmark
Distance for Fault Closures

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the digitization precision tolerance. A fault whose end is

within this distance of another fault trace is considered a branch of
that fault trace, and is clipped or snapped accordingly. A fault trace
shorter than this distance is discarded.
TOLERANC
R
> 0.0
ZCL default 1/256 of diagonal of bounding rectangle of fault data
Max Distance to Extrap. Throw Along Fault

Description
Specify the distance at which vertical separation, extrapolated

along a fault trace loses significance.
Weight Of A Vertical Separation
The weight of a vertical separation is considered to decrease

exponentially along the fault: W = W.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
DISTANCE
R
> 0.0
ZCL default 1/16 of diagonal of bounding rectangle of fault data
Output Balanced Center-Line Fault

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the output fault file.

FAULTOUT
C*24
ZCL default
184
Landmark
MFD for Output Faults

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output fault file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
FAULT BALANCE
R2003.12.0
185
Landmark
FAULT-CONTOURS
Macro Name
FAULT-CONTOURS
Menu Option
Macros Quick Look Contour Map (from Grid, Faults)
Purpose
This macro allows you to put color-filled contours and a color bar on
your map and change the colors of your contours. The macro uses the
Profile Contouring algorithm with the FAULT option instead of the
PROFILE option. Therefore, the grids can be created using algorithms
other than Point Gridding Plus. You may also clip either inside or
outside of a polygon.
Description
You are required to input:
a grid dataset
a fault dataset
You also have the option to input:
Results
R2003.12.0
a polygon dataset to restrict contouring (if a polygon file is used,

you are asked whether to clip inside or outside the polygon)

minimum and contour maximum
line color information
A contour map using the above information.
FAULT-CONTOURS
186
Landmark
FAULT-CONTOURS: Parameters

*Input Grid Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

GRIDIN
C*24
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Name of the Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input discontinuity fault file for contour generation.

FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default
for the Input Fault File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
187
Landmark
Description
Macro Parameter
Specify how smooth the contour line should be. All contours are
made up of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these
lines, the rougher (coarser) the contour looks.
SMOOTH
Options
interval
COARSE
interval.
MEDIUM
grid interval.
FINE
interval.
grid interval.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
MEDIUM

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the number of contour levels.

NCONTOUR
I
0 through 255
50

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Lowest contour level to be drawn. This is always the first contour

that is drawn.
CONMIN
R
ZCL default calculated from input data
188
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Highest contour level to be drawn. This is always the last contour

that is drawn.
CONMAX
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

CONINT
R
Rate at Which to Label Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

LABLRATE
I
1
Size of the Labels on Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of the character in the contour label, in plotter units (in or

cm).
LABLSIZE
R
0.07 in or 0.2 cm
Contour Label Color Index Number

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

LABLCOLR
I
0 through 255
9
189
Landmark
Rate at Which Contours are Bold

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
contour, etc.
BOLDRATE
I
0
Rate at Which Contours are Hachured

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

HACHRATE
I
0
Rate at Which Contours are Dashed

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Rate for drawing dashed contours.

DASHRATE
I
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the method chosen to color contours and hence control the
meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
LINCLRTP
Options
HIGHLIGHT
INCREMENT
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

STARTCLR color. LINERATE, HILTCOLR and
STARTCLR are described next.
C*12
HIGHLIGHT
190
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
in this color.
STARTCLR
I
0 through 255
3

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index to begin highlighting contours.

HILTCOLR
I
0 through 255
4
Rate at Which to Change Line Color

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The contour color is changed at this rate.

colored in the STARTCLR color.
LINERATE
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether or not the area between contours is color-filled.

COLORFIL
Options
COLORFILL
= Colorfill between the contours.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*12
COLORFILLED
191
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether or not contour lines are used to generate colorfill

polygons.
CNTRFILL
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Use the contours to help generate the colorfill.

C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate whether to draw the contour lines.

POSTCNTR
Options
POST
OMIT
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
POST

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the location of the color bar.

COLORBAR
Options
NONE
LEFT
RIGHT
ABOVE
BELOW
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
No color bar
Left of the map
Right of the map
Above the map
Below the map
C*8
NONE
192
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the starting color index.

FILLCOLR
I
0 through 255
56

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

FILLRATE
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter

FILBELOW
Options
YE
S
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Colorfill below the lowest contour.

= Stop colorfilling at the lowest contour.
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter

FILABOVE
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
YES
193
Landmark
Name of the POLYGON File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input vertex file containing polygons. Contours are

clipped to the input polygon(s) for display.
POLYGONS
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Input Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
The MFD that contains the input vertex (polygon) file.

MFDPOLY
I

Description
Macro Parameter

when clipping file is specified.
POLYCLIP
Options
INSIDE
OUTSIDE
Data Type
Default Value

C*8
OUTSIDE

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

BLNKRATE
I
1
194
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

BLNKDIST.
BLNKDIST
R
0.05 in or 0.15 cm
Draw the Profile Lines on the Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate whether or not to draw profile lines on the picture. The

fault profile selected at the beginning of the macro is drawn as a
solid line, using the color index specified for PROFCOLR.
PLOTFALT
Do not Answer YES to this Parameter Unless You Have Selected
Fault Profiles
If fault profiles are not selected and YES is specified here, the job
Options
YES
NO
Default Value
= Profile lines are drawn on the picture.

= Profile lines are not drawn on the picture.
YES
Color for the Profile Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color index for drawing profile lines.

FALTCOLR
I
0 through 255
14
195
Landmark
Draw the Polygon on the Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate whether or not to draw polygon lines on the picture. These

polygons are used to clip the colorfill and the contours.
PLOTPOLY
Do not Answer YES to this Parameter unless you have selected
Polygon Files
If polygon files are not selected and YES is specified here, the job
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Polygon lines are drawn on the picture.

= Polygon lines are not drawn on the picture.
C*4
NO
Color for the Polygon

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index for drawing polygon lines.

POLYCOLR
I
0 through 255
16
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR NEW
BRANCH
POST DATA NEW
R2003.12.0
196
Landmark
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL
Macro Name
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL
Menu Option
Operations Faults Dip Symbol Generator
Purpose
This macro assists in symbolization of fault polygons produced by the

fault expansion phase of the Point Gridding Plus post-processing
module. This macro produces polylines. If drawn with hachures, these
lines mark the down-dip sides of certain fault polygons. The fault dip
polygons that receive the down-dip symbols are derived by expanding
fault centerlines using the associated fault geometry data. You can have
the macro draw the lines on the attached picture.
Description
R2003.12.0
an input FALT file with centerline faults that has a Vertical

Separation (Throw) field and either a Dip Angle field or a Fault
Gap (Heave) field
the name of the output file for the symbolization polylines
whether depth units increase downward (Positive Depth) or

upward (Negative Depth)
whether Dip Angle is measured in degrees or radians
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL
197
Landmark
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL: Results
Results
A vertex (VERT) file containing polylines to mark the down-dip sides

of expanded faults. Optionally, these faults can be displayed in a
picture.
Polylines and Hachures Posted Using FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL.PICMAC
R2003.12.0
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL: Results
198
Landmark
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL: Parameters

Input Centerline Fault File for Dip Symbols
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The name of the input centerline fault file.

FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Input Center-line Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD that contains the input centerline fault file.

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
Output VERT File for Dip Symbol Traces

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output vertex file containing polylines to be posted

with hachures for down-dip symbolization.
SYMBOLS
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Output VERT File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD to use for storing the output vertex file.

MFDSYMBL
C*24
0 through 5
199
Landmark
Sense of Increasing Depth

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate whether depth numbers increase downward or upward.

DEPUNITS
Options
POSITIVE DEPTH = Numbers get larger the deeper you go.
NEGATIVE DEPTH = Numbers get smaller the deeper you go.
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
POSITIVE DEPTH
Units of Dip Angle

Description
Macro Parameter
Dip Angle units can be measured in degrees, radians, or grads

DIPUNIT
Options
RADIANS
DEGREES
GRADS
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
DEGREES
Level of Progress Reports

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify how many intermediate reports are printed during module

execution.
REPORT
Options
NONE
PARTIAL
FULL
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= No report is generated.
= Messages printed at the start of major operations.
= Intermediate messages printed during various processing
operations.
C*8
PATIAL
200
Landmark
Draw the Faults with Dip on the Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether the faults with dip symbol are to be drawn on the
picture or not.
DRAW
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label the sections.

= Do not label the sections.
C*4
YES
Color of the Faults

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index for drawing primary lines.

COLOR
I
0 through 255
20
Length between Hachures

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of the gap in hachure pattern, in plotter units (in or cm).

HLNTH
R
0.20 in or 0.5 cm
Height of Hachure Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of the hachure pattern for drawing primary lines, in plotter

units (in or cm).
HSIZE
R
0.15 in or 0.4 cm
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE
FLT D SYMB C
POST DATA NEW
R2003.12.0
201
Landmark
FAULT-MIGRATION
Macro Name
FAULT-MIGRATION
Menu Option
Operations Faults Migrator
Purpose
This macro migrates a set of centerline traces from their current map
position to the position they would have on a structure surface either
above or below the structure surface to which the faults belong. You
must input a fault file containing centerline faults with dip and vertical
separation. The isochore thickness (thickness between the horizon to
which the faults belong and the horizon to which the faults are to be
migrated) may be encoded on the input fault file or may be input
directly as a constant value. You can specify rates of change of dip and
vertical separation (throw) to model the migration of listric faults.
The thickness field in the input fault file is normally created by
interpolating values from an unfaulted isochore grid that represents
thickness between the surface for which faults exist and the surface to
which the faults are migrated.
After migration, some minor editing is usually required to fix separated
bifurcations and to remove or add faults that die out or startup on the
target structure surface. FAULT BALANCER.ZCLMAC can help
accomplish these aims.
Description
You are asked to specify the following input value:
R2003.12.0
a required fault file, its associated MFD, and field parameters

whether larger or smaller values are deeper
constant dip value if there is no dip field
constant thickness value if there is no z field for isochore thickness
the change in dip angle and vertical separation (throw) for depth
unit
the minimum acceptable length of fault traces
the minimum acceptable vertical separation (throw) value
the output centerline fault file and its associated MFD
FAULT-MIGRATION
202
Landmark
FAULT-MIGRATION: Results
Results
A set of migrated centerline traces. Faults with small vertical separation

at the ends are shortened automatically.
Before You Use the Output File for Other Fault Processing Macros
You must eliminate the isochore thickness value from the file before using the
output file for other fault processing utilities.
Original Fault
Two Migrated Faults
R2003.12.0
FAULT-MIGRATION: Results
203
Landmark
FAULT-MIGRATION: Parameters

*Select Input Fault File (Poly/Centerline)
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input centerline fault file. This file must contain a
vertical separation (throw) field, and optionally contain dip angle
and thickness fields.
FAULTS
C*24
All attached FALT and VERT files
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
Fault File Throw Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The vertical separation (throw) field on the input fault file.

FLTTFLD
I
All DELTA Z-THROW fields
ZCL default first vertical separation field
Fault File Dip-Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The dip angle field on the input fault file.

Note: Values within this field should be between 0.0 to 90 degrees
(No negative value allowed)
FLTAFLD
I
All Dip Angle fields
ZCL default first Dip Angle field
204
Landmark
Fault File Z Field (Formation Thickness)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The z field (formation thickness) on the input fault file.

FLTZFLD
I
All Z VALUE fields
ZCL default first Z Value field
Are Deeper Values Larger or Smaller

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether depth is measured in positive or negative units.

DEPUNITS
Options
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
POSITIVE DEPTH
Display Profiles on Up or Down Thrown Side

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the direction to migrate the fault traces.

DIRECT
Options
UP
= Migrate the fault traces to a higher horizon.
DOWN = Migrate the fault traces to a lower horizon.
Data Type
Default Value
C*4
UP
Constant Dip Value if No Dip Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Override value of the dip angle field. If DIPANGLE = 0, then the

value in the dip angle field on the input centerline fault file is used.
DIPANGLE
R
0.0
205
Landmark
Constant Thickness if No Z Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Override value for the thickness field. If THICKNES = 0, then the

value in the thickness field on the input centerline fault file is used.
THICKNES
R
ZCL default
Change in Dip Angle for Unit of Depth

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Change in dip angle per unit of increasing depth. This parameter is

used for listric faults.
DELTADIP
R
0.0
Change in Throw for Unit of Depth

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Change in vertical separation (throw) per unit of increasing depth.

DELTATHR
R
0.0
Minimum Acceptable Length of Fault Traces

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum acceptable length for the existing fault traces. Shorter

fault traces are treated as unimportant and therefore are not written
to the output fault file.
LENMIN
R
0.0
206
Landmark
Minimum Acceptable Throw Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum acceptable absolute vertical separation (throw) value of

the ends of the resulting fault traces. Smaller vertical separations
(throws) are treated as unimportant and are set to zero. Fault traces
with the absolute vertical separation (throw) values at the ends that
are less than THROWMIN have these ends cut before the traces are
written to the output file. Consequently, the resulting fault traces
have vertical separation (throw) values equal to zero at their ends,
but are shorter.
THROWMIN
R
0.0
Output Centerline Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output centerline fault file.

FAULTOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Centerline Faults

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD to contain the output centerline fault file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
FAULT MIGRATION
R2003.12.0
207
Landmark
FAULT-PROFILING
Macro Name
FAULT-PROFILING
Menu Option
Operations Faults Profiler
Purpose
This process creates a fault file and a vertex file which graphically
describe an attribute distribution along a centerline fault. This attribute
could be throw, heave or fault angle. The output, if displayed on a map
with the original centerline faults, provides a visual representation of
the chosen attribute field in the fault file. The output can be thought of
as a cross-section profile of the attribute laid on its side. The input fault
traces are the baseline for the cross section and represent a value of
zero for the attribute on the section. Positive deviations from the
centerline faults (positive throws, for instance) appear by default on the
upthrown side of the fault, while negatives appear on the downthrown
side. The output display from this process can be used for the following
purposes:
Identify reversals in the direction of throw along a fault.

Detect high variations in throw along the fault.
Evaluate how well the fault balances at bifurcations.
Using closed polygons, you can colorfill the area between the input
faults and the profile faults that result from this process. The closed
polygons consist of the input faults tied with the profile faults. You can
save both the polygon and the map view profile fault file.
Description
You are asked for the:
Results
R2003.12.0
required fault file and its field parameters

map scaling profile method
maximum profile height
depth in positive or negative units
side of trace on which the profile should appear
output fault and polygon profile file names
color and posting information for polygons and lines
A fault file and a vertex file which graphically describe an attribute

distribution along a centerline fault.
FAULT-PROFILING
208
Landmark
FAULT-PROFILING: Parameters

*Select Fault File (Center Line w/Throw)
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The name of the input centerline fault file. This file must contain a
vertical separation (throw) field, and can also contain dip angle and
thickness fields.
FAULTS
C*24
All attached DATA, VERT and FALT files
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
X Field to Use for Baseline Profile

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the x field in the input fault file you want to use for the
baseline profile.
XFLD
I
All X (EASTING) fields in the input fault file
Y Field to Use for Baseline Profile

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Select the y field in the input fault file you want to use for the
baseline profile.
YFLD
I
All Y (NORTHING) fields in the input fault file
209
Landmark
SEG I.D. Field for Baseline Profile

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the SEG I.D. field in the input fault file you want to use for
the baseline profile.
SEGF
I
All SEG I.D. fields in the input fault file
Field Value that is to be Profiled

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the field in the input fault file you want to use for the profile.
FALTTFLD
I
All fields on the input fault file
ZCL default
Method for Map Scaling Profile

Description
Macro Parameter
Method for defining the profile map scale.

DEFMETH
Options
DEFAULT = Use the ZCL default
SPECIFY = User value specified by PHGHT
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
DEFAULT
Specify Maximum Profile Height

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum height of the profile. Used when DEFMETH =

SPECIFY
PHGHT
R
100.0
210
Landmark
Depth in Positive or Negative Units

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether depth is measured in positive or negative units.

DEPUNITS
Options
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
NEGATIVE DEPTH
Side of Traces Profiles Should Appear On

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify where you want the profiles to appear in relation to the

center line trace.
DIRECT
Options
UP
= Profiles should appear on the up-thrown side of the center line fault
traces.
DOWN = Profiles should appear on the down-thrown side of the center line
fault traces.
Data Type
Default Value
C*4
UP
Write the Output Files to MFDs

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicate whether you want output files stored on MFDs.

KEEP
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Store output files on MFDs.

= Do not store output files on MFDs.
C*4
NO
*Output Fault File (w/Throws in Map View)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the output fault file. This file contains the fault vertical
separation (throws) as map view profiles.
FAULTOUT
C*24
No default
211
Landmark
MFD for the Output Faults

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output centerline fault file.
MFDFLOUT
I
0 through 5
0 scratch MFD
*Output Profile Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of output vertex file. This file contains the fault vertical
separation (throw) profiles as closed map view polygons which may
be colorfilled or displayed as dashed lines to enhance the final map.
VERTICES
C*24
No default
MFD for the Output Polygons

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output vertex file.

MFDVERT
I
0 through 5
0 scratch MFD
Add the Profile to the Current Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether you want the profile added to the current picture.
GRAPH
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Add the profile to the current picture.

= Do not add the profile to the current picture.
C*4
YES
212
Landmark
Color to Use for Polygon

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the color index for the polygon.

CPOLY
I
27
Color to Use for Polygon Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the color index for drawing the polygon line.

LPOLY
I
0 through 255
28
Post the Center Line Fault Traces

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether to add center line fault traces to the current picture.
ADDCL
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Add the fault traces to the current picture.

= Do not add the fault traces to the current picture.
C*4
YES
Color for Centerline Traces

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the color index for drawing the center line traces.
CCLNS
I
0 through 255
29
ZCL PROCESSES
COLOR POLYGONS
DATA BLOCK PRINT
DATA STATISTICS
FAULT PROFILING
POST DATA NEW
R2003.12.0
DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK UTILITY
DELETE FILE
FILE UTILITY
BRANCH
213
Landmark
FAULT-SHRINKER
Macro Name
FAULT-SHRINKER
Menu Option
Operations Faults Shrinker
Purpose
This macro automatically converts faults with gaps to centerline faults.

If a seismic data file is also input, then the process calculates vertical
separations (throw), and heave and dip angle values at those points
where the seismic line crosses the newly created centerline faults. If the
faults are already centerline faults, the macro calculates vertical
separation at seismic crossings, with heave returned as zero and dip as
ninety. The centerline faults with vertical separation that are output by
this macro are standard inputs to Point Gridding Plus.
If a fault and a seismic line meet at a very acute angle, you may not
wish to use that seismic line to calculate vertical separation. The size of
acceptable angles is determined by the Code for Minimum
Seismic/Fault Angle parameter.
When seismic data is not available, fault vertical separation can
sometimes be calculated using geologic rules of thumb. In this situation
you can specify parameters such as the average fault dip angle and the
dip direction that the module uses to estimate fault vertical separation.
Note that only the x, y, and ID fields are copied from the input fault file
to the output fault file. The macro creates all other fields, including:
vertical separation (throw), dip, and heave.
R2003.12.0
FAULT-SHRINKER
214
Landmark
FAULT-SHRINKER: Description
Description
Results
a required fault file (polygons or centerline)

a seismic data file (optional)
the z field for calculating vertical separation (throw)
number of points for calculating vertical separation (throw)
tolerance for calculating centerlines
maximum heave of any fault polygon
distance for fault polygon closure
minimum heave of any fault centerline
whether or not the fault is convex, concave, or neither
whether to use the orientation of the fault to find down dip
dip angle (optional)
dip direction (optional)
whether or not to analyze the consistency of the vertical separation
(throw)/dip/heave data
type of report output
tolerance number for fault seismic crossings
names of all output files and MFDs
This macro always outputs a centerline fault file. This file contains fault
vertical separation, fault polygon gap, and fault polygon dip angle
fields. The original fault polygons can be reconstructed from the
centerlines and the fault gap data stored at every vertex of each
centerline fault.
If seismic data is input, a vertex exists along each centerline fault where
the seismic line crosses the fault, and a vertical separation value is
stored in the corresponding field.
If general fault dip direction and dip angle, or other rules, are used to
compute vertical separation, every vertex on the centerline file has a
vertical separation value, a fault gap value, and a fault dip angle value.
However, if fault geometry information is derived only from seismic
information, then most output vertices have void marker values for
vertical separation, and all vertices have void marker values for fault
dip angle.
R2003.12.0
FAULT-SHRINKER: Description
215
Landmark
FAULT-SHRINKER: Results (continued)
Point Gridding Plus interpolates values of vertical separation at fault

vertices that have void marker values. You can request a centerline fault
file with missing values filled in as would be done in Point Gridding
Plus. This file can be listed or plotted for quality control purposes.
In addition, Point Gridding Plus automatically expands fault centerlines
into fault polygons. To verify that this macro is producing good
centerline values, you can request output of an expanded fault polygon
file. This file can be compared graphically with the input fault polygon
file.
At your request, the Fault Shrinker analyzes output faults for possible
errors such as faults with reversal of vertical separation along the fault.
In this case the fault analysis is printed to the screen.

*Input Fault File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input fault file. This may be a polygon or centerline

fault file.
FAULTS
C*24
No default
MFD for Input Centerline Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
FAULT-SHRINKER: Results (continued)
216
Landmark
FAULT-SHRINKER: Parameters
Input Seismic Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input seismic data formatted with X, Y, Z, and a line

ID field. The line ID field can contain line numbers, line names or
SegIDs.
DATAIN
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Input Seismic File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD that contains the input seismic data file.

MFDDATA
I
0 through 5
Seismic File Z-Field to Calculate Throw With

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The z field in the seismic data file.

ZFLD
I
All Z VALUE fields
Tolerance to Calculate Center-Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Raster tolerance used in finding fault centerlines. Should be about

1/100 of fault range in x or y.
TOLERANC
R
100
217
Landmark
Number Larger than Maximum Heave

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum heave of any input fault polygon. This is an estimate

which must be larger than the true maximum heave. This parameter
is used to improve the speed of this module.
HEAVEMAX
R
Length to Test Fault Polygon Closure

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Tolerance used to determine whether an input fault polygon is

closed or open. Normally set to a small fraction of the range of the
input fault data in x or y.
CLOSURE
R
Minimum Heave of any Fault Center-Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum heave to assign to an input fault centerline trace for

which heave cannot be calculated. Should be 0.0 if all the input
faults are true polygons with non-zero interiors. Otherwise it should
be less than the distance between adjacent data points.
WIDTHMIN
R
Side of Fault Assumed Down Dip When No Throw

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether the convexity of a fault trace should be used to

help determine which side is down dip. Used only when seismic
data is not available.
CONVEXTY
Options
CONCAVE = Down dip on concave side of fault trace.
CONVEX = Down dip on convex side of fault trace.
NONE
= Do not use this method.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*8
NONE
218
Landmark
Use Fault Orientation in Finding Down Dip

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether the orientation of a fault relative to a general

direction of dip should be used to help determine which side of a
fault trace is down dip. Used only when seismic data is not
available.
PRFDIREC
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Use this method.

= Do not use this method.
C*4
NO
Optional Constant Dip Angle (in Degrees)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Assigned constant dip angle for all faults, in degrees. Used when
PRFDIREC = YES or CONVEXTY = CONVEX or CONCAVE.
DIPANGLE
R
0.0 through 90.0 degrees
45.0
Optional Preferred Dip Direction

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Preferred dip direction. Required when PRFDIREC = YES.

DIPDIREC
R
360.0 through 360.0 degrees
ZCL default
219
Landmark
Analyze and Report Throw, Dip, Heave Reversals

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether vertical separation (throw), dip and heave values

assigned to each fault trace are analyzed for geologic consistency.
Faults that display reversal of vertical separation (throw) are listed
on the monitor.
ANALYSIS
Options
NO ANALYSIS = Perform no analysis.
ANALYSIS
= Perform analysis and write results to the screen
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
ANALYSIS
Points on Line Used To Calculate Throw

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify how z values along a seismic line are used to compute

vertical separation (throw) across a fault.
EXTRAPLT
Options
CLOSEST 2PTS = Compute the difference between closest points on
opposite sides of the fault.
CLOSEST 4PTS = Use the nearest two data points on both sides of the fault.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
CLOSEST 4 PTS
Amount of Information to Report

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify how many intermediate reports are printed during macro

execution.
REPORT
Options
NONE
PARTIAL
FULL
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= No report
= Messages printed at the start of major operations.
= Intermediate messages printed during various processing
operations.
C*8
PARTIAL
220
Landmark
Tolerance Number for Fault Seismic Crossings

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Tolerance used to detect seismic lines crossing faults at extremely

acute angles. The default value of 2.0 rejects crossings at angles
less than 30 degrees. The larger the value for RATIO, the smaller
the angle used to reject crossings. Keep in mind that RATIO is the
cosecant of the angle between a seismic line and a fault centerline.
For example, a value of 1.03 = 76 degrees; 1.41 = 45 degrees, 2 =
30 degrees; 42.9 = 20 degrees, 5.8 = 10 degrees.
RATIO
R
2.0
Name Output Center-Line Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output centerline fault file.

FAULTOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Output Center-Line Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output centerline fault file.
MFDFLOUT
I
0 through 5
Name Output Center-Line Fault File w/Throws

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the output centerline fault file in which ZNONs in the

vertical separation (throw) and/or dip fields have been replaced by
linearly interpolated values. In order to output this file, the input
fault file must have vertical separation (throw), dip angle, and heave
fields.
INTFTOUT
C*24
ZCL default
221
Landmark
MFD for Output Center-Line Faults w/ Throws

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output centerline fault filein
which ZNONs in the vertical separation (throw) and / or dip fields
have been replaced by linearly interpolated values.
MFDINTFT
I
0 through 5
Name Output Expanded Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output expanded fault file. In order to output this file,
the input centerline fault file must contain both a vertical separation
(throw) and a dip angle field. This file can be used for error
checking when compared to the input fault file.
EXPFTOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Output Expanded Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output expanded fault file.
MFDEXPFT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
FAULT SHRINKER
R2003.12.0
222
Landmark
FAULT-LISTING
Macro Name
FIELD-LISTING
Menu Option
Macros Utilities Data File Field Listing
Purpose
This macro lists the field descriptors for the selected dataset.
Description
You can input a well, seismic, fault, contour, text or vertex dataset.
Results
A listing of statistics on the dataset and a listing of the fields on the

dataset.
For example:
FALT FILE: ANTICLINE FAULTS
CREATED: 19 MAY 92
AT: 17:23
NUMBER OF FIELDS
=
NUMBER OF WORDS PER RECORD =
NUMBER OF DATA RECORDS
=
MINIMUM X-COORD =
36991.00
MAXIMUM X-COORD =
138884.0
MINIMUM Y-COORD =
33020.00
MAXIMUM Y-COORD =
184600.0
FIELD NAME
X-FIELD
0.1000000E+31
Y-FIELD
0.1000000E+31
SEG I.D.
0.1000000E+31
R2003.12.0
3
3
297
DATA TYPE
X (EASTING)
DEFAULT
FORMAT
G17.8
FIRST NUMBER
WORD OF WORDS
1
1
Y (NORTHING)
G17.8
SEG I.D.
G10.3
FAULT-LISTING
ZNON
223
Landmark
FAULT-LISTING: Parameters
PROMPT and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

*Enter the File to Display
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the dataset to input.

FILEIN
C*24
All attached DATA, FALT, VERT, CNTR, TEXT, or DWEL
files
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Diskfile Name (Blank lists to screen)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
To save the field listing to a disk file, specify a file name. If you
leave this field blank, the field listing appears in the Z-MAP Plus
System Window.
DISKOUT
String
Print to the Z-MAP Plus System Window
ZCL PROCESSES
FILE INFO
R2003.12.0
FAULT-LISTING: Parameters
224
Landmark
FILL-BORDER
Macro Name
FILL-BORDER
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Color-filled Border
Purpose
This macro allows you to fill the map area of interest, offsets, or both,
with a selected color. You may execute the macro once to fill in the area
of interest with one color, then execute the macro a second time to fill
in the offsets of the map in another color. If you are running
Z-MAP Plus, you can display the colors in the graphics screen by
selecting View Full Display in the Z-MAP Plus window.
Description
You have the following options:
Results
R2003.12.0
inside
outside
both
Colorfills the area of interest and/or the offsets of the map displayed in
the current picture.
FILL-BORDER
225
Landmark
FILL-BORDER: Parameters

*Select the Fill Type
Description
Type of color coverage desired either inside or outside the border.
Options
INSIDE
= Color inside the map AOI.
OUTSIDE
= Color outside the map AOI, in the map offsets.
INSIDE + OUTSIDE = Color the entire map area.
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
No default
Enter the Color Index for the Fill Color

Description
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index to use for colorfilling map polygon.

I
0 through 255
17
ZCL PROCESSES
BORDER FILL
R2003.12.0
FILL-BORDER: Parameters
226
Landmark
FISHNET-PLOT
Macro Name
FISHNET-PLOT
Menu Option
Features Contouring 3D Fishnet Plot
Purpose
Use this macro to generate an isometric plot.
Description
You must specify:
Results
name of the graphics file

name of the new picture
name of the input grid file
An isometric plot, also known as a perspective map, that reveals surface

detail that may not be apparent in the conventional contour map.

Enter the Graphics File (ZGF) Name
Description
Description
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the graphics file (ZGF) that contains the fishnet picture.
ZGFNAME
C*80
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether the graphics file (ZGF) is old or new.

NEWZGF
Options
NEW
OLD
Data Type
Default Value
= New graphics file

= Old graphics file
C*4
OLD
Enter the New Picture Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

PICNAME
C*80
ZCL default
FISHNET-PLOT
227
Landmark
FISHNET-PLOT: Parameters
Left Margin Space

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the size of the left margin, in plotter units (in or cm).
LEFT
R
1.0 in or 2.5 cm
Right Margin Space

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the size of the right margin, in plotter units (in or cm).
RIGHT
R
1.0 in or 2.5 cm
Top Margin Space

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the size of the top margin in plotter units (in or cm).
TOP
R
1.0 in or 2.5 cm
Bottom Margin Space

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the size of the bottom margin in plotter units (in or cm).
BOTTOM
R
4.0 in or 10.0 cm
*Enter the Input Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

GRID
C*24
No default
228
Landmark
o

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFD
I
0 through 5
Plot a Mesh in Null Areas

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify whether to plot the mesh in null (ZNON) areas.

NULL
Options
DISPLAY
= Display a mesh in ZNON areas.
DO NOT DISPLAY = Do not display a mesh in ZNON areas.
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
DISPLAY
Substitute Value for ZNON

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Substitute value to plot at ZNONs, if NULL = DISPLAY. To have a

flat grid lattice drawn over null grid values, you must enter a
substitute value for ZNON. If the default is taken, the minimum
grid value is used for the ZNON replacement.
NULLSUB
R
ZNON
Plot a Skirt at the Bottom of the Plot

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify if a skirt is to be drawn at the base of the picture.

SKIRT
Options
DISPLAY
= Display a skirt.
DO NOT DISPLAY = Do not display a skirt.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*16
DISPLAY
229
Landmark
Value of the Skirt

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Level of the skirt if one is being drawn.

SKIRTSUB
R
ZCL default ZMIN of the grid
Direction of the Mesh Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Direction(s) in which to draw fishnet.

DIRECT
Options
X ONLY
Y ONLY
X AND Y
NEITHER
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
Draw fishnet in the x direction only.

Draw fishnet in the y direction only.
Draw the fishnet in both directions.
Do not draw the fishnet.
C*8
X AND Y
Plot Which Surface(s)

Description
Macro Parameter
Draw upper, lower, or both surfaces.

SURFACE
Options
UPPER ONLY
= Draw the upper surface only. The surface is only seen from
above the grids with hidden line removed.
LOWER ONLY = Draw the lower surface only. The surface is only seen from
below the grids with hidden lines removed.
BOTH
= Draw both surfaces. The surface is viewed from above and
below the grids or with hidden lines removed.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
UPPER ONLY
Color of the Mesh Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color index of the mesh lines.

LINCLR
I
0 through 255
14
230
Landmark
Color of the Border Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index of the border labels.

LABCLR
I
0 through 255
11
Color of the Axis Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index of the axis lines.

AXISCLR
I
0 through 255
10
Window the Plot

Description
Macro Parameter
Specifies whether to display all or only part of a grid.

WINDOW
Options
WINDOW
= Display a specified part of the grid.
DO NOT WINDOW = Display the whole grid.
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
DO NOT WINDOW
Starting Column
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
First column to plot. Used when WINDOW = WINDOW.

STARTCOL
I
1 first column of the grid
Ending Column
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Last column to plot. Used when WINDOW = WINDOW.

ENDCOL
I
ZCL default last column of the grid
231
Landmark
Starting Row
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
First row to plot. Used when WINDOW = WINDOW.

STARTROW
I
1 top row of the grid
Ending Row
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Last row to plot. Used when WINDOW = WINDOW.

ENDROW
I
ZCL default last row of the grid
Azimuthal Angle of the Plot

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Horizontal angle measured clockwise from the y axis, in degrees.

AZIMUTH
R
0.0 through 360.0
225.00
Elevation Angle of the Plot

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Angle above or below the reference point.

ANGLE
R
0.0 through 360.0
30.000
X Reference Point
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The x value for the reference point.

XREF
R
ZCL default 1/2(XMAX XMIN) of the input grid
232
Landmark
Y Reference Point
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The y value for the reference point.

YREF
R
ZCL default 1/2(YMAX YMIN) of the input grid
Z Reference Point
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The z value for the reference point.

ZREF
R
ZCL default 1/2(ZMAX ZMIN) of the input grid
Distance to View the Surface

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Viewing location is this distance from the point (XREF, YREF,

ZREF).
RANGE
R
ZCL default 8 * largest grid dimension
Label the Plot How

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify how to label the axes.

LABELS
Options
NO LABELS
Z ONLY
X AND Y
ALL THREE
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
Do not label the axes.

Label just the z axis.
Label just the x and y
Label all three axes.
z axes.
C*12
ALL THREE
233
Landmark
Label Format for the X-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify the format to use when labeling the x axis.

XLABLFMT
Options
DECIMAL
SCIENTIFIC
INTEGER
Data Type
Default Value
= Use decimal notation.

= Use scientific notation.
= Use integer notation.
C*12
DECIMAL
Number of Digits Right of Decimal

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of places to the right of the decimal when XLABLFMT =

DECIMAL or SCIENTIFIC.
XDECIMAL
I
ZCL default based on data
Number of Intermediate Tick Marks

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of tick marks between labels on the x axis.

XTICKS
I
Starting Label for the X-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Starting x label value, in engineering units.

XLBLSTRT
R
Increment Between Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Increment between labels on the x axis, in engineering units.

XLBLINC
R
234
Landmark
Ending Label for the X-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Ending x label value, in engineering units.

XLBLEND
R
Size of the X-Axis Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of the x labels, in engineering units.

XLBLHGHT
R
ZCL default
Scale on the X-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Scale factor in the x direction relative to y and z.

XSCALE
R
1.0
Label Format for the Y-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Format to use when labeling the y axis.

YLABLFMT
Options
DECIMAL
SCIENTIFIC
INTEGER
Data Type
Default Value

C*12
DECIMAL

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Number of places to the right of the decimal when YLABLFMT =

YDECIMAL
I
235
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of tick marks between labels on the y axis.

YTICKS
I
Starting Label for the Y-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Starting y label value, in engineering units.

YLBLSTRT
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Increment between labels on the y axis, in engineering units.

YLBLINC
R
Ending Label for the Y-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Ending y label value, in engineering units.

YLBLEND
R
Size of the Y-Axis Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Height of the y labels, in engineering units.

YLBLHGHT
R
.ZCL default
236
Landmark
Scale on the Y-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Scale factor in the y direction relative to x and z.

YSCALE
R
1.0
Label Format for the Z-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Format to use when labeling the z axis.

ZLABLFMT
Options
DECIMAL
SCIENTIFIC
INTEGER
Data Type
Default Value

C*12
DECIMAL

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of places to the right of the decimal when ZLABLFMT =

ZDECIMAL
I

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of tick marks between labels on the z axis.

ZTICKS
I
Starting Label for the Z-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Starting z label value, in engineering units.

ZLBLSTRT
R
237
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Increment between labels on the z axis in engineering units.

ZLBLINC
R
Ending Label for the Z-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Ending z label value, in engineering units.

ZLBLEND
R
Size of the Z-Axis Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of the z labels, in engineering units.

ZLBLHGHT
R
.ZCL default
Scale on the Z-Axis

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Scale factor in the z direction relative to x and y.

ZSCALE
R
ZCL PROCESSES
ISOMETRIC PICTURE
BORDER
ISOMETRIC PLOT
DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK UTILITY
BRANCH
GRID STATISTICS
R2003.12.0
238
Landmark
GEOSORT
Macro Name
GEOSORT
Menu Option
Macros Geophysics Geographical Sorting
Purpose
This macro puts segments of the same line back into geographic order.
The input for the GEOSORT macro is a line file where the segments of
the same line are not sequential on the file. This macro is primarily
used for seismic data.
Description
Results
a dataset containing lines to be sorted (required fields include SEG

I.D., X (Easting), Y (Northing), and Line Name)
a tolerance value that is used to identify disjointed endpoints for

the same line
an output file name
An output dataset with lines sorted correctly.

Enter the File to Sort Geographically
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input file. File must contain x, y, Segment I.D. and
Line Name fields.
FILEIN
C*24
ZCL default
for the Input File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
GEOSORT
239
Landmark
GEOSORT: Parameters
Tolerance for Duplicate Points

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum distance to connect lines. When the endpoints of two

segments (adjacent on the file) are within TOLERANC of each
other, the first point of the second segment is removed and the
segments are given the same Segment I.D.
TOLER
R
1.0
Number of Fields for the Sort (13)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of fields to be sorted.

NFIELDS
I
1
Sort Field 1
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
First of up to three fields on which to sort. Should be the Line Name

field.
SORTFLD1
I
ZCL default
Sort Field 2
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Second of up to three fields on which to sort. Should be the SegID

field.
SORTFLD2
I
ZCL default
Sort Field 3
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Third of up to three fields on which to sort. Should be the new

sequence field (not yet created by this macro).
SORTFLD3
I
ZCL default
GEOSORT: Parameters
240
Landmark
GEOSORT: Parameters
Enter the Resulting File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

FILEOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT
GEOGRAPHIC SORT
DELETE FILE
SORT
R2003.12.0
GEOSORT: Parameters
241
Landmark
GRIDANDMAPX
Macro Name
GRIDANDMAPX
Menu Option
Macros Quick Look Contour Map(from Data)
Purpose
This macro builds a contour map by gridding a z field on a data file and
contouring the resultant grid. It also adds a border, border labels and
posts the well points. All defaults are used in posting and labeling and
coarse contour density is used for speed.
Description
Results
a well dataset
a z field on the well dataset
a grid increment (optional)
the contouring interval (optional)
A contour map of the grid created from the z field.

*ZGF Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

graphics. If the map is to be projected, the PROJECTION setup
Latitude and Longitude parameters are required for projected maps
and ignored otherwise.
ZGF
C*80
No default
GRIDANDMAPX
242
Landmark
GRIDANDMAPX: Parameters
New or Old ZGF

Description
Macro Parameter

OLDZGF
Options
NEW
OLD
Data Type
Default Value
= New graphics file

= Old graphics file
C*3
NEW
Picture Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value:
Name of the picture file to be opened or created.

PIC
C*80
DEFAULT PICTURE
Well Data to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input control point file.

WELLS
C*24
Searches all input data files
ZCL default
MFD for the Input Well Data

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input control point file.

MFD1
I
0 through 5
243
Landmark
Field to Post in the Well Data

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Field in the control point file to post.

WELLFILD
I
All Z Value fields in the input file
Fault File for Contouring

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDFAL
I
0 through 5
Grid Interval
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Desired grid increment.

Note: A small grid increment for seismic data will run slowly.
GINC
Real
No default
244
Landmark
Contour Interval
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

INTERVAL
R
1.0
ZCL PROCESSES
POINT GRIDDING
POST DATA
PICTURE
CONTOUR
BORDER
LABEL N/E
R2003.12.0
245
Landmark
GRID-LT-EQ-GT
Macro Name
GRID-LT-EQ-GT
Menu Option
Modeling Boolean Grid
Purpose
This macro is most useful to output a Boolean grid of 0.0s and 1.0s to
indicate where a formation lies at each node, for example, below, equal
to, or above the Oil Water Contact level.
Description
This macro reads an input grid and produces an output grid where each
node in the input grid is replaced by a flag value that indicates whether
the input Z value is Less Than, Equal To, or Greater Than a designated
Z level value.
GRID-LT-EQ-GT uses the following input values:
Results
grid file
Z level and equality tolerance setting
Flag values
Creates an output grid with flags marking each designated node point
as Greater Than, Equal To, or Less Than the given Z level.

*Select Input Grid File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Enter the input grid to be flagged

GRIDIN
C*24
All grid files that reside in the chosen directory path
REQUIRED
Data Input File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
MFD for the input grid

MFDIN
Integer
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
GRID
GRID-LT-EQ-GT
246
Landmark
GRID-LT-EQ-GT: Parameters
Output Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Output flag grid name

GRIDOUT
C*24
Range
Default Value
GRID
Output Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD for output grid

MFDOUT
Integer
0 through 5
1
Z Level Designation
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Z level compared with grid values

ZLEVEL
Real
Range
Default Value
None
Z Level Tolerance
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Tolerance for equality to Z level

ZTOLER
Real
0 and above
0
247
Landmark
Equality Flag
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Flag value for equality to Z level

EQFLAG
Real
Range
Default Value
Less Than Flag

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Flag for grid value below Z level

LTFLAG
Real
Range
Default Value
Greater Than Flag

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Flag for grid value greater than Z level

GTFLAG
Real
Range
Default Value
ZCL PROCESSES
R2003.12.0
248
Landmark
GRID-TO-SEISMIC
Macro Name
GRID-TO-SEISMIC
Menu Option

Grid-to-Seismic Lines Converter
Purpose
This macro converts the rows and columns of a grid to seismic lines
and concatenates them together in one output seismic file (dataset).
You can specify whether to output:
N-S lines (columns)
W-E lines (rows)
both N-S lines and W-E lines
Description
Using this process, you may create a seismic file for use in conjunction
with the Fault Shrinker macro.
You are asked to specify the following values:
name of the output seismic file and where to store it.
which lines are to be converted
Results
A seismic dataset that contains the x and y values for each grid node
location, with a shotpoint number that is derived from the y value and a
line name derived from the x value.
Proper Sequential Line Name and Shotpoint Record
To generate a file that contains proper sequential line name and shotpoint
number records, you must implement the Data Enumeration macro twice on
the same file, entering the key field first for Line Name and second for
Shotpoint Number. Since this macro creates only Segment I.D. fields, you
next need to export the final file and import it reading in one of the Segment
I.D. fields as the line name and the other as the Shotpoint Number.
For example:
X (EASTING)
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
R2003.12.0
Y (NORTHING)
0.23600E+07
0.23620E+07
0.23640E+07
0.23660E+07
0.23680E+07
0.23700E+07
0.23720E+07
SHOT POINT
0.23600E+07
0.23620E+07
0.23640E+07
0.23660E+07
0.23680E+07
0.23700E+07
0.23720E+07
LINE NAME
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
GRID-TO-SEISMIC
Z VALUE
1999.2
2048.6
2121.3
2201.1
2278.5
2350.6
2424.1
249
Landmark
GRID-TO-SEISMIC : Parameters

*Enter the Name of the Grid File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

GRIDIN
C*24
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
*Name of the Output Seismic File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the merged output data file.

SEISOUT
C*24
No default
MFD of Output Seismic File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD to use for storing the output seismic file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
GRID-TO-SEISMIC : Parameters
250
Landmark
GRID-TO-SEISMIC: Parameters
Which Lines (N-S, W-E, BOTH)

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify which lines are to be converted into seismic lines.

WHICH
Options
N-S
= Columns
W-E
= Rows
N-S and W-E = Rows and columns
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
N-S
ZCL PROCESSES
SPAWN
GRID TO DATA
SORT
EXPORT
IMPORT
MERGE
DELETE FILE
BRANCH
R2003.12.0
GRID-TO-SEISMIC: Parameters
251
Landmark
HAND-CONTOUR
Macro Name
HAND-CONTOUR
Menu Option
Macros Geophysics Seismic Hand-contour Assist
Purpose
This macro assists you in contouring interpreted 2D seismic data by

hand. You can not use 3D seismic data with this macro. The macro
linearly interpolates along seismic lines and outputs the interpolated
values for the selected horizon to a file. You may then post these values
on your basemap or use them as a basis for hand contouring.
Input File - Required Sort Order
The input file must be sorted by line name or line number and shotpoint
number before this macro can be executed.
Fault and other discontinuities are honored.

The purpose of the discontinuity field is to show where a horizon
begins and where a horizon ends. Interpolated values at the calculated
contour crossing points are marked with discontinuity field values of 0.
High and low inflection points along the line are marked with
user-selected discontinuity values. The discontinuity values are added
to the existing discontinuity field or if there is no discontinuity field,
one is appended to the input file.
For posting on a map, the output discontinuity field values need to be
copied into a new symbol type field. The 0.0 values assigned for
contour crossings need to be biased to some other number for symbol
code posting. This can be done with the Range Edit, Single Data
Operations and Merge tasks.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
an input data file

a z field
a discontinuity field
A dataset that contains the interpolated values for a single horizon.
HAND-CONTOUR
252
Landmark
HAND-CONTOUR: Parameters

*Name of the Input Data File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input seismic point file.

DATAIN
C*24
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default
The MFD for the input seismic file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Z-Field to Use for Calculations

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Field in the control point file to use for calculations.

INFLD
I
All Z Value fields
253
Landmark
Discontinuity Field to Use

Description
Field name (number) of the discontinuity field to use. This is an

optional field. However, if you do not have a discontinuity field, the
following message appears:
NO FIELDS FOR THIS PARAMETER FOUND ON FILE /...
You Must Acknowledge the Error Message Before Resuming
Work
In Z-MAP Plus, you must click OK to enter any further parameters.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
DISCFLD
I
All fields of type 55, DISCONTINUITY CODE
Maximum Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Upper contour limit above which no contour point is generated.

UPBOUND
R
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Lower contour limit below which no contour point is generated.

LOWBOUND
R
No default
Contour Interval Between Contour Values

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

CONINT
R
10.00
254
Landmark
Symbol Number for Local Minimums

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Symbol number that appears in the discontinuity field to indicate

that this point is a local minimum.
MINSYMB
I
0 through 255
7
Symbol Number for Local Maximums

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Symbol number that appears in the discontinuity field to indicate

that this point is a local maximum.
MAXSYMB
I
0 through 255
8
Output Data File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Output seismic data file name.

DATAOUT
C*24
ZCL default
Master File for the Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD to use for storing the output seismic data file.
MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
255
Landmark
Retain Endpoints in the Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Specify if endpoints are to be retained in the output file.

RETAIN
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Include endpoints.
= Do not include endpoints.
C*4
YES
ZCL PROCESSES
HAND CONTOUR PNTS
R2003.12.0
256
Landmark
IMPORT-CPS-FILE
Macro Name
IMPORT-CPS-FILE
Menu Option
File Import CPS1 File to MFD/OW
Purpose
This macro imports a CPS SAVE file into a master file (MFD). If the
file is an extended file, the information in the header is read and used. If
it is not an extended file, you are asked to enter the header information.
Description
Specify these input values:
Results
a CPS SAVE file

name of the output file
A CPS SAVE file on the requested file number.

Enter the name of the CPS SAVE File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the CPS SAVE file.

CPSFILE
C*80
ZCL default
"Save" File Number on the File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Specify the output SAVE file number on the disk file for the CPS
data.
SAVENUM
I
1 through 100
1
IMPORT-CPS-FILE
257
Landmark
IMPORT-CPS-FILE: Parameters
Output File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output file imported from the CPS SAVE File. The
only type of files that are output are a grid or a data file.
FILEOUT
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD to use for storing the output file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZNON or Null Value for the File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The null data value for the output file.

ZNON
R
1.0E+30
Minimum X Value (If Grid)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum x coordinate for the output grid. Required when the

CPS SAVE file is in original format.
XMIN
R
ZCL default
258
Landmark
Maximum X Value (If Grid)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum x coordinate for the output grid. Required when the

XMAX
R
ZCL default
Minimum Y Value (If Grid)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum y coordinate for the output grid. Required when the

YMIN
R
ZCL default
Maximum Y Value (If Grid)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum y coordinate for the output grid. Required when the

YMAX
R
ZCL default
Specify How to Determine Grid Size

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether increments or rows and columns are used as input.

Used when the grid CPS SAVE file is in original format.
SPECIFY
INCREMENTS
= Increments are specified.
ROWS&COLUMNS = Number of rows and columns is provided.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*12
INCREMENTS
259
Landmark
Number of Rows (if applicable)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of rows for the output grid. Used when SPECIFY =

ROWS&COLUMNS and the CPS SAVE file is in original format.
NUMROWS
I
1
Number of Columns (if applicable)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of columns for the output grid. Used when SPECIFY =

ROWS&COLUMNS and the CPS SAVE file is in original format.
NUMCOLS
I
1
X-Increment (if applicable)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The x increment for the output grid. Used when SPECIFY =

INCREMENTS and the CPS SAVE file is in original format.
XINC
R
1.0
Y-Increment (if applicable)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The y increment for the output grid. Used when SPECIFY =

INCREMENTS and the CPS SAVE file is in original format.
YINC
R
1.0
260
Landmark
First Field Name (If Not a Grid)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the first field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
to the field type generated from the CPS SAVE file header.
FLDNAMS
C*20
ZCL default based on CPS SAVE file
First Print Format (If Not a Grid)

Description
Macro Parameter
Print format for the first field being created.

FORMATS
Print Formats Must be Appropriate for the Data Type
The print formats for the first through tenth fields must be correct for the
data being output. For information on print format, see Appendix D in
your ZCL Operators Manual, or the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
G15.7
First ZNON (Null) Value (if not a grid)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the first field being created.

ZNONS
R
1.0E+30
Second Field Name (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the second field being created. If blanked, the name

defaults to the field type generated from the CPS SAVE file header.
FLDNAMS
C*20
261
Landmark
Second Print Format (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Print format for the second field being created.

FORMAT2
C*8
G15.7
Second ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the second field being created.

ZNON2
R
1.0E+30
Third Field Name (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the third field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
FLDNAM3
C*20
Third Print Format (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Print format for the third field being created.

FORMAT3
C*8
G15.7
Third ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Null data value for the third field being created.

ZNON3
R
1.0E+30
262
Landmark
Fourth Field Name (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the fourth field being created. If blanked, the name

FLDNAM4
C*20
Fourth Print Format (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Print format for the fourth field being created.

FORMAT4
C*8
G15.7
Fourth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the fourth field being created.

ZNON4
R
1.0E+30
Fifth Field Name (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the fifth field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
FLDNAM5
C*20
Fifth Print Format (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Print format for the fifth field being created.

FORMAT5
C*8
G15.7
263
Landmark
Fifth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the fifth field being created.

ZNON5
R
1.0E+30
Sixth Field Name (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the sixth field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
FLDNAM6
C*20
Sixth Print Format (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Print format for the sixth field being created.

FORMAT6
C*8
G15.7
Sixth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the sixth field being created.

ZNON6
R
1.0E+30
Seventh Field Name (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the seventh field being created. If blanked, the name

FLDNAM7
C*20
264
Landmark
Seventh Print Format (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Print format for the seventh field being created.

FORMAT7
C*8
G15.7
Seventh ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the seventh field being created.

ZNON7
R
1.0E+30
Eighth Field Name (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the eighth field being created. If blanked, the name

FLDNAM8
C*20
Eighth Print Format (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Print format for the eighth field being created.

FORMAT8
C*8
G15.7
Eighth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Null data value for the eighth field being created.

ZNON8
R
1.0E+30
265
Landmark
Ninth Field Name (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the ninth field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
FLDNAM9
C*20
Ninth Print Format (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Print format for the ninth field being created.

FORMAT9
C*8
G15.7
Ninth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the ninth field being created.

ZNON9
R
1.0E+30
Tenth Field Name (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the tenth field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
FLDNAM10
C*20
Tenth Print Format (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Print format for the tenth field being created.

FORMAT10
C*8
G15.7
266
Landmark
Tenth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data value for the tenth field being created.

ZNON10
R
1.0E+30
ZCL PROCESSES
IMPORT CPS FILE
R2003.12.0
267
Landmark
IMPORT-GRID
Macro Name
IMPORT-GRID
Menu Option
File Import Grid File to MFD/OW
Purpose
The purpose of this macro is to prompt you for information to build a

format group. The resulting format group can be used to import the grid
dataset. The format group is saved in a separate dictionary file. This
dictionary file is created by the macro and overwrites another file
sharing the same file name. The grid dataset is contained in a separate
diskfile.
Description
You are prompted to specify these input values:
file name of the input grid dataset
external file name and group name for the format group
File and Field Descriptor Parameters
name of the GRID file to be created

For more about File and Field Description parameters, see Appendix D
of the ZCL Operators Manual, or the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Results
A GRID file in an MFD.

* Name of the Grid Dataset File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the external diskfile file for the grid dataset.

DISKFILE
C*80
No default
Output Dictionary File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the external file to save the format group that results from
this macro.
DICTNARY
C*80
ZCL default
IMPORT-GRID
268
Landmark
IMPORT-GRID: Parameters
Enter the Format Group Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the format group to be used.

GROUP
C*40
ZCL default
Number of Nodes Per Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
How many grid nodes on each physical record of the file for the
grid dataset.
NUMNODES
I
ZCL default
Field Width Occupied by Each Node

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Total space each grid value occupies including the decimal point
and places to the right and left of it.
FLDWIDTH
I
15
ZNON Value of the Grid Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number representing missing grid values.

ZNON
R
1.0E30
Alphanumeric ZNON Indicator of Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
An alphanumeric character string used to indicate a missing grid

value.
ZSTRING
C*12
BLANK
269
Landmark
Decimal Point Location of Grid Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of digits to the right of the decimal point.

NDECIMAL
I
0
Starting Position of Physical Record

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Starting column for the first grid value of each physical record.
STARTPOS
I
1
Number of Rows in Grid Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of rows in the grid.

NUMROW
I
ZCL default
Number of Columns in Grid Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of columns in the grid.

NUMCOL
I
ZCL default
Minimum X-Coordinate of the Grid Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum x coordinate in the grid.

XMIN
R
ZCL default
270
Landmark
Maximum X-Coordinate of the Grid Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum x coordinate in the grid.

XMAX
R
ZCL default
Minimum Y-Coordinate of the Grid Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum y coordinate in the grid.

YMIN
R
ZCL default
Maximum Y-Coordinate of the Grid Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum y coordinate in the grid.

YMAX
R
ZCL default
Reach: Distance from Grid Cell

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum distance from each grid node that the data is obtained
when computing its grid value.
REACH
R
0.0
Distance Beyond X-Grid Boundary

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Distance in x direction beyond the edge of the grid that data could
lie and be used to build the grid.
XEXPAND
R
0.0
271
Landmark
Distance Beyond Y-Grid Boundary

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Distance in y direction beyond the edge of the grid that data could
lie and be used to build the grid.
YEXPAND
R
0.0
Name of the Output Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

GRIDOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Output Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
IMPORT
R2003.12.0
WRITE TEXT
272
Landmark
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE
Macro Name
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE
Menu Option
File Import Disk File to ZGF
Purpose
This macro converts a flat graphics file into a ZGF that is usable in
Z-MAP Plus or other Landmark programs.
Description
Specify these input values:
Results
the flat graphics file to import

the full path name for the new ZGF
A usable ZGF.

Enter the "FLAT" File Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the flat file.

DISKFILE
C*80
ZCL default
Enter the Name of the New ZGF

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the neutral graphics file for the pictures.

ZGFNAME
C*80
ZCL default
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE
273
Landmark
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE: Parameters
Do You Want a Printed Report

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify if a status report is to be produced.

REPORT
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Status report produced

= No status report produced
C*4
YES
ZCL PROCESSES
IMPORT ZGF FILE
R2003.12.0
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE: Parameters
274
Landmark
INTERPOLATION
Macro Name
INTERPOLATION
Menu Option
Macros Geophysics Shotpoint Interpolation
Purpose
This macro allows you to interpolate along a seismic line, repopulating

the line at the indicated shotpoint limit. All necessary interpolation in x,
y, and z directions is performed before the output record is written.
Description
Results
a seismic dataset
the desired shotpoint interval
This macro outputs a seismic dataset with the new shotpoint interval.
The first and last shotpoint for each line are kept. The intermediate
shotpoint numbers that are kept are determined by the first shotpoint in
the line plus whatever you specify as the shotpoint increment. Hence,
with an increment of 10, you do not necessarily get every shotpoint
divisible by 10. If this is your goal, use Operations
Line Resampling in Z-MAP Plus.

Enter the File to be Interpolated
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input seismic data file that is reinterpolated.

DATAIN
C*24
ZCL default
for the Input File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
INTERPOLATION
275
Landmark
INTERPOLATION: Parameters
Enter the Output File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output data file that contains the interpolated and
repopulated seismic data.
DATAOUT
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output data file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
Shotpoint Increment for Output

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Desired shotpoint increment for the output file.

INCRMENT
R
10.0
ZCL PROCESSES
SEIS INTERP THIN
R2003.12.0
INTERPOLATION: Parameters
276
Landmark
LABL-FOUR-CRNS
Macro Name
LABL-FOUR-CRNS
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Four Corner Map Labeling
Purpose
This macro labels each of the four corners of a map with either latitude/
longitude labels or northing/easting labels depending upon the map
type.
Description
Results
a graphics file
a picture name
the type of labels
the size, location and format for the labels
The corners of the map are labeled according to your specifications.

*Enter the ZGF to Label
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the graphics file for the picture to be labeled. The graphics
file must already exist.
ZGF
C*80
No default
*Enter the Picture to Label

Description
Description
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the picture to be labeled. The picture must already exist on

the graphics file defined by ZGF.
PICTURE
C*80
No default
LABL-FOUR-CRNS
277
Landmark
LABL-FOUR-CRNS: Parameters
Type of Labels
Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Indicate whether latitude/longitude, northing/easting, or both types

of labels are to be used.
LTYPE
LATITUDE-LONGITUDE
NORTHING-EASTING
BOTH
Data Type
Default Value
C*20
NORTHING-EASTING
Size of N/E Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Height of characters for northing/easting labels, in plotter units (in

or cm).
NESIZE
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Location of N/E Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify on which side of the map to draw northing/easting labels.

NESIDES
LEFT+BOTTOM
LEFT+TOP
RIGHT+TOP
RIGHT+BOTTOM
ALL SIDES
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
Labels along the bottom and left side

Labels along the top and left side
Labels along the top and right side
Labels along the bottom and right side
Labels on all sides
C*12
ALL SIDES
278
Landmark
Format of N/E Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the format of the northing/easting labels

NEFORM
COMMAS
= Integer with commas
NO COMMAS = Integer without commas
SCIENTIFIC = Scientific Notation
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
COMMAS
Size of L/L Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Height of characters for latitude/longitude labels, in plotter units (in

or cm).
LLSIZE
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Location of L/L Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify on which side of the map to draw latitude/longitude labels.

LLSIDES
LEFT+BOTTOM
LEFT+TOP
RIGHT+BOTTOM
RIGHT+TOP
ALL SIDES
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
Labels along the bottom and left side

Labels along the top and left side
Labels along the top and right side
Labels along the bottom and right side
Labels on all sides
C*12
ALL SIDES
279
Landmark
Format of L/L Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the format of the label.

LLFORM
DEG+MIN
DEG+MIN+SEC
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
DEG+MIN
Offset the labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Indicates if the labels are offset slightly so they are not exactly on
the corners of the map.
LLOFSET
Options
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
Labels are offset.

Labels are not offset.
C*4
YES
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK
PICTURE STATS
DATA BLOCK PRINT
BRANCH
DATA BLOCK UTILITY
LABEL LAT/LONG
LABEL N/E
PROJECTION
PICTURE
R2003.12.0
280
Landmark
LEASE-DRAWING
Macro Name
LEASE-DRAWING
Menu Option
Features Polygons Lease Polygon Drawing
Purpose
This macro allows you to post and label lease polygons. In addition to
labeling each polygon with lease identification information, the macro
gives you the ability to show lease attributes through:
Description
line shading
hachuring
text
color
You are required to specify:
a text dataset that contains lease identification information. This

dataset must contain one or more text fields and the Area
Identification field. It may also contain an Area Symbol code field,
one or more color code fields and multiple z fields.
a vertex dataset that contains the lease identification information.

This dataset must contain X (Easting), Y (Northing), SEG I.D.,
and Area Identification fields.
Area ID for Vertex and Text Must Have the Same Data Type
The Area Identification field for both the text dataset and the vertex dataset
must be of the same data type and have the same field width.
When labeling leases, you are asked to specify:
up to four fields from the lease identification file to use in labeling

each lease
the size of each line of text

Text strings are stacked in the order in which they are selected with
labels automatically center justified. When center justification is not
possible, then labels are right or left justified.
If labels are too large, the macro posts only the last selected label using
a unique two character code that is automatically generated. The text
file entries that cannot be posted are automatically output to a file that
contains the two character identification codes and their meanings.
For more information about this macro, see the following pages.
R2003.12.0
LEASE-DRAWING
281
Landmark
LEASE-DRAWING: Description (continued)
The following ZCL parameter defaults are hard coded into the macro.
Table 1: Hard Coded Defaults
Results
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Description
Default
DIVIDE
This parameter specifies the axis to

use for subdividing lease polygons
when showing shared lease
attributes.
X AXIS
EDGEWDTH
This is the width of the lease edge

shading or lease hachures.
0.1
HALFEDGE
This parameter fits shaded edges to

smaller polygons by halving the
edge width.
YES
EDGESRCE
This is the source for the edge

width color.
COLOR
FIELD
EDGECLR
This is the color of the hachure

lines or color of the edge shading.
Leases posted with the specified attributes are output to the current
basemap.
LEASE-DRAWING: Description (continued)
282
Landmark
LEASE-DRAWING: Technical Notes
Technical Notes
This topic contains technical notes on how to prepare files for Lease
Drawing. It consists of information about preparing Lease Polygon and
Text I.D. files, activating Shared Lease Attributes, as well as some lease
posting hints and a table of the ZCL defaults that have been hardcoded
into the macro.
Preparing Lease Polygon (Vertex) Files
With the exception of the Color Field, the Lease Polygon file must
contain these elements:
X (Easting) or Longitude field

Y (Northing) or Latitude field
Seg I.D. field
Area Identification field
Color field (optional)
Segment I.D. Field

The segment I.D. field is a unique number that remains unchanged for
each individual polygon of a lease.
Area Identification Field
This is a number or a set of characters that is used as the Lease
Identifier. It remains unchanged until the lease changes.
Color Code Field
Optionally, you may add a color field to your file. This field controls
the color used for polygon borders, with one color assigned to each
segment I.D. If a color field is not present or if you choose to ignore
this field, the default color of 1 is used for all polygon borders.
R2003.12.0
283
Landmark
An example of a Lease Polygon file that contains a color field is shown

below.
X (EASTING)
Y (NORTHING)
469433.84
468334.78
468337.47
469458.16
469433.84
457326.53
456162.47
451662.38
451580.72
456082.34
457266.88
458365.97
458423.59
457326.53
460587.62
19321468.
19321444.
19322770.
19322764.
19321468.
19326502.
19326480.
19326504.
19321196.
19321170.
19321196.
19321218.
19326528.
19326502.
19322598.
SEG
I.D.AREA ID
0.Z323144
0.Z323144
0.Z323144
0.Z323144
0.Z323144
1.Z25819
1.Z25819
1.Z25819
1.Z25819
1.Z25819
1.Z25819
1.Z25819
1.Z25819
1.Z25819
2.Z25819A
COLOR
12
12
12
12
12
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
25
Preparing Lease Identification (Text) Files

The Lease Identification File is composed of:
one or more text fields (required)

area identification field (required)
area symbol code field (optional)
segment I.D. field (optional)
color code field (optional)
z field (optional)
These fields are discussed on the following pages.

Text Fields (Required)
Text fields contain the character data needed to label a lease polygon.
Although there may be additional fields on the file, you can only post
up to four fields. Typical text fields include the OWNER and
OPERATOR fields shown in the Lease Identification file below.
R2003.12.0
284
Landmark
Area Identification Field (Required)

The Area Identification field on this file must contain the same
information as the Area Identification field on the Lease Polygon file to
ensure accurate text annotation.
Table 2: Lease Identification File
Area
I.D.
352A
350B
400A
400B
2A65
R2003.12.0
Owner
Operator
BOONE
FINCH
FOYT
SIMPSON
BOONE
COON OIL
ORO OIL
OIL & GAS
OIL & GAS
COON OIL
Area
Symbol
-2.0
-5.0
-4.0
-3.0
-2.0
Color
4.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
Gross
Acres
47.00
80.00
55.00
12.00
124.00
285
Landmark
Area Symbol Code Field (Optional)

This field controls Hachuring, Shading Lines, Edge Shading and
colorfill. If this field is not present, or if you choose to ignore it, you
can select a constant type of symbolization to use for all polygons.
Table 3: Description of Area Symbol Code Values
Code
Option
Description
Cross Shading No
Fill
Down Shading No
Fill
Up Shading No Fill
Produces crossing lines across the entire polygon with no

colorfill.
Produces lines across the entire polygon at a 45 degree down
slope with no colorfill.
Produces lines across the entire polygon at a 45 degree up slope
with no colorfill.
Produces hachures around polygon at a 45 degree down slope
with no colorfill.
Produces hachures around polygon at a 45 degree up slope with
no colorfill.
Produces no hachures, no shaded lines, no edge shading or
colorfill in the lease polygon; produces only lease border and
labels.
Produces hachures at a 45 degree up slope and colorfills the
polygon.
Produces hachures at a 45 degree down slope and colorfills the
polygon.
Produces lines across the entire polygon at a 45 degree up slope
and colorfills the polygon.
Produces lines across the entire polygon at a 45 degree down
slope and colorfills the polygon.
Produces lines that cross shade the entire polygon and colorfills
the polygon.
Colorfills the polygon without hachures, shading lines, or edge
shading.
Produces edge shading with no colorfill.
Produces edge shading with multiple colorfills to show shared
lease attributes.
4
3
2
1
Down Hachure No
Fill
Up Hachure No Fill
No Hachure No Fill
Up Hachure Fill
Down Hachure Fill
Up Shading Fill
Down Shading Fill
Cross Shading Fill
Fill Only
7
8
Edge Shade No Fill

Edge Shading
R2003.12.0
286
Landmark
Segment I.D. Field (Optional)

This field allows you to place a different label in each polygon in a
multi-polygon lease. The information stored in this field must
correspond to that stored for each polygon in the Lease Polygon File. If
the Segment I.D. field is not present, all polygons in the lease have the
same label.
Color Code Fields (Optional)
The first color field in the file determines the color index for hachures,
shading lines, or edge shading. This field is active with all Area Symbol
codes except 0.
The second color field determines the color index for colorfilling the
entire polygon. This field is active with Area Symbol codes 1 through 6.
The third and all subsequent color fields determine the color index for
the sub-polygons used to show shared leases. Color fields for shared
leases are activated by setting the Area Symbol code to 8.
Z Fields (Optional)
One or more z fields are required if the Area Symbol code is set to 8 on
one or more leases. These z fields control the size of the sub-polygons
used in showing shared lease attributes.
R2003.12.0
287
Landmark
Lease Drawing Hints
Store all vertices for a single lease in adjacent records on the

vertex file.
The field that contains the vertices for the outer boundary of a
lease with a hole in it must precede the field that contains the
vertices that outline the hole.
Polygons must close exactly. The maximum number of vertices for

a single lease polygon is 500.
You can use the Lease-Drawing macro to fill in any type of

polygon, including fault polygons and geographical regions.
First trace listed

Second trace listed
Activating Shared Lease Attributes

For a lease with multiple owners, you can assign a different color to
each owner. When displayed, the lease polygon can then illustrate the
percentage of ownership in the lease. The Sample Shared Lease file that
follows shows a Lease Identification File For Shared Lease Attribute
Annotation.
You can activate Shared Lease Attributes by setting the Area Symbol
code to 8 (Edge Shade Fill.) For each color field, there must be a z field.
R2003.12.0
288
Landmark
Note that in the table below, ZVAL1 is paired with COLOR1 and
ZVAL2 is paired with COLOR2. On a shared lease file, these z values
are used to determine the percentage of each lease filled with a
particular color. In other instances, the z values may represent the
percentages of oil and gas in a lease.
Polygons are subdivided along the x axis with the z values determining
the percentage of the lease per owner.
This percentage is determined by: i ( Zi + Z2...Zi...Zn ) 10
Table 4: Sample Shared Lease File
AREA
I.D.
352A
350B
400A
400B
2A65
OWNER
OPERATOR AREA COLOR GROSS ZVAL1

SYMBOL
ACRES
BOONE
COON OIL
8
4
47.00
FINCH
ORO OIL
8
2
80.00
FOYT
OIL & GAS 8
3
55.00
SIMPSON OIL & GAS 8
3
12.00
BOONE
COON OIL
8
4
124.0
COLOR1 ZVAL2 COLOR2

25.00
50.00
50.00
50.00
50.00
81
81
81
81
81
75.00
50.00
50.00
50.00
50.00
95
95
95
95
95

Enter the Input Lease Polygon File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input vertex file for the lease boundaries.

This file should contain fields of type x, y, Segment I.D. and Area
Identification. It may optionally contain a color code field.
VERTICES
C*24
ZCL default
for the Input Lease Polygon File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the vertex file.

MFDVERT
I
0 through 5
289
Landmark
LEASE-DRAWING: Parameters
Enter the Text File to Post in the Leases

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input text file for the lease label information.
This file should include text fields for posting on the lease and the
area identification field. It may optionally contain an area symbol
code which controls the annotation of individual leases. It may also
contain one or more fields and multiple z fields to be used with
matching color code field when HACHURE = EDGE SHADE
FILL is selected.
TEXTIN
C*24
All attached TEXT files
ZCL default
MFD for the Input Text File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the text file.

MFDTEXT
I
0 through 5
Number of Labels Posted for Each Lease (14)

Description
Number of text fields to be labeled.

Z-MAP Plus Users Must Respond to all Field Selections
For LEASE-DRAWING, four field selections are required. If you only

have two fields you want to label, you must select (None - use no field)
for the remaining fields.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
NUMLABEL
I
1 through 4
1
290
Landmark
First Label to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the first field to post.

NUM1
I
ZCL default first Character Text field
Second Label to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the second field to post.

NUM2
I
ZCL default second Character Text field
Third Label to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the third field to post.

NUM3
I
ZCL default third Character Text field
Fourth Label to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the fourth field to post.

NUM4
I
ZCL default fourth Character Text field
Size of the First Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The size, in plotter units (in or cm), of the first label posted.
SIZE1
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Size of the Second Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The size, in plotter units (in or cm), of the second label posted.
SIZE2
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
291
Landmark
Size of the Third Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The size, in plotter units (in or cm), of the third label posted.
SIZE3
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Size of the Fourth Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The size, in plotter units (in or cm), of the fourth label posted.
SIZE4
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Source of Hachure Information

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify how the lease annotation is to be obtained.

HACHSRCE
HACHURE FIELD
= Use Area Symbol field (type 49) in the text file to

guide hachuring and colorfill.
HACHURE VALUE = Use parameter HACHURE to guide hachuring and
colorfill.
Data Type
Default Value
See HACHURE; the Area Symbol field code needed when

HACHSRCE = HACHURE FIELD is listed in parentheses.
C*16
HACHURE FIELD
Source of Color Information

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify how colorfill index information should be obtained for all

lease annotation options.
COLRSRCE
COLOR FIELD = Use the color field on the lease text file.
COLOR VALUE = Use the color index number provided.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*12
COLOR FIELD
292
Landmark
Hachure Type (if not from field)

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify how you want to perform hachuring and colorfilling.

HACHURE
NO HACHURE NO FILL
= Lease border and labels only. (Area Symbol

code = 0)
UP HACHURE NO FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, colorfill (Area
Symbol code = 1)
DOWN HACHURE NO FILL = 45 degrees down to right, hachure around
lease, no colorfill (Area Symbol code = 2)
UP SHADING NO FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
lease, no colorfill (Area Symbol code = 3)
DOWN SHADING NO FILL = 45 degrees down left, lines NO FILL across
entire lease, no colorfill (Area Symbol code
= 4)
CROSS SHADING NO FILL = 45 degrees up and down to right NO FILL
lines across entire lease, no colorfill (Area
Symbol code = 5)
UP HACHURE FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, hachure around lease,
with colorfill (Area Symbol code = 1)
DOWN HACHURE FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, hachure around
lease, with colorfill (Area Symbol code = 2)
UP SHADING FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
DOWN SHADING FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, lines across entire
CROSS SHADING FILL
= 45 degrees up and down to right lines across
entire lease, with colorfill (Area Symbol
code = 5)
FILL ONLY
= Only color fill the lease area (Area Symbol
code = 6)
EDGE SHADE NO FILL
= Border edge shading with multiple colorfill
(Area Symbol code = 7)
EDGE SHADE FILL
= Border edge shading with multiple colorfill
(Area Symbol code =8)
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*24
NO HACHURE NO FILL
293
Landmark
Lease Color (if not from field)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Color index from the currently active color table. It controls the
color of colorfill or hachure lines.
COLOR
I
0 through 255
9
ZCL PROCESSES
POST LEASE
R2003.12.0
294
Landmark
LINE-GRID-PLUS
Macro Name
LINE-GRID-PLUS
Menu Option
Modeling Line Gridding Plus
Purpose
Offers added functionality for Line Gridding.

This macro derives from the ZCL process LINEGRIDPLUS. Line
Gridding Plus provides all the functionality available in classic Line
Gridding and supports new features present in Point Gridding Plus.
Line Gridding Plus honors your input fault geometry data to create
more accurate horizon models than can be provided by the classic Line
Gridding module. When used in combination with Profile Contouring,
Line Gridding Plus will generate high quality maps of faulted surfaces.
You can use Line Gridding Plus to:
Description
grid seismic line data with or without fault data.
build extremely accurate models of faulted horizons, given fault

geometry data.
model the fault faces cutting a horizon, given fault geometry data.
You are prompted to specify the following input values:
Results
Line Gridding Plus gives you the option to save the following outputs:
R2003.12.0
a seismic line file.

a Control Grid file if available.
a fault file with or without fault geometry data.
fault geometry data (Throw, Dip Angle, Heave) if available.
grid extrapolation controls.
Standard Grid file (faulted or un-faulted)

Interpolated fault file
Blanked Grid file
Expanded Fault file
Fault Filled Grid
Fault Profile file
Data Hull Polygon file
Fault-Cut Line file
LINE-GRID-PLUS
295
Landmark
LINE-GRID-PLUS: Parameters

Select Input Seismic Line File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select Input seismic Line file.

LINEIN
DATA
All Attached DATA files
REQUIRED
MFD File for Input Seismic Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The master file (MFD) associated with the selected Line file.
MFDIN
MFDNUM
0 through 5
0
X Field on Input File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
X field on the seismic Line file specified as input.

LINXFLD
I
All fields of type 1, X (Easting)
ZCL default
Y Field on Input File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Y field on the seismic Line file specified as input.

LINYFLD
I
All fields of type 2, Y (Northing)
ZCL default
296
Landmark
Z Field on Input File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Z field on the seismic Line file specified as input.

LINZFLD
I
All Z Value fields in input file
ZCL default
Select Line ID Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The Line ID field on the seismic line file specified as input.

LINIDFLD
FIELD
All LINE type fields on file (Line Name, Seismic Line
Number, SEG I.D)
Line type fields (35+25+22)
Select Input Control Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Designates the Control Grid file specified as input.

CONGRID
C*40
No Default
for Control Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD of the Control Grid file.

MFDCON
MFDNUM
0 through 5
297
Landmark
Select Input Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the Input Fault File.

FAULTS
C*40
FALT+VERT

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Master file (MFD) that contains the fault file specified as input.
MFDFAULT
MFDNUM
0 through 5
Select Fault X Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
X field on the Input Fault file

FLTXFLD
1
All X (EASTING) fields in the input file
ZCL default - first field of the appropriate type
Select Fault Y Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Y field on the Input Fault file

FLTYFLD
2
All Y (NORTHING) fields in the input file
298
Landmark
Select Fault ID Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Segment ID (SegID) field on the Input Fault file

FLTIDFLD
35
All SEG I.D. fields in the input file
Select Fault Throw Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Fault throw field on the Input Fault file

FLTTFLD
REAL
All DELTA Z-THROW fields in the input file
Select Dip Angle Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Fault dip angle field on the Input Fault file

FLTAFLD
REAL
All DIP ANGLE fields in the input file
Select Fault Heave Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Fault heave field on the Input Fault file.

FLTHFLD
REAL
All HEAVE fields in the input file
299
Landmark
Select Input Fault Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select input pre-computed Fault Polygon file.

FLTPOLY
C*40
ZCL default
MFD for Fault Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the Fault Polygon file.

MFDPOLY
MFDNUM
0 through 5
Designate Grid Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Standard grid file name for the output file

GRIDOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Grid Output File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD to use for storing the Grid Output file

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
Select the Interpolated Fault File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Interpolated fault file name

INTFTOUT
OUTPUT
ZCL default
300
Landmark
o
MFD for Interpolated Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the Interpolated fault file

MFDINTFT
I
0 through 5
Select the Blanked Grid File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Blanked Grid File Name

BLKGROUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Blanked Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the Blanked Grid file

MFDBLKGR
I
0 through 5
Select an Expanded Fault File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the expanded fault file

EXPFTOUT
C*24
ZCL default
Expanded Fault File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the Expanded Fault file

MFDEXPFT
I
0 through 5
301
Landmark
Select Fault-filled Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
File name of the Fault-filled Grid

FILGROUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD Fault-filled Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the Fault-filled Grid file

MFDFILGR
I
0 through 5
Select Fault Profile File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
File name of the Fault Profile file

PROFOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Fault Profile File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the Fault Profile file

MFDPROF
I
0 through 5
Select Hull Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Data Hull polygon file name.

HULLFILE
C*24
ZCL default
302
Landmark
o
MFD Hull Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the Hull file

MFDHULL
I
0 through 5
Select Fault-cut Line File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
File name for the Fault-cut Line file

LINECUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD Fault-cut Line File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the Fault-cut file

MFDCUT
MFDNUM
0 through 5
Select Output Type

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Choose the format for the output file

MAKECUTS
C*16
CUT+SAVE+GRID
CUT+SAVE+NOGRID
CUT+NOSAVE+GRID
ALREADY CUT
CUT+NOSAVE+GRID
303
Landmark
Select the Seperate Distance

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Distance between point to cut line.

SEPERATE
REAL
NONE
Select the Control Grid Usage

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Default Value
Determines which control grid to use.

CONTROL
ETEXT
NONE
GRID NON-ZNONS
GRID ZNONS
DEFAULT AOI
NONE
Select X Grid Increment

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The X grid increment.

XINC
REAL
No default
Select Y Grid Increment

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The Y grid increment.

YINC
REAL
No default
304
Landmark
Select X Minimum
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum x coordinate of the output grid.

XMIN
REAL
No default
Select X Maximum
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum x coordinate of the output grid.

XMIN
REAL
No default
Select Y Minimum
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum y coordinate of the output grid.

YMIN
REAL
No default
Select Y Maximum
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Maximum y coordinate of the output grid.

YMAX
REAL
No default
305
Landmark
Select Z Value Minimum

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Set minimum Z value of the output grid.

ZMIN
REAL
No default
Select Z Value Maximum

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Set maximum Z value of the output grid.

ZMAX
REAL
No default
Select ZNON or Null Data Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Set Null data value for the output grid.

ZNON
REAL
1.E+30
Set Radius
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
CONCAVE HULL 1 & 2 Radius.

RADIUS
REAL
No default
306
Landmark
Set Extrapolation
Description
Extrapolation Mode controls whether grid nodes outside the data

perimeter are assigned Z values up to the grid edges or only to a
specified distance from the perimeter. Specify one of these values:
X-DISTANCE Extrapolated values will be calculated away
from the data perimeter as far as the value entered in the
Extrapolation Distance parameter. Using this setting and setting
the Extrapolation Distance parameter to a very large number will
have the same effect as choosing Grid Edges.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Default Value
GRID-EDGES The Extrapolation Distance parameter will be

ignored and node values will be calculated everywhere in the grid.
EXTRAPLT
ETEXT
X-DISTANCE
GRID EDGES
GRID EDGES
Extrapolation Distance
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Enter a number representing the distance away from the data

perimeter within which grid node values can be calculated. All grid
nodes beyond this distance are assigned a ZNON value.
EXTRAP
REAL
2 times the grid increment
Maximum Number of Fault Crossings

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum number of fault crossings allowed between a data

point and a grid node.
MAXCROSS
Integer
No default
307
Landmark
Limit Extrapolation
Description
Data hull determines which grid nodes will be initialized. Line

Gridding Plus offers 4 different algorithms:
DATA DISTRIBUTION. The data distribution method of
determining the gridding area is the method used in classic Point
Gridding. The gridding area is determined by basic gridding
parameters such as reach, minimum number of control point that
can be used to compute any grid value.
CONVEX HULL. This option will perform gridding wherever
inside the Convex Hull.
CONCAVE HULL 1. This option performs gridding whenever
possible inside the data hull. The data hull is a convex hull reduced
by concavities. The concavities are determined by the radius. The
size of an imaginary ball rolled around the convex hull of the data
determines the depth of the concavities.
CONCAVE HULL 2. This option is similar to Concave Hull 1,
except concavities are slightly deeper for this hull.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Default Value
DATAHULL
ETEXT
DATA DISTRIBUTION
CONVEX HULL
CONCAVE HULL 1
CONCAVE HULL 2
DATA DISTRIBUTION
Refine
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Number of Refinements.
REFINE
Integer
No default
308
Landmark
Type of Flexing
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Default Value
Controls which type of flexing is done.

FLEXTYPE
ETEXT
BIHARMONIC
LAPLACIAN
NONE
BIHARMONIC
Smoothness Modulus
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Controls the amount of smoothing versus honouring of data that is

done.
SMOOTH
REAL
0 to 10
0.2
Number of Flex Passes

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The number entered represents the maximum number of flexing

passes. Flexing will stop after it has flexed this many times or when
the cutoff value causes flexing to stop.
NUMPASS
Integer
0 to 10
10
309
Landmark
Control of Passes
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Default Value
Controls whether to force Flexing to execute a specified number of

passes or to stop as soon as either Cutoff or Number of Flex passes
is reached.
FLEXCTRL
ETEXT
FLEX=NUMPASS
FLEX<=NUMPASS
FLEX<=NUMPASS
Cutoff
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Grid will be flexed repeatedly until the amount of change from one
pass to the next is smaller than the cutoff.
CUTOFF
REAL
0.25
Trend Bias Angle Units

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Biased gridding requires you to specify a bias direction measured

clockwise away from North.
DIPUNTIS
ETEXT
DEGREES
RADIANS
DEGREES
310
Landmark
LINE-GRID-PLUS Prompts
Report Type
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Default Value
You have the choice of the extent of the processing analysis report.
REPORT
ETEXT
NONE
PARTIAL
FULL
PARTIAL
ZCL PROCESSES
LINEGRIDPLUS
R2003.12.0
LINE-GRID-PLUS Prompts
311
Landmark
LIST-CPS-FILE
Macro Name
LIST-CPS-FILE
Menu Option
File Info List CPS-1 File
Purpose
This macro lists the contents of a CPS SAVE file.
Description
You are asked to input a CPS SAVE file.
Results
A listing of the contents of the CPS SAVE file.

Enter the name of the CPS SAVE File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the CPS SAVE file, including the full directory path name
CPSFILE
C*80
ZCL default
ZCL PROCESSES
LISTCPSFILES
R2003.12.0
LIST-CPS-FILE
312
Landmark
MAKEMAPGENERAL
Macro Name
MAKEMAPGENERAL
Menu Option
Purpose
This is not a standalone macro. It is used is used by the ENVELOPE

and SURFCORRECT macros.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
MAKEMAPGENERAL
313
Landmark
NADCONCV
Macro Name
NADCONCV
Menu Option
Features Surveys (Canadian) NAD27-NAD83 Datum Shift
Purpose
With the new capability to handle NAD 83 state plane projections,

there is a need to be able to translate NAD 27 latitudes and longitudes
to the new NAD 83 standard. This macro accomplishes that translation.
The translation is available in both directions.
Description
Specify the following input values:
Results
R2003.12.0
input data file for the old latitude and longitude data in the type
fields
individual fields of the latitude and longitude type to be used in the

transfer
direction of the transfer
new field names for the output latitude and longitude fields
name of the output data file and MFD to use for storing it
An output data file that has the new latitude and longitude fields
appended to the end of the information in the input data file.
NADCONCV
314
Landmark
NADCONCV: Parameters

*Input Data File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

FILEIN
C*24
No default
MFD for the Input Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
*Select the Input Latitude Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the input latitude field type to be used in the NAD

conversion.
FIELDLT
I
All Latitude fields
No default
*Select the Input Longitude Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Select the input longitude field type to be used in the NAD

conversion.
FIELDLG
I
All Longitude fields
No default
315
Landmark
Specify the Direction of Conversion

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the direction of the conversion. NAD 27 to 83 or 83 to 27.

DIRCV
27TO83
83TO27
Data Type
Default Value:
C*8
27TO83
Name of the Output Latitude Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value:
The field name for the converted output latitude field in which to
place the converted values. This is appended to a copy of all other
data fields in the input data file.
FLDOULT
C*20
LATITUDE-CONVERTED
Name of the Output Longitude Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value:
The field name for the converted output longitude field in which to
place the converted values. This is appended to a copy of all other
data fields in the input data file.
FLDOULG
C*20
LONGITUDE-CONVERTED

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value:
Name of the output data file containing the new fields.

FILEOUT
C*24
NAD CONVERTED DATA
MFD for the Output Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value:
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the output data file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
316
Landmark
ZNON Replacement Value in Output

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
If a value of the output latitude or longitude field results in a null

value, this number is inserted in the appropriate output field.
ZNONV
R
1.0E30
ZCL PROCESSES
NADCON
R2003.12.0
317
Landmark
NEW-CONTOUR
Macro Name
NEW-CONTOUR
Menu Option
Features Contouring Contour
Purpose
This macro is the basis for the Contouring Contour command, but
can still be accessed from the $ZTARGET/macros directory. It builds a
contour map, and permits you to select various options for your contour
map. In addition to producing graphics features for posting on your
map, NEW-CONTOUR.ZCLMAC also selects the contouring algorithm
best suited to your data. If profiles are present, NEW-CONTOUR
selects the Profile Contouring Algorithm. If there are opaque faults, the
macro uses the Extended Fault Contouring Algorithm. If neither
opaque faults nor profiles are present, the macro uses the faster
No-Constraint algorithm. With respect to graphics features, you can
choose whether to colorfill your contours, and also whether to include a
color bar on your map.
Description
This macro requires that you input a grid. To take full advantage of the
macros capabilities, however, you may want to input much of the
following information:
Results
R2003.12.0
an optional opaque FAULT set

an optional gradient discontinuity PROFILE dataset
an optional POLYGON dataset to restrict the contouring
a PROFILE dataset from Point Gridding Plus
a POLYGON dataset to restrict contouring
whether to clip inside or outside of polygons (only requested if a
polygon file is input)
minimum and contour maximum
A contour map is generated that meets your specifications. You can also
obtain an output contour file if you wish.
NEW-CONTOUR
318
Landmark
NEW-CONTOUR: Parameters

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
MFD for the Input Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Name of the Optional (Opaque) Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Enter the name of the input fault file to be used in generating

contours, if any.
FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default
for the Input Fault File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
319
Landmark
Select Gradient Discontinuity Profile File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Enter the name of the input profile file. This file contains z values
marking discontinuity in gradient.
PROFILES
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Input Profiles

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDPROF
I
0 through 5
Select Input Contour-Clipping Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input vertex file that contains the polygons used for
clipping contours in the display.
MFDPOLY
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Input Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the input clipping polygon file.

MFDPOLY
I
0 through 5
Select Name of Optional Output Contour File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the file to which you want contour information written.

FILEOUT
C*24
ZCL default
320
Landmark
MFD Name for the Output Contour File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for saving the output contour information.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
0 scratch MFD
Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify how smooth the contour line should be. All contours are
made up of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these
SMOOTH
interval
COARSE
= Coarse point spacing along curves. Approximately1/2 the
grid interval.
MEDIUM
grid interval.
FINE
interval.
grid interval.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
MEDIUM

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Interval between successive contours. If the number of contours to

be drawn is specified, leave this parameter blank.
CONINT
R
ZCL default
321
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Lowest contour level to be drawn. This is always the first contour

that is drawn.
CONMIN
R
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Highest contour level to be drawn. This is always the last contour

that is drawn.
CONMAX
R
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the number of contour levels. If the contour interval is

specified, leave this parameter blank. If the contour interval is not
chosen, then either the range between CONMAX and CONMIN or
the entire grid MIN and MAX range is used to derive the number of
contours to be placed on the map.
NCONTOUR
I
0 through 255
50
Color to Use for all Contour Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

LABLCOLR
I
0 through 255
9
322
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

LABLRATE
I
1
Rate at which Contours are Bold

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
contour, etc.
BOLDRATE
I
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

HACHRATE
I
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

DASHRATE
I
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

BLNKRATE
I
0
323
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

BLNKDIST.
BLNKDIST
R
0.05 in or 0.15 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the method chosen to color contours and hence control the
meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
LINCLRTP
HIGHLIGHT
INCREMENT
Data Type
Default Value

STARTCLR color. LINERATE, HILTCOLR and
STARTCLR are described next.
C*12
HIGHLIGHT

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Specify the starting color index number. The first contour is appears
in this color.
STARTCLR
I
0 through 255
3
324
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

to be colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other contours being
colored in the STARTCLR color. If LINCLRTP and LINERATE
are defaulted, then all contours use the default color index for this
parameter.
HILTCOLR
I
0 through 255
4
Rate at which to Change Line Color

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The contour color is changed at this rate.

to be colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other contours being
LINERATE
I
0 through 255
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

when clipping polygon file is specified.
POLYCLIP
INSIDE
OUTSIDE
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*8
OUTSIDE
325
Landmark
Color for the "Opaque" Fault Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the color for posting fault lines which are without depth
information.
FALTCOLR
I
0 to 255
18

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not the area between contours is to be

color-filled.
FALTCOLR
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
COLORFILLED
How much Joining of Color-filled Polygons

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Specify how much joining of polygons should take place across

grid cells.
CFILCOMP
C*8
MINIMAL
PARTIAL
MAXIMAL
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Easy-case joining of polygons. Graphics files are smaller as

compared to no joining. Display times improved markedly as a
result of polygon joining.
= More polygons joined than with MINIMAL. Somewhat faster
than MINIMAL.
= A few more polygons joined as compared to PARTIAL;
graphics files slightly smaller. More compression, but no
significant improvement in display time.
PARTIAL
326
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

CNTRFILL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Use the contours to help generate the polygons.

C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to draw the contour lines on the picture.

POSTCNTR
POST
OMIT
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
POST

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the location of the color bar. Relative positions with regard
to the AOI are automatically positioned in the map offset areas.
COLORBAR
NONE
LEFT
RIGHT
ABOVE
BELOW
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
No color bar
Left of the map
Right of the map
Above the map
Below the map
C*8
NONE
327
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the starting color index for the colorfill.

FILLCOLR
I
0 through 255
56

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

FILLRATE
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

FILBELOW
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
YES
328
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

FILABOVE
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
YES
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR NEW
BRANCH
POST DATA NEW
R2003.12.0
329
Landmark
NIV-DATA
Macro Name
NIV-DATA
Menu Option

Normalize Interval Velocity (Data)
Purpose
This macro uses a Carter-Good Iterative Depth Algorithm (IDA) to

produce a control point file. The control point file has data fields
describing the top-lapped depth, baselapped depth, and final
normalized interval velocity (NIV) calculation.
Velocity normalization attempts to make interval velocity information
independent of depth. When this is achieved, normalized velocities
have a common depth and age. Given their common depth and age,
differences in velocity should be attributable to changes in lithology
and/or pore pressure.
Description
You must provide the following parameters as separate fields on the

input control point (DATA) file:
R2003.12.0
field number for the isochrone data field (the zones time
thickness)
field number for the datum depth field Z(0) (the depth to the top of
the zone)
field number for the initial estimate for the normalized interval
velocity (NIV)
NIV-DATA
330
Landmark
NIV-DATA: Description (continued)
You must enter:
minimum velocity constraint used to calculate the normalized

interval velocity for a single interval (enter zero for no constraint)
normalization depth
compaction parameter n
This is determined for each interval from crossplots of data from
velocity surveyed wells in the project area. The equation used is:
log ( ZM )
g ( VI ) = ---------------------- + log ( L A P )
n
whereVI = interval velocity ZM = midpoint depth
L = lithology A = age P = pressure
For each interval where seismic times correlate with times in the
wells, plot the algorithm of interval velocity vs. the logarithm of
midpoint depth. Calculate this value for all surveyed wells in the
project area. Fit the points with a line. The slope of the best fit line
is 1/n for the interval.
Normalization depth is an arbitrary number in the range of the depths

being converted. If multiple zones are converted, then the same number
should be used for all zones so similar lithology can be recognized
between zones by comparing normalized interval velocities (NIV).
Results
A control point file (DATA) with the following fields:
R2003.12.0
a new field with resulting top-lapped depth on Z(0)

a new field with resulting base-lapped depth on Z(0)
a new field with the final estimate for normalized interval velocity
NIV-DATA: Description (continued)
331
Landmark
NIV-DATA: Parameters

Choose the Input Data File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

DFILEI
C*24
NIV INPUT DATA FILE

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input data file.

DIMFD
I
0 through 5
Choose the Isochron Data Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The isochron field in the input data file.

FLDISO
I
All Z Value fields
ZCL default
Choose the Depth Data Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The top horizon depth field in the input data file.

FLDTOP
I
All Z Value fields
ZCL default
Choose Normalized Interval Velocity Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The normalized interval velocity field in the input data file.

FLDNIV
I
All Z Value fields
ZCL default
332
Landmark
Isochron Data Observations

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Enter the type of data observation.

TIMEOBS
ONE WAY TIME = Seismic times originally in two way time (milliseconds)
are divided by 2000, giving one way time in
milliseconds.
TWO WAY TIME = Seismic times are originally expressed in milliseconds
as two way time, the time lapsed between the seismic
event and the return of the signal to the surface.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
ONE WAY TIME
Units of Isochron and Velocity Observations

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Enter the units of time measurement.

TIMEUNT
MILLISECONDS
SECONDS
Data Type
Default Value
= Units measured in one thousandths of a second.

= Units measured in seconds.
C*12
MILLISECONDS
Minimum Possible Interval Velocity

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum value of a set of interval velocities.

VELMIN
R
6000.0
Approximate Normalization Depth for Area

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Approximate normalization depth for the area of the data.

DEPNORM
R
3000.0
333
Landmark
Value for N in (1/N) Factor

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Inverse compression factor.

NVALUE
R
1.5
Name the Output Top-lapped Base Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field name of the top-lapped base depth field in the output data file.
FLDTLB
C*24
TOP-LAPPED BASE Z
Name the Output Base-lapped Base Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field name of the unlapped base depth field in the output data file.
FLDBLB
C*24
BASE-LAPPED BASE Z
Name the Output Interval Velocity Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field name of the interval velocity field in the output data file.
FLDVIO
C*24
INTERVAL VELOCITY

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the output data file.

DFILEO
C*24
NIV OUTPUT DATA FILE
334
Landmark
MFD for the Output Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD to use for storing the output data file.

DOMFD
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
NIVA
R2003.12.0
335
Landmark
NIV-GRIDS
Macro Name
NIV-GRIDS
Menu Option

Normalize Interval Velocity (Grid)
Purpose
This macro uses a Carter-Good Iterative Depth Algorithm (IDA) to

produce three grids:
top-lapped depth grid

base-lapped depth grid
(calculated) final normalized interval velocity (NIV) grid
The resulting grids are hung from a datum depth grid Z(0).
Description
Velocity normalization attempts to make interval velocity information

independent of depth. When this is achieved, normalized velocities
have a common depth and age. Given their common depth and age,
differences in velocity should be attributable to changes in lithology
and/or pore pressure.
You must provide an input file having the following fields:
zones time thickness (isochrone)

depth to the top of the zone
initial estimate for the normalized interval velocity (NIV)
Macro panels ask for the following parameter values:
isochrone GRID
datum depth GRID Z(0) with an optional FALT file
initial NIV estimate GRID Z(0) with an optional FALT file
minimum velocity constraint used to calculate the normalized
interval velocity for a single interval (enter zero for no constraint)
normalization depth
compaction parameter n
This is determined for each interval from crossplots of data from
velocity surveyed wells in the project area. The equation used is:
log ( ZM )
log ( VI ) = ---------------------- + log ( L A P )
n
where:VI = interval velocity
ZM = midpoint depth
L = lithology A = age P = pressure
R2003.12.0
NIV-GRIDS
336
Landmark
NIV-GRIDS; Description (continued)
Normalization depth is an arbitrary number in the range of the depths

being converted. If multiple zones are converted, then the same number
should be used for all zones so similar lithology can be recognized
between zones by comparing normalized interval velocities (NIV)
For each interval where seismic times correlate with times in the wells,
plot the algorithm of interval velocity vs. the logarithm of midpoint
depth. Calculate this value for all surveyed wells in the project area. Fit
the points with a line. The slope of the best fit line is 1/n for the
interval.
Results
The NIV-GRIDS macro produces the following outputs
base-lapped depth GRID on Z(0)

top-lapped depth GRID on Z(0)
final NIV estimate GRID

Choose the Isochron Grid File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input isochron grid file.

GRDI
C*24
ZCL default
for the Isochron Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the input isochron grid file.

MFDGI
I
0 through 5
NIV-GRIDS; Description (continued)
337
Landmark
NIV-GRIDS: Parameters
Choose the Depth Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input top horizon depth grid file.

GRDD
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Depth Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input horizon depth grid file.

MFDGD
I
0 through 5
Choose the Fault File for the Depth Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input top horizon fault file.

FLTD
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains input top horizon fault file.

MFDFD
I
0 through 5
338
Landmark
Choose the Normalized Velocity Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input normalized interval velocity grid file.

NVGRD
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Normalized Velocity GRID

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the normalized interval velocity grid file.

MFDGN
I
0 through 5
Choose the Fault File for the NIV Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the normalized interval velocity fault file.

NVELFLT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the NIV Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the normalized interval velocity fault file.

MFDNVELF
I
0 through 5
339
Landmark
Isochron Data Observations

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Enter the type of data observation.

TIMEOBS
ONE WAY TIME = Seismic times originally in two way time (milliseconds)
are divided by 2, giving one way time in milliseconds.
TWO WAY TIME = Seismic times are originally expressed in milliseconds
as two way time, the time lapsed between the seismic
event and the return of the signal to the surface.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
ONE WAY TIME
Units of Isochron and Velocity Observations

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Enter the units of time measurement.

TIMEUNT
MILLISECONDS
SECONDS
Data Type
Default Value
= Units measured in thousandths of a second.

= Units measured in seconds.
C*12
MILLISECONDS
Minimum Possible Interval Velocity

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum value of a set of interval velocities.

VELMIN
R
6000.00
Approximate Normalization Depth for Area

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Approximate normalization depth for the area of the data.

DEPNORM
R
3000.00
340
Landmark
Value for N in (1/N) Factor

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Inverse compaction factor.

NVALUE
R
1.5
Output Top-lapped Base Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output top-lapped base horizon depth grid file.

GROLAP
C*24
TOPLAPPED BASE DEPTH
MFD for the Top-lapped Base Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD to use for storing the output top-lapped grid file.

MFDGT
I
0 through 5
Output Base-lapped Base Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output unlapped base horizon depth grid file.

GROBAS
C*24
BASELAPPED BASE DEPTH
MFD for the Base-lapped Base Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD to use for storing the output unlapped grid file.

MFDGB
I
0 through 5
341
Landmark
Output True Interval Velocity Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output interval velocity grid file.

GROIV
C*24
TRUE INT VELOCITY
MFD for the True Interval Velocity Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD to use for storing the output interval velocity grid file.
MFDIV
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
NIVA
R2003.12.0
342
Landmark
PATCH-GRID
Macro Name
PATCH-GRID
Menu Option
Macros Operations Patch-grid Posting
Purpose
This macro places a small grid (the patch) into a larger grid. Using the x
and y coordinates in both grids to determine the position for the patch,
the patch grid is resampled and replaces a section of the larger grid.
New Z values from the patch grid replace the original Z-values within
the x, y coordinates. All Z-values from the original larger grid are
removed, including ZNONs.
Output grid AOI and increments are the same as for the input grid.
Description
a small patch grid

a larger grid to put the patch into
the ZNON (null data value) for the output grid
An output grid with the patch in place.
Results
7
Grid to be patched
R2003.12.0
2
1
7
Patch grid
Grid with patch
PATCH-GRID
343
Landmark
PATCH-GRID: Parameters

Enter the Small Patch Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input patch grid file.

PATCH
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Patch Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the input patch grid file.

MFDPATCH
I
0 through 5
*Enter the Grid to be Patched

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input grid file to be patched.

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
for the Large Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the input grid file to be patched.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
344
Landmark
Enter Any Faults to be Used

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
Output Grid Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output grid.

GRIDOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Output Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output grid.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZNON Value for the Output Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the null data value associated with this grid.

ZNON
R
0.1000E+31
ZCL PROCESSES
PATCH GRID
R2003.12.0
345
Landmark
PENETRATE-GRIDS
Macro Name
PENETRATE-GRIDS
Menu Option
Macros Operations
Well-penetration Coordinates (Muliple Grids)
Purpose
This macro calculates the x,y,z coordinates at which deviated well

tracks penetrate one or more gridded surface horizons.
Description
a deviated well file, which must contain a z field

up to 5 input grids
up to 5 optional fault (FALT) files
the symbol code to be used with each penetration record
The input grid name is used as the surface name in the output data file.
Results
R2003.12.0
Results are stored as a control point file containing eight fields. Five
new fields (X, Y, Z, Symbol Code, Surface Name) and three fields
(SEG I.D., Deviated Well Name and Well Track Name) that are copied
to the output file from the input file. Post the output from this macro
using View X, Y, Z Point Data to plot symbols, horizon names and
horizon penetration depths in their three dimensional relation to the
well track. This is often used in conjunction with Deviated Well
Posting to show cut point position along the well tracks.
PENETRATE-GRIDS
346
Landmark
PENETRATE-GRIDS
Input and output examples follow.

Table 1: Contents of Input Deviated Well (DWEL) File
Field Type
Data Type
Field Use
DEVIATED WELL NAME

or PLATFORM IDENTIFIER
Char*80
Identifies well (optional)
X (EASTING)
Real
Coordinate of vertex
Y (NORTHING)
Real
SEG I.D.
Real
Each well may have several drill

holes or drill tracks. SEG I.D.
changes when the hole or track
changes. One well name may
correspond to many SEG I.D.
values.
Z VALUE
Real
This z value must be available.
WELL TRACK NAME
Char*80
This changes when the SEG I.D.

changes and is optional.
Table 2: Contents of Output Control Point (DATA) File

Field Type
Data
Type
Field Use
X (EASTING)
Real
Coordinate of horizon crossing
Y (NORTHING)
Real
Z VALUE
Real
SYMBOL CODE
Real
User specified symbol for posting in

Z-MAP Plus
HORIZON NAME
C*80
Identifies penetrated horizon
SEG I.D.
Real
Each well may have several drill holes

or drill tracks. SEG I.D. changes when
the hole or track changes. One well
name may correspond to many SEG
I.D. values.
WELL TRACK NAME
Char*80

DEVIATED WELL
NAME
Char*80
NOTE: SEG I.D., Well Track Name and Deviated Well Name fields are
copied to the output file from the input file.
R2003.12.0
PENETRATE-GRIDS
347
Landmark
PENETRATE-GRIDS: Parameters

Input Deviated Well File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input deviated well file.

FILEIN
C*24
All attached DWEL files
ZCL default
MFD for the Deviated Well

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the input deviated well file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Output Intercept Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output control point file.

FILEOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Output Wells

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output control point file.
MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
Number of Grids (15)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Number of grids to be tested for penetration. You may test up to

five.
NGRIDS
I
1 through 5
1
348
Landmark
First Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the first input grid file.

GRIDS
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the first input grid file.

MFDGRDS
I
0 through 5
Fault File for First Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input fault file for the first input grid file.
FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the First Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the fault file for the first input grid.
MFDFLTS
I
0 through 5
Second Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the second input grid file.

GRID2
C*24
ZCL default
349
Landmark
o
MFD for the Second Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the second input grid file.

MFDGRD2
I
0 through 5
Fault File for Second Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input fault file for the second input grid file.
FAULT2
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Second Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the fault file for the second input grid file.
MFDFLT2
I
0 through 5
Third Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the third input grid file.

GRID3
C*24
ZCL default
for the Third Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the third input grid file.

MFDGRD3
I
0 through 5
350
Landmark
Fault File for Third Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input fault file for the third grid.

FAULT3
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Third Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the fault file for the third input grid file.
MFDFLT3
I
0 through 5
Fourth Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the fourth input grid file.

GRID4
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Fourth Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the fourth input grid file.

MFDGRD4
I
0 through 5
Fault File for Fourth Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the input fault file for the fourth input grid file.
FAULT4
C*24
ZCL default
351
Landmark
o
MFD for the Fourth Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the fault file for the fourth input grid.
MFDFLT4
I
0 through 5
Fifth Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the fifth input grid file.

GRID5
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Fifth Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the fifth input grid file.

MFDGRD5
I
0 through 5
Fault File for Fifth Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input fault file for the fifth input grid.
FAULT5
C*24
ZCL default
for the Fifth Fault File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD that contains the fault file for the fifth input grid.
MFDFLT5
I
0 through 5
352
Landmark
Symbol for First Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Enter the symbol code number for the first grid.

SYMBOLS
R
1.0
Symbol for Second Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Enter the symbol code number for the second grid.

SYMBOL2
R
2.0
Symbol for Third Grid

Description
Description
Data Type
Default Value
Enter the symbol code number for the third grid.

SYMBOL3
R
3.0
Symbol for Fourth Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Enter the symbol code number for the fourth grid.

SYMBOL4
R
4.0
Symbol for Fifth Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Enter the symbol code number for the fifth grid.

SYMBOL5
R
5.0
ZCL PROCESSES
HORIZON PENETRATE
R2003.12.0
353
Landmark
PENETRATE-ONEGRD
Macro Name
PENETRATE-ONEGRD
Menu Option
Macros Operations
Well-penetration Coordinates (Single Grid)
Purpose
This macro calculates the x, y, z coordinates at which deviated well

tracks penetrate one gridded surface horizon.
The input grid name is used as the surface name in the output data file.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
a deviated well file. This file must contain a z field

an input grid
symbol code to be used with the penetration record
Results are stored as a control point file containing eight fields. Five
new fields (X, Y, Z, Symbol Code, Surface Name) and three fields
(SEG I.D., Deviated Well Name and Well Track Name) that are copied
to the output file from the input file. Post the output from this macro
using View X, Y, Z Point Data to plot symbols, horizon names and
horizon penetration depths in their three dimensional relation to the
well track. This is often used in conjunction with Deviated Well
Posting to show cut point position along the well tracks.
PENETRATE-ONEGRD
354
Landmark
PENETRATE-ONEGRD
Input and output examples follow.

Table 3: Contents of Input Deviated Well (DWEL) File
Data
Type
Field Use
DEVIATED WELL NAME

or PLATFORM IDENTIFIER
Char*80
X (EASTING)
Real
Y (NORTHING)
Real
SEG I.D.
Real
Each well may have several drill

holes or drill tracks. SEG ID changes
when the hole or track changes. One
well name may correspond to many
SEG ID values.
Z VALUE
Real
This z value must be available.
WELL TRACK NAME
Char*80

Field Type
Table 4: Contents of Output Control Point (DATA) File

Field Type
Data
Type
Field Use
X (EASTING)
Real
Y (NORTHING)
Real
Z VALUE
Real
SYMBOL CODE
Real
User specified symbol for posting in

Z-MAP Plus
HORIZON NAME
Char*80
IDENTIFIES penetrated horizon
SEG I.D.
Real
Each well may have several drill holes

or drill tracks. SEG I.D. changes
when the hole or track changes. One
well name may correspond to many
SEG I.D. values.
WELL TRACK NAME
Char*80

DEVIATED WELL NAME
Char*80
NOTE: SEG I.D., Well Track Name and Deviated Well Name fields are
copied to the output file from the input file.
R2003.12.0
PENETRATE-ONEGRD
355
Landmark
PENETRATE-ONEGRD: Parameters

Input Deviated Well File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input deviated well file.

FILEIN
C*24
All attached DWEL files
ZCL default
MFD for the Deviated Well File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the input deviated well file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Output Intercept Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output control point file.

FILEOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Output Wells

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD to use for storing the output control point file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

GRIDS
C*24
ZCL default
356
Landmark
o

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDGRDS
I
0 through 5
Fault File for Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input fault file for the input grid file.
FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the fault file for the input grid.
MFDFLTS
I
0 through 5
Symbol for the Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Enter the symbol code number for the grid.

SYMBOLS
R
1.0
ZCL PROCESSES
HORIZON PENETRATE
R2003.12.0
357
Landmark
PICT-AND-PST-DLS
Macro Name
PICT-AND-PST-DLS
Menu Option
Features Surveys (Canadian) Create & Post DLS Picture
Purpose
This macro creates a picture for plotting Dominion Land Survey (DLS)
information. The area of interest for the picture is specified using
Meridian, Township, Range, and Section numbers for the Northwest
and Southeast corners of the desired area. Township, Section, Quarter
Section and Legal Subdivision lines may be drawn on this map along
with the Township and Section labels. Road allowances may also be
posted on the picture. A border is drawn around the map.
Description
You must specify:
the UTM Zone Number

name of the graphics file
name of the new picture
Allocate the DLS Binary File Before Running this Macro
Before running this macro you must have allocated the DLS Binary File.
Enter:
setenv DLSFILE /directorypath/DLS.bin
setenv NTSFILE /directorypath/ZNTS.DAT
Results
R2003.12.0
A new picture setup using DLS with the requested lines and labels
posted.
PICT-AND-PST-DLS
358
Landmark
PICT-AND-PST-DLS: Parameters

UTM Zone Number (Projection Information)
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
UTM zone reference code. Conditionally required depending on

type of projection used.
UTMZONE
I
1 through 60
ZCL default
*Name of the ZGF

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the graphics file (ZGF) for the output picture.

ZGFNAME
C*80
No default
Indicate whether ZGF is New or Old

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

NEWZGF
NEW
OLD
Data Type
Default Value
= New graphics file

= Old graphics file
C*4
NEW
Graphics File Header (Only if ZGF is New)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Header text for the graphics file (ZGF). Used when the graphics file
is new.
ZGFHEAD
C*40
ZCL default
359
Landmark
*Name of Picture to be Created

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the picture to be created.

PICTURE
C*40
No default
Absolute Scale
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
An absolute scale or representative fraction is the ratio between the

distance on a map and the corresponding distance on the surface of
the earth. Used when a projection is active.
ABSSCALE
I
ZCL default
Plot Margin for Left Side of Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Plot margin to the left of the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
XLMARGIN
R
1.0 in or 2.5 cm
Plot Margin for Right Side of Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Plot margin to the right of the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
XRMARGIN
R
1.0 in or 2.5 cm
Plot Margin for Bottom of Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Plot margin below the map, in plotter units (in or cm).

YBMARGIN
R
3.0 in or 7.5 cm
360
Landmark
Plot Margin for Top of Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Plot margin above the map, in plotter units (in or cm).

YTMARGIN
R
1.0 in or 2.5 cm
Southeast Corner Meridian Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Meridian number for southeast corner.

SEMERIDN
I
1 through 6
ZCL default
Southeast Corner Township Row Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Township row value for southeast corner.

SETWNSHP
I
1 through 126
ZCL default
Southeast Corner Range Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Range value for southeast corner.

SERANGE
I
1 through 30
ZCL default
Southeast Corner Section Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Section value for southeast corner.

SESCTION
I
1 through 36
ZCL default
361
Landmark
Northwest Corner Meridian Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Meridian number for northwest corner.

NWMERIDN
I
1 through 6
ZCL default
Northwest Corner Township Row Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Township row value for northwest corner.

NWTWNSHP
I
1 through 126
ZCL default
Northwest Corner Range Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Range value for northwest corner.

NWRANGE
I
1 through 30
ZCL default
Northwest Corner Section Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Section value for northwest corner.

NWSCTION
I
1 through 36
ZCL default
362
Landmark
Select How to Draw Township Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the line type of the Township boundaries.

TOWNLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
Do not draw Township lines.

Draw normal Township lines.
Draw dashed Township lines.
Draw bold Township lines.
C*8
DASHED
Select Whether to Display Township Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether Township labels are to be drawn.

TOWNLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label the townships.

= Do not label the townships.
C*3
YES
Height of the Township Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of Township Labels, in plotter units (in or cm).

TOWNHGHT
R
0.10 in or 0.25 cm
Select How to Draw Section Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the line type of the section borders.

SECTLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
Do not draw section lines.

Draw normal section lines.
Draw dashed section lines.
Draw bold section lines.
C*8
PLAIN
363
Landmark
Decide Whether to Display Section Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether section labels are to be drawn.

SECTLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
YES
Height of the Section Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of section labels, in plotter units (in or cm).

SECTHGHT
R
0.10 in or 0.25 cm
Select How to Draw Quarter Section Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the line type of the quarter section borders.

QRTRLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
Do not draw quarter section lines.

Draw normal quarter section lines.
Draw dashed quarter section lines.
Draw bold quarter section lines.
C*8
NONE
Select How to Draw Legal Sub-division Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of legal sub-division lines to draw on the map.

SUBDLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
Do not draw legal subdivision lines.

Draw normal legal subdivision lines.
Draw dashed legal subdivision lines.
Draw bold legal subdivision lines.
C*8
NONE
364
Landmark
Decide Whether to Display Road Allowances

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether road allowances are to be labeled.

ROADALLW
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label road allowances.

= Do not label road allowances.
C*4
YES
ZCL PROCESSES
PROJECTION
PICTURE
POST DLS
BORDER
R2003.12.0
365
Landmark
PICT-AND-PST-NTS
Macro Name
PICT-AND-PST-NTS
Menu Option
Features Surveys (Canadian) Create & Post NTS Picture
Purpose
This macro creates a picture on which you may plot National

Topographic Survey (NTS) information. The area of interest for the
picture is specified using either the North West and South East corners
or the North East and South West corners of an NTS or PNCA survey.
You can request NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and Quarter lines and
labels.
You can specify line type and width for each type of line and font and
size for each type of label.
Description
You are prompted for:
either the North East and South West corners and the North West
and South East corners of the survey
type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and Quarter borders
line style and width of each type of border
type of labeling for the lines
size and font of the labels
Allocate the DLS Binary File Before Running This Macro
Enter:
Results
R2003.12.0
A new picture setup using NTS with the requested lines and labels
posted.
PICT-AND-PST-NTS
366
Landmark
PICT-AND-PST-NTS: Parameters

Graphics File Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the graphics file (ZGF) that contains the output picture
ZGFNAME
C*80
ZCL default
Picture Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

PICTURE
C*80
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

NUZGF
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= New graphics file

= Old graphics file
C*4
NEW
UTM Zone
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
UTM zone reference code. Conditionally required depending on

type of projection used.
UTMZONE
I
1 through 60
10
367
Landmark
Absolute Scale
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

the earth. Used when a projection is active.
ABSSCALE
I
10000
Corners to Be Used to Specify AOI

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the corners to be used to define the AOI.

CRNRS
NWSE
NESW
Data Type
Range
= North West and South East corners

= North East and South West corners
C*4
NWSE
Type of NTS Survey

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify NTS survey type.

SRVEY
NTS
PNGA
Data Type
Range
= Plot true National Topographic Series

= Plot Petroleum & Natural Gas Act
C*4
NTS
Post NTS Clipped to DLS

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify how NTS and DLS are to be plotted together

MCLPNTS
NTS ONLY
= Plot only the National Topographic Survey.
NTS CLIP DLS = Plot the National Topographic Series, clipping the
Dominion Land Survey.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*12
NTS ONLY
368
Landmark
String for NTS NorthWest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
System for specifying the NorthWest corner when CRNRS =

NWSE.
NWNTSAOI
C*32
ZCL default
String for NTS SouthEast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
System for specifying the SouthEast corner when CRNRS =

NWSE.
SENTSAOI
C*32
ZCL default
String for NTS NorthEast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
System for specifying the NorthEast corner when CRNRS =

NWSE.
NENTSAOI
C*32
ZCL default
String for NTS SouthWest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
System for specifying the SouthWest corner, where CRNRS =

SWNE.
SWNTSAOI
C*32
ZCL default
369
Landmark
Level of Lines to Draw

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Indicate what levels or density of lines to draw.

For example, if MLINLEVL = SERIES, then NTS, Map and Series
lines are drawn.
MLINLEVL
NTS
MAP
SERIES
BLOCK
UNIT
QUARTER
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
=
=
NTS line
Map line
Series line
Block line
Unit line
Quarter line
C*8
BLOCK
Level of Labels to Draw

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Indicate the level or density of labels to draw. MLABLEVL must be

less than or equal to MLINLEVL in density.
MLABLEVL
NTS
MAP
SERIES
BLOCK
UNIT
QUARTER
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
=
NTS number
Map letter
Series number
Block letter
Unit number
Quarter letter
C*8
BLOCK
370
Landmark
Level of Labels for Lower Left Corner Label

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the level or density of labels to draw in the lower left corner
of the map. MLWLLEVL must be less than or equal to
MLABELVL in density.
MLWLLEVL
NTS
MAP
SERIES
BLOCK
UNIT
QUARTER
NONE
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NTS number
Map letter
Series number
Block letter
Unit number
Quarter letter
No label
C*8
BLOCK
Type of NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of NTS lines to draw.

MNTSLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw normal NTS lines.

= Draw dashed NTS lines.
= Draw bold NTS lines.
C*8
PLAIN
Label NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Specify whether or not to label NTS lines.

MNTSLABL
YES
= Label NTS
NO
= Do not label NTS
lines.
lines.
C*4
YES
371
Landmark
Color Index for NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for NTS lines.

MNTSCLR
I
0 through 255
1
Weight of Bold NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold NTS lines.

MNTSWGHT
I
0 through 8
2
Dash Length for Dashed NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for NTS lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MNTSLINE = DASHED.
MNTSDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Gap Length for Dashed NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Length of gap for NTS lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MNTSLINE = DASHED.
MNTSGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
372
Landmark
Font for NTS Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for NTS line labels.

MNTSFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN
Height of NTS Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for NTS line labels, in plotter units. Used when
MNTSLABL = YES.
MNTSHGHT
R
ZCL default based on map scale and size of each grid element
Type of Map Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of MAP lines to draw.

MMAPLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Draw normal map lines.

= Draw dashed map lines.
= Draw bold map lines.
C*8
PLAIN
373
Landmark
Label Map Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label MAP lines.

MMAPLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label map lines.

= Do not label map lines.
C*4
YES
Color Index for Map Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for MAP lines.

MMAPCLR
I
0 through 255
1
Weight of Bold Map Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold MAP lines.

MMAPWGHT
I
0 through 8
2
Dash Length for Dashed Map Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Length of dash for MAP lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
MMAPDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
374
Landmark
Gap Length for Dashed Map Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for MAP lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
MMAPGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Font for Map Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for map line labels.

MMAPFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN
Height of Map Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for MAP line labels, in plotter units. Used when
MAPLABEL = YES.
MMAPHGHT
R
Type of Series Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of SERIES lines to draw.

MSRSLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
Do not draw series lines.

Draw normal series lines.
Draw dashed series lines.
Draw bold series lines.
C*8
PLAIN
375
Landmark
Label Series Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label SERIES lines.

MSRSLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label the series lines.

= Do not label the series lines.
C*4
YES
Color Index for Series Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for SERIES lines.

MSRSCLR
I
0 through 255
1
Weight of Bold Series Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold SERIES lines.

MSRSWGHT
I
1 through 8
2
Dash Length for Dashed Series Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for SERIES lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MSRLINE = DASHED.
MSRSDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Gap Length for Dashed Series Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Length of gap for SERIES lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MSRLINE = DASHED.
MSRSGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
376
Landmark
Font for Series Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for SERIES line labels.

MSRSFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN
Height of Series Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for MAP line labels in plotter units. Used when
MSRLABL = YES.
MSRSHGHT
R
Type of Block Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of BLOCK lines to draw.

MBLKLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Draw normal block lines.

= Draw dashed block lines.
= Draw bold block lines.
C*8
PLAIN
377
Landmark
Label Block Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label BLOCK lines.

MBLKLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label block lines.

= Do not label block lines.
C*4
YES
Color Index for Block Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for BLOCK lines.

MBLKCLR
I
0 through 255
1
Weight of Bold Block Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold BLOCK lines.

MBLKWGHT
I
0 through 8
2
Dash Length for Dashed Block Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for BLOCK lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used when MBLCLINE = DASHED.
MBLKDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Gap Length for Dashed Block Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Length of gap for BLOCK lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used when MBLKLINE = DASHED.
MBLKGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
378
Landmark
Font for Block Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for BLOCK line labels.

MBLKFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN
Height of Block Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for BLOCK line labels in plotter units.

Used when MBLKLABL = YES.
MBLKHGHT
R
Type of Unit Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of UNIT lines to draw.

MUNTLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Draw normal unit lines.

= Draw dashed unit lines.
= Draw bold unit lines.
C*8
PLAIN
379
Landmark
Label Unit Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label UNIT lines.

MUNTLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label the unit lines.

= Do not label the unit lines.
C*4
YES
Color Index for Unit Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for UNIT lines.

MUNTCLR
I
0 through 255
1
Weight of Bold Unit Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold UNIT lines.

MUNTWGHT
I
1 through 8
2
Dash Length for Dashed Unit Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for UNIT lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MUNLINE = DASHED.
MUNTDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Gap Length for Dashed Unit Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Length of gap for UNIT lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MUNLINE = DASHED.
MUNTGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
380
Landmark
Font for Unit Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for UNIT line labels.

MUNTFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN
Height of Unit Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for UNIT line labels, in plotter units. Used when
MUNTLABL = YES.
MUNTHGHT
R
Type of Quarter Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of QUARTER lines to draw.

MQTRLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Draw normal quarter lines.

= Draw dashed quarter lines.
= Draw bold quarter lines.
C*8
PLAIN
381
Landmark
Label Quarter Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label QUARTER lines.

MQTRLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
Label the quarter lines.

Do not label the quarter lines.
C*4
YES
Color Index for Quarter Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for QUARTER lines.

MQTRCLR
I
0 through 255
1
Weight of Bold Quarter Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold QUARTER lines.

MQTRWGHT
I
0 through 8
2
Dash Length for Dashed Quarter Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for QUARTER lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used when MQTRLINE = DASHED.
MQTRDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Gap Length for Dashed Quarter Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Length of gap for QUARTER lines, in plotter units (in or cm).

Used when MQTRLINE = DASHED.
MQTRGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
382
Landmark
Font for Quarter Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for QUARTER line labels.

MQTRFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN
Height of Quarter Line Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for QUARTER line labels, in plotter units. Used when
QRTRLABEL = YES.
MQTRHGHT
R
Label Lower Left Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether lower left corner is to be labeled.

MLWLLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Label the lower left corner.

= Do not label the lower left corner.
C*4
YES
383
Landmark
Font for Lower Left Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for the lower left corner label.
MLWLFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN
Height of Lower Left Corner Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for lower left corner label, in plotter units. Used when
MLWLLABL = YES.
MLWLHGHT
R
ZCL PROCESSES
PROJECTION
PICTURE
POST NTS
R2003.12.0
384
Landmark
PICT-NTS-DLS
Macro Name
PICT-NTS-DLS
Menu Option
Features Surveys (Canadian) Create DLS/NTS Picture
Purpose
This macro creates a picture whose AOI is specified using the

Dominion Land Survey (DLS) and/or National Topographic Survey
(NTS) system. You indicate whether each corner is to be defined in
NTS or DLS coordinates and you supply the definition.
If the corner is defined in DLS, you are asked to supply the Township,
Range, and Section numbers for the corner. If the corner is defined in
NTS, you are asked to supply the NTS description for the corner.
Note that only the picture is created; no annotation or lines are drawn.
Description
You must specify:
The North East and South West corners or the North West and
South East corners of the NTS survey
The Meridian, township, range and section of any DLS corner
UTM zone and absolute scale value
Enter:
Results
R2003.12.0
A new picture setup using DLS, NTS, or both.
PICT-NTS-DLS
385
Landmark
PICT-NTS-DLS: Parameters

Graphics File Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the graphics file (ZGF) that contains this picture.

ZGFNAME
C*80
ZCL default
Picture Name
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

PICTURE
C*80
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

NUZGF
NEW
OLD
Data Type
Default Value
= New graphics file

= Old graphics file
C*4
NEW
UTM Zone
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
UTM zone reference code.

UTMZONE
I
0 through 60
10
386
Landmark
Absolute Scale
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

the earth.
ABSSCALE
I
10000
Corners to Be Used to Specify AOI

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the corners to be used to define the AOI. Used when

CRNRS = NWSE.
CRNRS
NWSE
NESW
Data Type
Default Value
= North West and South East corners

= North East and Southwest corners
C*4
NWSE
Survey Type for Northwest Corner (AOI = NWSE)

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
System for specifying the Northwest corner when CRNRS =

NWSE.
NWCRNR
DLS
NTS
Data Type
Default Value
= Dominion Land Survey

= National Topographic Survey
C*4
NTS
Survey Type for Southeast Corner (AOI=NWSE)

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
System for specifying the Southeast corner when CRNRS =

NWSE.
SECRNR
DLS
NTS
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
NTS
387
Landmark
Survey Type for Northeast Corner (AOI=NESW)

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
System for specifying the Northeast corner when AOITYPE=

DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS = NWSE.
NECRNR
DLS
NTS
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
NTS
Type of Survey for Southwest Corner AOI=NESW)

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
System for specifying the Southwest corner when CRNRS =

NWSE.
SWCRNR
DLS
NTS
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
NTS
Type of NTS Survey

Description
Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify NTS survey type. Used when NWCRNR, NECRNR,

SWCRNRS = is set to NTS.
RNER, or SECORNER is set to NTS.
SRVEY
NTS
PNGA
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= True National Topographic Survey corners.

= Petroleum & Natural Gas Act corners.
C*4
NTS
388
Landmark
String for NTS Northwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
System for specifying the Northwest corner when and CRNRS =

NWSE.
NWNTSAOI
C*32
ZCL default
String for NTS Southeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
System for specifying the Southeast corner when CRNRS =

NWSE.
SENTSAOI
C*32
ZCL default
String for NTS Northeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
System for specifying the Northeast corner when and CRNRS =

SWNE.
NENTSAOI
C*32
ZCL default
String for NTS Southwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
System for specifying the Southwest corner, where CRNRS =

SWNE.
SWNTSAOI
C*32
ZCL default
Meridian for DLS Northwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Meridian number for Northwest corner. Required when CRNRS =

NWSE and NWCRNR = DLS.
NWMRIDAN
I
1 through 6
ZCL default
389
Landmark
Range for DLS Northwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Range
Default Value
Range value for Northwest corner. Required when CRNRS =

NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.
NWRNGE
1 through 30
ZCL default
Township for DLS Northwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Township row value for Northwest corner. Required when CRNRS

= NWSE and NWCRNR = DLS.
NWTOWNSH
I
1 through 126
ZCL default
Section for DLS Northwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value:
Section value for Northwest corner. Required when CRNRS =

NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.
NWSECTON
I
1 through 36
ZCL default
Meridian for DLS Southeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Meridian number for Southeast corner. Required when CRNRS =

NWSE and SECORNER = DLS.
SEMRIDAN
I
1 through 6
ZCL default
390
Landmark
Range for DLS Southeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Range value for Southeast corner. Required when CRNRS =

NWSE and SECORNER = DLS.
SERNGE
I
1 through 30
ZCL default
Township for DLS Southeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Township row value for Southeast corner. Required when CRNRS

= NWSE and SECORNER = DLS.
SETOWNSH
I
1 through 126
ZCL default
Section for DLS Southeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Section value for Southeast corner. Required when

AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CRNRS = NWSE and
SECORNER = DLS.
SESECTON
I
1 through 36
ZCL default
Meridian for DLS Northeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Meridian number for Northeast corner. Required when

AOITYPE = DLS//NTS PROJECTED, CRNRS = NESW and
NECORNER = DLS.
NEMRIDAN
I
1 through 6
ZCL default
391
Landmark
Range for DLS Northeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Range
Default Value
Range value for Northeast corner. Required when

CRNRS = NESW and NECORNER = DLS.
NERNGE
1 through 30
ZCL default
Township for DLS Northeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Township row value for Northeast corner. Required when

CRNRS = NESW and NECORNER = DLS.
NETOWNSH
I
1 through 126
ZCL default
Section for DLS Northeast Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Section value for Northeast corner. Required when

CRNRS = NESW and NECORNER = DLS
NESECTON
I
1 through 36
ZCL default
Meridian for DLS Southwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Meridian number for Southwest corner. Required when

CRNRS = NESW and SWCORNER = DLS.
SWMRIDAN
I
1 through 6
ZCL default
392
Landmark
Range for DLS Southwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Range value for Southwest corner. Required when

SWRNGE
I
1 through 30
ZCL default
Township for DLS Southwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Township row value for Southwest corner. Required when

SWTOWNSH
I
1 through 126
ZCL default
Section for DLS Southwest Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Section value for Southwest corner. Required when CRNRS =

NESW and SWCORNER = DLS.
SWSECTON
I
1 through 36
ZCL default
ZCL PROCESSES
PROJECTION
PICTURE
R2003.12.0
393
Landmark
PICTURE-STATS
Macro Name
PICTURE-STATS
Menu Option
Macros Utilities Picture Statistics
Purpose
This macro gives information on a picture.
Description
This macro generates a report with area of interest (AOI) and projection
information about the specified picture file.
PICTURE-STATS requires the name of the picture file to be analyzed.
This macro does not supply LGB types. To see a list of the LGB types
present in a picture file, select File Info
File/Picture Information in the Z-MAP Plus window.
Results
Creates a printout containing AOI and projection information about the

picture.

*Select Graphics File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the name of graphics file

ZFGNAME
C*80
All graphics files that reside in the chosen directory paths
REQUIRED
*Select Picture
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the input picture

PICURE
C*80
All pictures on the selected graphics file
REQUIRED
ZCL PROCESSES
R2003.12.0
PICTURE-STATS
394
Landmark
POLYGON-CLOSE
Macro Name
POLYGON-CLOSE
Menu Option
Macros Utilities Close Polygons in Vertex File
Purpose
This macro closes all polygons in a VERT file. Closed polygons are
output to a new vertex file. After running this macro, check individual
polygons for intersecting or crossing lines.
When Using Polygon Close on a Fault File
To apply this macro to a fault file, you must first convert the fault file to a
vertex file using the File Conversion process (under either Z-MAP Plus
Operations or ZCL). For the macro to work correctly, SEG I.D. must be in
field position three.
Results
R2003.12.0
Closed polygon(s) output to a new vertex file.
POLYGON-CLOSE
395
Landmark
POLYGON-CLOSE: Parameters

*Select Input Polygon File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input polygon file.

POLYIN
C*24
No default
MFD for the Input Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Name Output Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output polygon file.

POLYOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Output Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE
IMPORT
POLYGON CLIP
SINGLE DATA OPS
SPAWN
R2003.12.0
POLYGON-CLOSE: Parameters
396
Landmark
POLYGON-FILL
Macro Name
POLYGON-FILL
Menu Option
Features Polygons Color-filled Polygons
Purpose
This macro takes polygons stored in a vertex file, fills them with a solid
color, and saves the filled polygons in an MFD.
When Posting to a Picture, Use the .PICMAC Version of a Macro
The .PICMAC version writes to the picture currently displayed in the

Z-MAP Plus window and updates the display list. However, if you execute
the .ZCLMAC version in Z-MAP Plus, you must read the picture again to see
the colorfill that results.
Results
Color-filled polygons on the current picture.

*Enter the Filename of the Polygon(s)
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input vertex file.

VERTICES
C*24
All attached VERT and FALT files
No default
MFD of the Input Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
POLYGON-FILL
397
Landmark
POLYGON-FILL: Parameters
Coordinate System for the Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the coordinate system for the polygon vertices.

COORDSYS
ENGINEERING
PLOTTER
Data Type
Default Value
= Specify vertices in engineering coordinates.

= Specify vertices in plotter coordinates (in or cm).
C*12
ENGINEERING
Get Color from Where

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether to use an assigned color index or a field in the

polygon file to determine the index used for the colorfill.
COLRFROM
COLOR FIELD
= Use a color field (type 41) from the polygon file to

determine the index used for colorfill.
COLOR NUMBER = Use the color index number specified by INDEX.
Data Type
Range
C*12
COLOR NUMBER
Enter the Color Index Number (if needed)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the color to use for filling all polygons.

INDEX
I
0 through 255
17
ZCL PROCESSES
COLOR POLYGONS
R2003.12.0
POLYGON-FILL: Parameters
398
Landmark
POST-DLS
Macro Name
POST-DLS
Menu Option
Features Surveys (Canadian)

Post Township/Section/Range (DLS)
Purpose
This macro posts Dominion Land Survey (DLS) lines on an already

created picture. (You may create a picture with DLS lines using the
PICT-NTS-DLS macro.) On this map the Township, Section, Quarter
Section and DLS lines may be drawn along with the Township and
Section labels. Road allowances may also be posted on the picture.
Description
You must specify:
type of line for Township, Section, Quarter, Section and Legal

Subdivision (DLS) lines
whether road allowances are posted
Allocate the DLS Binary File Before Running This Macro
Type:
Results
R2003.12.0
A DLS grid with the requested lines and labels posted.
POST-DLS
399
Landmark
POST-DLS: Parameters

Select How to Draw Township Lines
Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the line type for the Township borders.

TOWNLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=

C*8
DASHED
Decide Whether to Display Township Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether township labels are to be drawn.

TOWNLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
YES
Height of the Township Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Height of the township labels, in plotter units (in or cm).

TOWNHGHT
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
400
Landmark
Select How to Draw Section Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

SECTLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
Do not draw section borders.

Draw normal section borders.
Draw dashed section borders.
Draw bold section borders.
C*8
PLAIN
Decide Whether to Display Section Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether to display section labels.

SECTLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

SECTHGHT
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Select How to Draw Quarter Sec. Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the line type of the Quarter Section borders.

QRTRLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=

C*8
NONE
401
Landmark
Select How to Draw Legal Subdivision Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the line type for the legal sub-division lines.

SUBDLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=

C*8
NONE
Decide Whether to Display Road Allowances

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether Road Allowances are to be labeled.

ROADALLW
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label the road allowances.

= Do not label the road allowances.
C*4
YES
ZCL PROCESSES
POST DLS
R2003.12.0
402
Landmark
POST-LINE
Macro Name
POST-LINE
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Post Line
Purpose
When posting culture data, you may want to post only one line from a
line type file. This macro allows you to select and post one line, thereby
eliminating the need to post all lines in a line type file and then delete
lines you do not want.
Description
This macro extracts a line from a VERT, DATA, or FALT type file
based on its SEG I.D. and posts it on the current picture. You can
control the following for the line you are posting:
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
line SEG I.D.

line style
line color index
line weight
name of the VERT, DATA or FALT file that contains the line
SEG I.D. field in the input file
SEG I.D. integer value of the line to be posted
line style and line color of line to post
The line is extract from the chosen file and posted on the current picture
in the manner requested.
POST-LINE
403
Landmark
POST-LINE: Parameters

Select the File Containing the Line
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file from which the line is to be extracted.

VERTIN
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input vertex file

MFDVERT
I
0 through 5
Segment I.D. Field in the Input File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
SEG I.D. field in the input file for the line to be posted.
SEGIDF
I
ZCL default
Enter the Segment I.D. of the Line to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Number of the SEG I.D. to post.

WHICHL
I
1
404
Landmark
Select the Line Style to use

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
This parameter determines the line style for the line you are
posting. You can use a solid, single dash, or hachured line.
LINESTYLE
SOLID
SINGLE DASH
HACHURE
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
SOLID
Direction of Hachure Marks

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Hachure placement relative to line posting direction when

LINESTYLE = HACHURE. You can place hachure marks on the
left or right side of the line.
HATCHDIR
LEFT
RIGHT
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
LEFT
Length Dashes/Hachures
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Length of the dashes when LINESTYLE = SINGLE DASH or

when LINESTYLE = HACHURE, length of each hachure tick.
This length is plotter units (in or cm).
DASHLENGTH
R
0.07 in or 0.20 cm
405
Landmark
Length Gap between Dashes/Hachures

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of the gaps between dashes when LINESTYLE =

DASHED, or length between hachure ticks on the line when
LINESTYLE = HACHURE, in plotter units (in or cm).
DASHGAP
R
0.07 in or 0.20 cm
Select the Color Index to use

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The color index used to post the line in the requested style.
COLOR
I
0 through 255
40
Select the Line Weight used 1-8

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Thickness of the line to be posted. This is in pen widths on a plotter

or pixels on a VDU device.
WGHT
I
1 through 8
2
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE
SELECT
POST DATA NEW
R2003.12.0
406
Landmark
POST-NTS
Macro Name
POST-NTS
Menu Option
Features Surveys (Canadian)

Post National Topo. Survey (NTS)
Purpose
This macro posts National Topographic Survey (NTS), Map, Series,

Block, Unit and/or Quarter lines and labels on an existing picture. The
macro also enables you to specify line type and width for each type of
line, as well as the font and size for each type of label.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
boundaries
line type and width of each line
size and font of the labels
An NTS grid with the requested lines and labels posted.
POST-NTS
407
Landmark
POST-NTS: Parameters

Post NTS Clipped to DLS
Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify how NTS and DLS are to be plotted together.

MCLPNTS
NTS ONLY
= Plot only the National Topographic Survey.
NTS CLIP DLS = Plot the National Topographic Survey, clipping the
Dominion Land Survey.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
NTS ONLY
Survey Type
Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MSURVEY
NTS
PNGA
Data Type
Range
= Plot true National Topographic Series.

= Plot Petroleum & Natural Gas Act.
C*4
NTS

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Level or density of lines to draw. For example, if MLINLEVL =

SERIES, then NTS, Map and Series lines are drawn.
MLINLEVL
NTS
MAP
SERIES
BLOCK
UNIT
QUARTER
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
=
NTS boundaries
Map boundaries
Series boundaries
Block boundaries
Unit boundaries
Quarter boundaries
C*8
BLOCK
408
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MLABLEVL
NTS
MAP
SERIES
BLOCK
UNIT
QUARTER
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
=
=
NTS number
Map letter
Series number
Block letter
Unit number
Quarter letter
C*8
BLOCK

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the level or density of labels to draw in lower left corner of

the map. MLWLLEVL must be less than or equal to MLABLEVL
in density.
MLWLLEVL
NTS
MAP
SERIES
BLOCK
UNIT
QUARTER
NONE
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NTS number
Map letter
Series number
Block letter
Unit number
Quarter letter
No label
C*8
BLOCK
409
Landmark
Type of NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MNTSLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value

C*8
PLAIN
Label NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MNTSLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label NTS lines.

= Do not label NTS lines.
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MNTSCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

MNTSWGHT
I
1 through 8
2
410
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MNTSLINE = DASHED.
MNTSDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm Gap Length for Dashed NTS Lines
MNTSLINE = DASHED.
MNTSGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MNTSFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Label height for NTS line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when NTSLABEL = YES.
MNTSHGHT
R
411
Landmark
Type of Map Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of map lines to draw.

MMAPLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Default Value
= Draw normal MAP lines.

= Draw dashed MAP lines.
= Draw bold MAP lines.
PLAIN
Label Map Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Map lines.

MMAPLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label Map lines.

= Do not label Map lines.
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for Map lines.

MMAPCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Pen weight of bold Map lines.

MMAPWGHT
I
1 through 8
2
412
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for Map lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
MMAPDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for Map lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
MMAPGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MMAPFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Label height for Map line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MAPLABEL = YES.
MMAPHGHT
R
413
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of Series lines to draw.

MSRSLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw normal SERIES lines.

= Draw dashed SERIES lines.
= Draw bold SERIES lines.
C*8
PLAIN
Label Series Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Series lines.

MSRSLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label the SERIES lines.

= Do not label the SERIES lines.
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for Series lines.

MSRSCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Pen weight of bold Series lines.

MSRSWGHT
I
1 through 8
2
414
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for Series lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MSRSLINE = DASHED.
MSRSDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for Series lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
MSRSGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for Series line labels.

MSRSFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
when MSRSLABL = YES.
MSRSHGHT
R
415
Landmark
Type of Block Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of Block lines to draw.

MBLKLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw normal Block lines.

= Draw dashed Block lines.
= Draw bold Block lines.
C*8
PLAIN
Label Block Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Block lines.

MBLKLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label Block lines.

= Do not label Block lines.
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for Block lines.

MBLKCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Pen weight of bold Block lines.

MBLKWGHT
I
1 through 8
2
416
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for Block lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLKLINE = DASHED.
MBLKDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for Block lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLCKLINE = DASHED.
MBLKGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for Block line labels.

MBLKFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Label height for Block line labels in, plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLCKLABL = YES.
MBLKHGHT
R
417
Landmark
Type of Unit Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of Unit lines to draw.

MUNTLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw normal Unit lines.

= Draw dashed Unit lines.
= Draw bold Unit lines.
C*8
PLAIN
Label Unit Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Unit lines.

MUNTLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label Unit lines.

= Do not label Unit lines.
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for Unit lines.

MUNTCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Pen weight of bold Unit lines.

MUNTWGHT
I
1 through 8
2
418
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for Unit lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MUNTLINE = DASHED.
MUNTDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for Unit lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MUNTLINE = DASHED.
MUNTGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for Unit line labels.

MUNTFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Label height for Unit line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MUNTLABEL = YES.
MUNTHGHT
R
419
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of Quarter lines to draw.

MQTRLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw normal Quarter lines.

= Draw dashed Quarter lines.
= Draw bold Quarter lines.
C*8
PLAIN
Label Quarter Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Quarter lines.

MQTRLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
Label Quarter lines.

Do not label Quarter lines.
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for Quarter lines.

MQTRCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Pen weight of bold Quarter lines.

MQTRWGHT
I
1 through 8
2
420
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for Quarter lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MQTRLINE = DASHED.
MQTRDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for Quarter lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
MQTRGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for Quarter line labels.

MQTRFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Label height for Quarter line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MQTRLABL = YES.
MQTRHGHT
R
421
Landmark
Label Lower Left Corner

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MLWLLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label lower left corner.

= Do not label lower left corner.
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
MLWLFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for lower left corner label, in plotter units (in or cm).
Used when MLWLLABL = YES.
MLWLHGHT
R
ZCL PROCESSES
POST NTS
R2003.12.0
422
Landmark
POST-NTS-DLS
Macro Name
POST-NTS-DLS
Menu Option
Features Surveys (Canadian) Post DLS & NTS Surveys
Purpose
This macro posts National Topographic Survey (NTS), Map, Series,

Block, Unit and/or Quarter lines and labels on an existing picture. The
macro also enables you to specify line type and width for each type of
line, as well as the font and size for each type of label.
This macro also posts Dominion Land Survey (DLS) lines on an
already created picture. (You may create a picture with DLS lines using
the PICT-NTS-DLS macro.) On this map the Township, Section,
Quarter Section and DLS lines may be drawn along with the Township
and Section labels. Road allowances may also be posted on the picture.
The NTS and DLS will be clipped to each other along the British
Columbia and Alberta border.
Warning
The map must have both NTS and DLS areas present or this macro aborts.
Description
type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
boundaries
line type and width of each NTS line
type of labeling for the NTS lines
size and font of the NTS labels
type of line for Township, Section, Quarter, Section and Legal

Subdivision (DLS) lines
type of labeling for the DLS lines
whether DLS road allowances are posted

Type:
Results
R2003.12.0
DLS and NTS grids with the requested lines and labels posted.
POST-NTS-DLS
423
Landmark
POST-NTS-DLS: Parameters

Survey Type
Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MSURVEY
NTS
PNGA
Data Type
Range
= Plot true National Topographic Series.

= Plot Petroleum & Natural Gas Act.
C*4
NTS

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Level or density of lines to draw. For example, if MLINLEVL =

SERIES, then NTS, Map and Series lines are drawn.
MLINLEVL
NTS
MAP
SERIES
BLOCK
UNIT
QUARTER
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
=
NTS boundaries
Map boundaries
Series boundaries
Block boundaries
Unit boundaries
Quarter boundaries
C*8
BLOCK
424
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MLABLEVL
NTS
MAP
SERIES
BLOCK
UNIT
QUARTER
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
=
=
NTS number
Map letter
Series number
Block letter
Unit number
Quarter letter
C*8
BLOCK

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the level or density of labels to draw in lower left corner of

the map. MLWLLEVL must be less than or equal to MLABLEVL
in density.
MLWLLEVL
NTS
MAP
SERIES
BLOCK
UNIT
QUARTER
NONE
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NTS number
Map letter
Series number
Block letter
Unit number
Quarter letter
No label
C*8
BLOCK
425
Landmark
Type of NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MNTSLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value

C*8
PLAIN
Type of Map Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of map lines to draw.

MMAPLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Default Value
= Draw normal MAP lines.

= Draw dashed MAP lines.
= Draw bold MAP lines.
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of Series lines to draw.

MSRSLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Draw normal SERIES lines.

= Draw dashed SERIES lines.
= Draw bold SERIES lines.
C*8
PLAIN
426
Landmark
Type of Block Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of Block lines to draw.

MBLKLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw normal Block lines.

= Draw dashed Block lines.
= Draw bold Block lines.
C*8
PLAIN
Type of Unit Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of Unit lines to draw.

MUNTLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw normal Unit lines.

= Draw dashed Unit lines.
= Draw bold Unit lines.
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of Quarter lines to draw.

MQTRLINE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Draw normal Quarter lines.

= Draw dashed Quarter lines.
= Draw bold Quarter lines.
C*8
PLAIN
427
Landmark
Label NTS Lines?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MNTSLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label NTS lines.

= Do not label NTS lines.
C*4
YES
Label Map Lines?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Map lines.

MMAPLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label Map lines.

= Do not label Map lines.
C*4
YES
Label Series Lines?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Series lines.

MSRSLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label the SERIES lines.

= Do not label the SERIES lines.
C*4
YES
Label Block Lines?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Block lines.

MBLKLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Label Block lines.

= Do not label Block lines.
C*4
YES
428
Landmark
Label Unit Lines?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Unit lines.

MUNTLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label Unit lines.

= Do not label Unit lines.
C*4
YES
Label Quarter Lines?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to label Quarter lines.

MQTRLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
Label Quarter lines.

Do not label Quarter lines.
C*4
YES
Label Lower Left Corner?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MLWLLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label lower left corner.

= Do not label lower left corner.
C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

MNTSCLR
I
0 through 255
1
429
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for Map lines.

MMAPCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for Series lines.

MSRSCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for Block lines.

MBLKCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify color index for Unit lines.

MUNTCLR
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Specify color index for Quarter lines.

MQTRCLR
I
0 through 255
1
430
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range

MNTSWGHT
I
1 through 8

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold Map lines.

MMAPWGHT
I
1 through 8
2

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold Series lines.

MSRSWGHT
I
1 through 8
2

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold Block lines.

MBLKWGHT
I
1 through 8
2

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Pen weight of bold Unit lines.

MUNTWGHT
I
1 through 8
2
431
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Pen weight of bold Quarter lines.

MQTRWGHT
I
1 through 8
2

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MNTSLINE = DASHED.
MNTSDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for Map lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
MMAPDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for Series lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
MSRSDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Length of dash for Block lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLKLINE = DASHED.
MBLKDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
432
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for Unit lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MUNTLINE = DASHED.
MUNTDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of dash for Quarter lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
MQTRDASH
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Gap Length for Dashed NTS Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MNTSLINE = DASHED.
MNTSGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for Map lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
MMAPGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Length of gap for Series lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
MSRSGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
433
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for Block lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLCKLINE = DASHED.
MBLKGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for Unit lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MUNTLINE = DASHED.
MUNTGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Length of gap for Quarter lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
MQTRGAP
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MNTSFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*8
PLAIN
434
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

MMAPFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for Series line labels.

MSRSFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for Block line labels.

MBLKFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*8
PLAIN
435
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for Unit line labels.

MUNTFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of label font for Quarter line labels.

MQTRFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
PLAIN

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
MLWLFONT
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*8
PLAIN
436
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for NTS line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when NTSLABEL = YES.
MNTSHGHT
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
when MAPLABEL = YES.
MMAPHGHT
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
when MSRSLABL = YES.
MSRSHGHT
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for Block line labels in, plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLCKLABL = YES.
MBLKHGHT
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Label height for Unit line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MUNTLABEL = YES.
MUNTHGHT
R
437
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for Quarter line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MQTRLABL = YES.
MQTRHGHT
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Label height for lower left corner label, in plotter units (in or cm).
Used when MLWLLABL = YES.
MLWLHGHT
R
Line Type for Township Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the line type for the Township borders.

TOWNLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=

C*8
DASHED
Line Type for Section Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

SECTLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
Do not draw section borders.

Draw normal section borders.
Draw dashed section borders.
Draw bold section borders.
C*8
PLAIN
438
Landmark
Line Type for Quarter Section Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the line type of the Quarter Section borders.

QRTRLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=

C*8
NONE
Line Type for Line Type for Legal Subdivision Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the line type for the legal sub-division lines.

SUBDLINE
NONE
PLAIN
DASHED
BOLD
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=

C*8
NONE
Display Township Labels?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether township labels are to be drawn.

TOWNLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
YES
439
Landmark
Display Section Labels?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether to display section labels.

SECTLABL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
YES
Display Road Allowances?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether Road Allowances are to be labeled.

ROADALLW
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label the road allowances.

= Do not label the road allowances.
C*4
YES
Height of the Township Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of the township labels, in plotter units (in or cm).

TOWNHGHT
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

SECTHGHT
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
ZCL PROCESSES
POST NTS
R2003.12.0
POST DLS
440
Landmark
POST-PIC-STATS
Macro Name
POST-PIC-STATS
Menu Option
Features Projection Box
Purpose
This macro draws a box on a map and posts information about the
scale, size. and projection of the map.
Description
The user is allowed to specify the location of the box on the map, but
the size will always remain fixed at five inches wide and three inches
high. This macro creates a new, temporary picture on the .zgf file and
places the required scale and projection information into the new
picture. This picture is then added as an Index Map graphic feature onto
the users picture. The temporary picture created by the macro is
erased.
Placement of the box can be from the lower left corner of the box in
plotter units (X and/or Y value) or from the lower right corner in map
units (X and/or Y value). The simplest method is to place the box using
map units; move the cursor to the desired location on the map and press
mouse button 2. The user can also mix the placement units. For
example, the X coordinate can be from the lower right in map units, and
the corresponding Y coordinate can be from the lower left in plotter
units. The projection box looks best when aligned next to the title box
which is usually .5 inches from the bottom of the map.
The default color of the box is transparent. The user can optionally fill
the box with an opaque color but nothing underneath the box will be
visible.
Help text is available when creating a POST-PIC-STAT. To retrieve
help, click on the Help button.
Results
R2003.12.0
Creates a projection box in the .zgf file, places the box on the
designated map, deletes the projection box picture from the .zgf file.
POST-PIC-STATS
441
Landmark
POST-PIC-STATS: Parameters

*Select Graphics File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the input graphics file where the project box is to be placed
ZFGNAME
C*80
All graphics files that reside in the chosen directory paths
REQUIRED
Select Picture
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Select the input picture to place the projection box onto

PICTURE
C*80
All pictures on the selected graphics file
REQUIRED
Text Font
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Selection of fonts for the text in the projection box

FONT
C*8
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Default Value
PLAIN
Text Color Index

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color of text in projection box

COLOR
Integer
0 through 255
0
442
Landmark
Text Height
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Height of text to be used in the projection box

CHARSIZE
Real
Positive Values
.08
Line Color Border

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Border color of the projection box

LINCOLOR
Integer
0 through 255
1
Line Weight
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Thickness of the projection box border

LINEWGHT
Integer
2 through 8
3
Color Fill for the Projection Box?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color of the area fill for the projection box

BRDRFILL
Integer
0 through 255
0 (No fill for a transparent box color)
443
Landmark
X Lower Left Corner of Box (Plotter Units)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Placement of the lower left corner of the projection box on the

designated X coordinate in plotter units. If the X Lower Right
Corner of th Box (Map Units) parameter is specified this value will
not be used.
XBOTLEFT
Real
Plot dimensions
20
Y Lower Left Corner of Box (Plotter Units)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Placement of the lower left corner of the projection box - Y

coordinate in plotter units. If the Y lower Right Corner of Box
(Map Units) is specified this value will not be used.
YBOTLEFT
Real
Plot dimensions
.5 (plotter units)
Lower Right Corner of Box (Map Units)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Placement of the lower right corner of the predation box - Y

coordinate in map units.
YBOTRGHT
Real
Map dimensions
.1E+31
ZCL PROCESSES
R2003.12.0
444
Landmark
POST-PIC-STAR
Macro Name
POST-STAR
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Post Z-field Star
Purpose
This macro posts star symbols on the current picture for data
distributed at control points. Each spoke on the star represents a
different attribute (z field). The length of each spoke of the star is
proportional to the z field it represents. The lengths are also dependent
upon the selected symbol size; thus, if the symbol size changes, so do
the spoke lengths. The data in each z field is divided into groups, also
called class intervals, that are based upon their numeric values. Each
class interval is associated with a spoke length.
Spokes are always separated at equal angles. Thus the separation angle
is based upon the number of spokes. The first z field you specify is
always represented by the due North spoke. Subsequent z fields are
represented as shown below:
1
8
2
3
6
3
Description
4
5
This macro can be used to correlate z values to other z values at each

control point. You are asked to specify:
R2003.12.0
a control point dataset containing an x field, a y field and up to

eight z fields (one for each point of the star)
the number of spokes (18); this should be equal to the number of
attribute z fields
the symbol size
the length of the increment between values
class parameter (number of divisions in attribute range)
POST-PIC-STAR
445
Landmark
POST-PIC-STAR
For Fields in Data that Have No Range, Manually Input Class Limits
If the dataset for which you are posting field values has any fields with a
range of zero, you may get the following error message:
POST-STAR.ZCLMAC
ERROR *** DATA RANGE IS LE 0 FOR FIELD
POST-STAR only autosets class limits if a field has a data range. If you have
a field in your dataset that does not have a range, hand type in the class
ranges, and the POST-STAR process completes normally.
Results
Control points are posted with a star formation on the current picture.
Optionally, you may output a legend that shows which spoke represents
which z field and the value of the lengths. To view the results,
re-display the picture after you run this macro.
Skyline Wells with Star Symbols Representing Five Z Fields
R2003.12.0
POST-PIC-STAR
446
Landmark
POST-PIC-STAR: Parameters

*Input File for Posting
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file. File must have x and y fields.

FILEIN
C*24
No default
MFD for Input File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Searches all attached MFDs.
Symbol Size
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of the symbol, which is a circle, before spokes are added.

Spoke size is in plotter units (in or cm).
SYMBSIZE
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Length of the Increments

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Increment the length of the spokes by this amount, in plotter units

(in or cm).
LENINC
R
0.06 in or 0.15 cm
447
Landmark
Location of the Legend

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the position of the legend.

LOCATION
ARBITRARY
= Let XLOWLEFT, YLOWLEFT specify the x and y

position of the lower left corner of the legend.
OMIT
= Do not plot legend.
LOWER LEFT = Place legend in y offset area of lower left corner.
LOWER RIGHT = Place legend in y offset area of lower right corner
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
OMIT
Arbitrary X Bottom Left Corner of the Legend (in or cm)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The x position of the lower left corner of the legend, in plotter units
(in or cm).
XLOWLEFT
R
1.0
Arbitrary Y Bottom Left Corner of the Legend (in or cm)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The y position of the lower left corner of the legend, in plotter units
(in or cm).
YLOWLEFT
R
1.0
Number of spokes (18)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Number of spokes for the star; this should be equal to the number of
z fields to be posted.
NUMSPOKE
I
1 through 8
1
448
Landmark
First Field to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field to post at first spoke.

POSTFLDS
I
ZCL default
Number of Classes for the First Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The number of class divisions for the first spoke.

NUMCLASS
I
1 through 6
6
Minimum Value for the First Class

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The minimum value to post for the first z field. If a field value is less
than this value, a spoke is not drawn for the field.
MINVALS
R
ZCL default minimum value for the field
Maximum Value for the First Class

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the first class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the second class. Calculated so that the
data range is divided into NUMCLASS intervals.
CLSLMT1S
R
ZCL default calculated so that data range is divided into
NUMCLASS intervals
449
Landmark
Maximum Value for the Second Class

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the second class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the third class. Calculated so that the
CLSLMT12
R
NUMCLASS intervals
Maximum Value for the Third Class

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the third class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the fourth class. Calculated so that the
CLSLMT13
R
NUMCLASS intervals
Maximum Value for the Fourth Class

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fourth class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the fifth class. Calculated so that the
CLSLMT14
R
NUMCLASS intervals
Maximum Value for the Fifth Class

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the fifth class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the sixth class. Calculated so that the
CLSLMT15
R
NUMCLASS intervals
450
Landmark
Maximum Value for the Sixth Class

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the sixth class for the first spoke.
Calculated so that the data range is divided into NUMCLAS2
intervals.
CLSLMT16
R
NUMCLASS intervals
Second Field to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field to post at second spoke.

POSTFLD2
I
ZCL default
Number of Classes for the Second Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The number of class divisions for the second spoke.

NUMCLAS2
I
1 through 6
6

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The minimum value to post for the second z field. If a field value is
less than this value, a spoke is not drawn for the field.
MINVAL2
R
451
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the first class for the second spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the second class.
CLSLMT2S
R
NUMCLAS2 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the second class for the second spoke. This
is also the minimum value for the third class. Calculated so that the
data range is divided into NUMCLAS2 intervals.
CLSLMT22
R
NUMCLAS2 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the third class for the second spoke. This is
CLSLMT23
R
NUMCLAS2 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the fourth class for the second spoke. This
is also the minimum value for the fifth class. Calculated so that the
CLSLMT24
R
NUMCLAS2 intervals
452
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fifth class for the second spoke. This is
CLSLMT25
R
NUMCLAS2 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the sixth class for the second spoke.
intervals.
CLSLMT26
R
NUMCLAS2 intervals
Third Field to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field to post at third spoke.

POSTFLD3
I
ZCL default
Number of Classes for the Third Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The number of class divisions for the third spoke.

NUMCLAS3
I
1 through 6
6
453
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The minimum value to post for the third z field. If a field value is
MINVAL3
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the first class for the third spoke. This is
CLSLMT3S
R
NUMCLAS3 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the second class for the third spoke. This is
CLSLMT32
R
NUMCLAS3 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the third class for the third spoke. This is
CLSLMT33
R
NUMCLAS3 intervals
454
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fourth class for the third spoke. This is
CLSLMT34
R
NUMCLAS3 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fifth class for the third spoke. This is
CLSLMT35
R
NUMCLAS3 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the sixth class for the third spoke.
intervals.
CLSLMT36
R
NUMCLAS3 intervals
Fourth Field to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Field to post at the fourth spoke.

POSTFLD4
I
ZCL default
455
Landmark
Number of Classes for the Fourth Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Number of class divisions for the fourth spoke.

NUMCLAS4
I
1 through 6
6

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The minimum value to post for the fourth z field. If a field value is
MINVAL4
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the first class for the fourth spoke. This is
CLSLMT4S
R
NUMCLAS4 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the second class for the fourth spoke. This
CLSLMT42
R
NUMCLAS4 intervals
456
Landmark

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the third class for the fourth spoke. This is
CLSLMT43
R
NUMCLAS4 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fourth class for the fourth spoke. This
CLSLMT44
R
NUMCLAS4 intervals.

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fifth class for the fourth spoke. This is
CLSLMT45
R
NUMCLAS4 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the sixth class for the fourth spoke.
intervals.
CLSLMT46
R
NUMCLAS4 intervals
457
Landmark
Fifth Field to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field to post at the fifth spoke.

POSTFLD5
I
ZCL default
Number of Classes for the Fifth Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The number of class divisions for the fifth spoke.

NUMCLAS5
I
1 through 6
6

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The minimum value to post for the fifth z field. If a field value is
MINVAL5
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the first class for the fifth spoke. This is
CLSLMT5S
R
NUMCLAS5 intervals
458
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the second class for the fifth spoke. This is
CLSLMT52
R
NUMCLAS5 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the third class for the fifth spoke. This is
CLSLMT53
R
NUMCLAS5 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the fourth class for the fifth spoke. This is
CLSLMT54
R
NUMCLAS5 intervals
459
Landmark

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fifth class for the fifth spoke. This is
CLSLMT55
R
NUMCLAS5 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the sixth class for the fifth spoke.
intervals.
CLSLMT56
R
NUMCLAS5 intervals
Sixth Field to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field to post at the sixth spoke.

POSTFLD6
I
ZCL default
Number of Classes for the Sixth Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The number of class divisions for the sixth spoke.

NUMCLAS6
I
1 through 6
6
460
Landmark

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The minimum value to post for the sixth z field. If a field value is
less than this value, a spoke is not drawn for the field. Calculated so
that the data range is divided into NUMCLAS6 intervals.
MINVAL6
R

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the first class for the sixth spoke. This is
CLSLMT6S
R
NUMCLAS6 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the second class for the sixth spoke. This is
CLSLMT62
R
NUMCLAS6 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the third class for the sixth spoke. This is
CLSLMT63
R
NUMCLAS6 intervals
461
Landmark

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fourth class for the sixth spoke. This is
CLSLMT64
R
NUMCLAS6 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fifth class for the sixth spoke. This is
CLSLMT65
R
NUMCLAS6 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the sixth class for the sixth spoke.
intervals.
CLSLMT66
R
NUMCLAS6 intervals
Seventh Field to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Field to post at seventh spoke.

POSTFLD7
I
ZCL default
462
Landmark
Number of Classes for the Seventh Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The number of class divisions for the seventh spoke.

NUMCLAS7
I
1 through 6
6

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The minimum value to post for the seventh z field. If a field value is
MINVAL7
R

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the first class for the seventh spoke. This is
CLSLMT7S
R
NUMCLAS7 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the second class for the seventh spoke.
This is also the minimum value for the third class. Calculated so
that the data range is divided into NUMCLAS7 intervals.
CLSLMT72
R
NUMCLAS7 intervals
463
Landmark

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the third class for the seventh spoke. This
is also the minimum value for the fourth class. Calculated so that
the data range is divided into NUMCLAS7 intervals.
CLSLMT73
R
NUMCLAS7 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fourth class for the seventh spoke. This
CLSLMT74
R
NUMCLAS7 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fifth class for the seventh spoke. This is
CLSLMT75
R
NUMCLAS7 intervals

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the sixth class for the seventh spoke.
intervals.
CLSLMT76
R
NUMCLAS7 intervals
464
Landmark
Eighth Field to Post

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Field to post at eighth spoke

POSTFLD8
I
ZCL default
Number of Classes for the Eighth Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The number of class divisions for the eighth spoke.

NUMCLAS8
I
1 through 6
6

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The minimum value to post for the eighth z field. If a field value is
MINVAL8
R

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the first class for the eighth spoke. This is
CLSLMT8S
R
NUMCLAS8 intervals
465
Landmark

Default Value
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the second class for the eighth spoke. This
CLSLMT82
R
NUMCLAS8 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the third class for the eighth spoke. This is
CLSLMT83
R
NUMCLAS8 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the fourth class for the eighth spoke. This
CLSLMT84
R
NUMCLAS8 intervals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The maximum value for the fifth class for the eighth spoke. This is
CLSLMT85
R
NUMCLAS8 intervals
466
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The maximum value for the sixth class for the eighth spoke.
intervals.
CLSLMT86
R
NUMCLAS8 intervals
ZCL PROCESSES
POST STAR SYMBOL
R2003.12.0
467
Landmark
PROFILE-CONTOURS
Macro Name
PROFILE-CONTOURS
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Isopach Contouring (Profiles)
Purpose
This macro contours grids that have abrupt changes in surface slope
along well-defined profile lines. The macro can contour isopach and
isochore models, and faulted horizon models created in Point Gridding
Plus. Profile Contours uses the same basic algorithms used in regular
contouring. You can set attributes, including line style, color, and
colorfill to apply to all contours. In addition, you can modify the
attributes of user-specified contour levels.
Profile Contouring does not annotate fault traces.
Description
This macro requires that you specify an input grid.

To take full advantage of the macros capabilities, you may want to
specify much of the following optional input values:
a profile dataset
a fault dataset
a polygon dataset for limiting contouring
minimum, and contour maximum
colorfill and color bar information
windowing information
gradient blanking information
contour labeling information
exception contour information, including contour level, line type,
line color and fill color
Using Profile-Contours to Best Advantage
The filled grid file and the fault profiles output from Point Gridding Plus are
intended to work with this macro.
Currently Profile-Contour does not replicate the old contour algorithms
results around ordinary fault polygons on a grid Profile-Contour replicates
Contour-New algorithm
Results
R2003.12.0
A contour map that reflects the input.
PROFILE-CONTOURS
468
Landmark
PROFILE-CONTOURS: Parameters

*Input the Grid Name to Contour
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
for the Input Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the grid file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Name of the Optional Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input fault file for contour generation.

FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default
for the Faults
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD to use for storing the fault file.

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
469
Landmark
Name of the Optional Profiles File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input profiles file with z values marking the

discontinuity in the gradient.
PROFILES
C*24
ZCL default
for the Profiles
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDPROF
I
0 through 5
Name of the Optional Polygons File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input vertex file that contains the polygons used for
clipping contours in the display.
MFDPOLY
C*24
ZCL default
for the Polygons
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the input clipping polygon file.

MFDPOLY
I
0 through 5
470
Landmark
Draw Contours on Output Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to draw the contours on the picture.

POSTCNTR
POST
OMIT
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
POST

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Number of contour levels.

NCONTOUR
I
0 through 255
ZCL default computed for input data and other criteria
Min. Contour Level for Contour Pattern

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The lowest (and first) contour level to be drawn.

CONMIN
R
Max. Contour Level for Contour Pattern

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The highest (and last) contour level to be drawn.

CONMAX
R

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The interval between successive contours.

CONINT
R
471
Landmark
Clip Inside or Outside the Polygons

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Gives you the ability to clip inside or outside polygons. Used when
a clipping file is specified.
POLYCLIP
INSIDE
OUTSIDE
Data Type
Default Value
= Clip inside the polygons.

= Clip outside the polygons.
C*8
OUTSIDE
Output Contour (CNTR) File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output contour file. If no name is specified, then

contours are not output.
FILEOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD to use for storing the output contour file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
472
Landmark
Contouring Smoothness
Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify how smooth the contour line is to be drawn. All contours

are made up of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these
SMOOTH
COARSEST = Coarsest point spacing along curves.
Approximately one grid interval
COARSE
= Coarse point spacing along curves.
Approximately1/2 the grid interval.
MEDIUM
= Medium point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1/4 the grid interval.
FINE
= Fine point spacing along curves.
VERY FINE = Very fine point spacing along curves.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
MEDIUM
Colorfill the Plot

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to colorfill the area between contours.

COLORFIL
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
NO COLORFILL
Use the Contours to Generate Colorfill

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

CNTRFILL
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Contours are used to generate colorfill polygons.

position between contours
C*4
YES
473
Landmark
Fill Color Index of First Area

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the starting color index.

FILLCOLR
I
0 through 255
56
Bump Fill Color How Often

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

FILLRATE
I
0 through 255
1

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

FILBELOW
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
YES

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

FILABOVE
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
YES
474
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the location of the color bar.

COLORBAR
NONE
LEFT
RIGHT
ABOVE
BELOW
USER
Data Type
Default Value
=
=
=
=
=
=
No color bar
Left of map
Right of map
Above the map
Below the map
According to user-defined coordinates
C*8
NONE
Color Bar X Minimum Plot Coordinate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum x coordinate of the color bar, in plotter coordinates (in or

cm). Used when COLORBAR = USER.
XMINBAR
R
0.0 in or 0.0 cm
Color Bar X Maximum Plot Coordinate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum x coordinate of the color bar, in plotter coordinates (in or

XMAXBAR
R
1.0 in or 2.5 cm
Color Bar Y Minimum Plot Coordinate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum y coordinate of the color bar, in plotter coordinates (in or

YMINBAR
R
0.0 in or 0.0 cm
475
Landmark
Color Bar Y Maximum Plot Coordinate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum y coordinate of the color bar, in plotter coordinates (in or

YMAXBAR
R
10.0 in or 25.5 cm
Contour Only Within A Window

Description
Specify if contouring is within a specified rectangular area limit.

Choice of Parameters for Specifying Rectangular Window
The rectangular window may be specified using the parameters

XMINWIN, XMAXWIN, YMINWIN, YMAXWIN or with the
parameters CMINWIN, CMAXWIN, RMINWIN, and RMAXWIN.
However, the two groups of parameters may not be mixed.
Macro Parameter
Options
WINDOW
WINDOW
= Contour within a specified rectangular limit.
NO WINDOW = Do not confine contours to a specified rectangular limit.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
NO WINDOW
Window Limits: X Min

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum x coordinate of the window, in engineering coordinates.

Required when WINDOW = WINDOW. XMAXWIN, YMINWIN
and YMAXWIN are specified.
XMINWIN
R
ZCL default
476
Landmark
Window Limits: X Max

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum x coordinate of the window, in engineering coordinates.

Required when WINDOW = WINDOW. XMINWIN, YMINWIN
XMAXWIN
R
ZCL default
Window Limits: Y Min

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum y coordinate of the window, in engineering coordinates.

Required when WINDOW = WINDOW. XMAXWIN, YMINWIN
YMINWIN
R
ZCL default
Window Limits: Y Max

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Minimum x coordinate of the window, in engineering coordinates.

Required when WINDOW = WINDOW. XMAXWIN, XMINWIN
and YMINWIN are specified.
YMAXWIN
R
ZCL default
Window Limits: Column Min

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum of the grid column (the leftmost column) of the

windowed region. Required when WINDOW = WINDOW.
CMINWIN, RMINWIN, and RMAXWIN are specified.
CMINWIN
I
ZCL default
477
Landmark
Window Limits: Column Max

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Maximum of the grid column (the right most column) of the

windowed region. Required when WINDOW = WINDOW.
CMINWIN, RMINWIN, and RMAXWIN are specified.
CMAXWIN
I
ZCL default
Window Limits: Row Min

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Top grid row of the windowed region. Required when WINDOW =

WINDOW. CMAXWIN, CMINWIN, and RMAXWIN are
specified.
RMINWIN
I
ZCL default
Window Limits: Row Max

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Bottom grid row of the windowed region. Required when

WINDOW = WINDOW. CMAXWIN, CMINWIN, and RMINWIN
are specified.
RMAXWIN
I
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

LABLRATE
I
1
478
Landmark
Rate at which Contours are Drawn Bold

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
contour, etc.
BOLDRATE
I
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

HACHRATE
I
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

DASHRATE
I
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the method for choosing color contours. The method

chosen controls the meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
LINCLRTP
HIGHLIGHT
INCREMENT
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

STARTCLR color.
C*12
HIGHLIGHT
479
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
in this color.
STARTCLR
I
0 through 255
56
Color Index of Highlighted Contour Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

HILTCOLR
I
0 through 255
3
Rate to Bump the Color Index

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The contour color is changed at this rate. If LINCLRTP =

HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATE -th contour is colored in the
HILTCOLR color with all other contours being colored in the
STARTCLR color. If LINCLRTP = INCREMENT, the color of
each LINERATE-th contour is changed to the next color in the
color table.
LINERATE
I
0 through 255
1
Contour Gradient Blanking Rate

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

BLNKRATE
I
0 no contours will be gradient blanked
480
Landmark
Gradient Blanking Distance

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

the distance between two contours is less than BLNKDIST.
BLNKDIST
R
0.05 in or 0.15 cm
Label: Number of Digits after the Decimal

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of decimal places to label.

NDECIMAL
I
0
Plot Size of all Contour Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Height of the characters in the contour label, in plotter units (in

or cm).
LABLSIZE
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Color of All Contour Labels

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

LABLCOLR
I
0 through 255
11
481
Landmark
1st Contour Level to be Modified

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Contour exception level indicating either a new contour level or

identifying which existing contour level is to have its parameters
re-specified. You can enter new values for the BOLD1, DASH1,
HACH1, LABEL1, LCOLOR, FNEWCL1 and BLANK 1
parameters.
ELEVEL1
R
ZCL default
Bold this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify if the corresponding contour exception level (ELEVEL1) is

to be drawn as a bold contour. If no value is specified, the default
value for that contour level (as determined by BOLDRATE)
remains unchanged.
BOLD1
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Bold the exception contour.

= Do not bold the exception contour.
C*4
ZCL default
Dash this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

to be drawn as a dashed line. If no value is specified, the default
value for that contour level (as determined by DASHRATE)
remains unchanged.
DASH1
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Draw the exception contour as dashed line.

= Draw the exception contour as a solid line.
C*4
ZCL default
482
Landmark
Draw Hachures on this Contour

Description
Description
Options

to be drawn as a hachured line. If no value is specified, the default
value for that contour level (as determined by HACHRATE)
remains unchanged.
HACH1
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw the exception contour with hachures.

= Draw the exception contour without hachures.
C*4
ZCL default
Label this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

to be labeled. If no value is supplied, the label characteristic as
determined by LABLRATE is used.
LABEL1
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Label the exception contour.

= Do not label the exception contour.
C*4
ZCL default
Specify the Line Color for this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Line color of the corresponding contour exception level

(ELEVEL1).
LCOLOR1
I
0 through 255
1
483
Landmark
Change the Fill Color for this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Color index of the fill color to be used below the contour level
specified by ELEVEL1.
FNEWCL1
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Fill the exception contour.

= Do not fill the exception contour.
C*4
ZCL default
Is it OK to Gradient Blank at this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

to be subject to gradient blanking in steep regions.
If no value is specified for BLANK1, the gradient blanking
parameter determined by BLNKRATE controls whether that
contour is allowed to undergo gradient blanking.
BLANK1
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Perform gradient blanking on the exception contour.

= Do not perform gradient blanking on the exception contour.
C*4
ZCL default
2nd Contour Level to be Modified

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Contour exception level specifying either a new contour level or

re-specified.
ELEVEL2
R
ZCL default
484
Landmark
Bold this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

remains unchanged.
BOLD2
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default
Dash this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

remains unchanged.
DASH2
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default

Description
Description
Options

remains unchanged.
HACH2
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
ZCL default
485
Landmark
Label this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

LABEL2
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

(ELEVEL2).
LCOLOR2
I
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
specified by ELEVEL2. This is the second of a list describing up to
five level fill colors.
FNEWCL2
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
ZCL default
486
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

to be subject to gradient blanking in steep regions. If no value is
specified for BLANK2, the gradient blanking parameter determined
by BLNKRATE controls whether that contour is subject to gradient
blanking.
BLANK2
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default
3rd Contour Level to be Modified

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

re-specified.
ELEVEL3
R
ZCL default
Bold this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

remains unchanged.
BOLD3
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
ZCL default
487
Landmark
Dash this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

remains unchanged.
DASH3
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default

Description
Description
Options

remains unchanged.
HACH3
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default
Label this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

LABEL3
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
ZCL default
488
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

(ELEVEL3).
LCOLOR3
I
0 through 255
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
specified by ELEVEL3. This is the third of a list describing up to
FNEWCL3
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

blanking.
BLANK3
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
ZCL default
489
Landmark
4th Contour Level to be Modified

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

re-specified.
ELEVEL4
R
ZCL default
Bold this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

remains unchanged.
BOLD4
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

= Do not bold the exception contour as a solid line.
C*4
ZCL default
Dash this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

remains unchanged.
DASH4
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
ZCL default
490
Landmark

Description
Description
Options

remains unchanged.
HACH4
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default
Label this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

LABEL4
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

(ELEVEL4).
LCOLOR4
I
ZCL default
491
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
specified by ELEVEL4. This is the fourth of a list describing up to
FNEWCL4
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

blanking.
BLANK4
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default
5th Contour Level to be Modified

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

re-specified.
ELEVEL5
R
ZCL default
492
Landmark
Bold this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

remains unchanged.
BOLD5
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default
Dash this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

remains unchanged.
DASH5
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Draw the exception contour as a dashed line.

C*4
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

remains unchanged.
HACH5
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
ZCL default
493
Landmark
Label this Contour

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

LABEL5
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

(ELEVEL5).
LCOLOR5
I
0

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
specified by ELEVEL5. This is the fifth of a list describing up to
FNEWCL5
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

C*4
ZCL default
494
Landmark

Description
Macro Parameter
Options

blanking.
BLANK5
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value

C*4
ZCL default
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR NEW
R2003.12.0
495
Landmark
QUALITY
Macro Name
QUALITY
Menu Option
Macros Operations Quality Assurance (Data, Grid)
Purpose
This macro performs quality assurance on a grid and a dataset.
Description
a grid
a data file to check against the grid
an optional fault file
minimum and maximum thresholds
You can use the QUALITY macro to:
Results
evaluate the quality of a dataset

evaluate how well a grid represents the original data
create a data file for plotting selected residuals to use as a guide in
interactive grid editing
The output report scrolls by in the processing window. This report

consists of:
the histogram
statistical data
Explanation of the Histogram. You are asked for a maximum

estimated residual for the histogram. The actual histogram contains 73
bins. Bins 1 and 73 contains residuals too small and too large,
respectively, to fit in the range covered by the other bins.
The histogram appears twice in the process window. First, it is
presented in a vertical format which lists the central value and the
actual number of residuals in each bin. The second histogram is
presented in a smaller, horizontal format, and is followed by statistical
data. While the first histogram may scroll by rather quickly (yet is
easily stored in a log file), this summary is small enough to fit within
the confines of the X Term window.
Examples of the output are on the following pages.
R2003.12.0
QUALITY
496
Landmark
QUALITY: Results (continued)
Bin Center Value
Relative Bin Population
-0.4800E+03 0
*
-0.4400E+03 0
*
-0.4000E+03 2
*
-0.3600E+03 0
*
-0.3200E+03 2
*
-0.2800E+03 7
*
-0.2400E+03 1
*
-0.2000E+03 11
*
-0.1600E+03 30
*
-0.1200E+03 106
*
-0.8000E+02 415
**
-0.4000E+02 3258
********
0.0000E+00 20455
***********************************************
0.4000E+02 2509
*******
0.8000E+02 181
*
0.1200E+03 44
*
0.1600E+03 15
*
0.2000E+03 6
*
0.2400E+03 9
*
0.2800E+03 5
*
0.3200E+03 3
*
0.3600E+03 6
*
0.4000E+03 1
*
0.4400E+03 0
*
0.5600E+03 1
*
0.6000E+03 0
*
0.6400E+03 0
*
0.6800E+03 1
*
0.7200E+03 0
*
0.7600E+03 1
*
0.8000E+03 1
*
0.8400E+03 1
*
0.8800E+03 1
*
0.9200E+03 1
*
0.9600E+03 1
*
Vertical Histogram
R2003.12.0
497
Landmark

:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:I.
. . .. ..... . .......III......... . . ...... .
-:
:
-1 : : : :
0 : : : :
1 ::+
-0.1000E+04
0.0
0.1000E+04
NUMBER OF RESIDUALS = 27106
ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE RESIDUAL = 104.4
MEAN RESIDUAL = -4.291
STANDARD DEVIATION = 104.3
MAXIMUM RESIDUAL = 1049. AT X = 0.175230E+07 Y = 0.230770E+08
MINIMUM RESIDUAL = -5396. AT X = 0.169560E+07 Y =
0.230630E+08
27106 RESIDUALS UNDER LOWER THRESHOLD.
0 RESIDUALS OVER UPPER THRESHOLD.
27106 "BAD" RESIDUALS SELECTED.
Horizontal Histogram
R2003.12.0
498
Landmark
QUALITY: Parameters

*Input Grid to Check
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
MFD for Input Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input file.

MFDGRID
I
0 through 5
*Data Set to Check Grid Against

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the data file to check against the grid.

DATAIN
C*24
No default
for Input Dataset
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
QUALITY: Parameters
499
Landmark
QUALITY: Parameters
Z Field of the Data to Check

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The z field used to calculate residuals based on the input grid.

INFLD
I
All Z Value fields in the input data file
ZCL default
Output Dataset For Residuals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Enter the name of the output data file for residuals.

DATAOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Output Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output data file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
Faults Used to Build the Input Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD

FAULTS
C*24
ZCL default
for the Faults
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
QUALITY: Parameters
500
Landmark
QUALITY: Parameters
Select Type of Output

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify criteria for producing residuals.

ERRANTRS
OMIT
THRESHOLDS
= Do not produce residual.

= Residual values fall outside the upper and lower
threshold range.
CONTOUR CROSSING = Residual is selected if the elevation interpolated
from the grid surface and the elevation
interpolated from the control point file are on
opposite sides of the plane defined by a contour
level.
EITHER
= Residual is selected using either the threshold or
contour crossing criteria.
BOTH
= Residual is selected only if it meets both the
threshold and contour crossing criteria.
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
THRESHOLDS
Output All or Only Selected Residuals

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify if all residuals are to be written to the output file. Used

when output data file DATA OUT is specified.
SELECT
ALL
= All residuals are output.
ONLY = Only selected errant residuals are output.
Data Type
Default Value
C*4
ALL
Maximum Residual
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Maximum residual for histogram.

MAXRESID
R
ZCL default based on input data
QUALITY: Parameters
501
Landmark
QUALITY: Parameters
Upper Threshold
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Upper threshold value. Used when ERRANTRS = THRESHOLDS,

EITHER, or BOTH.
THRESUPP
R
Lower Threshold
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Lower threshold value. Used when ERRANTRS =

THRESHOLDS, EITHER, or BOTH.
THRESLOW
R
Contour Interval
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The interval between contours. Used when ERRANTRS =

CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
CONINT
R
1.0

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Minimum contour level. Used when ERRANTRS =

CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
CONMIN
R
0.0
QUALITY: Parameters
502
Landmark
QUALITY: Parameters
Contour Fit Tolerance

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The equality tolerance is a threshold value which is applied to

either side of the contour plane. Points that lie inside this tolerance
are not considered to have crossed the contour plane. Used when
ERRANTRS = CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
TOLERANC
R
0.01
ZCL PROCESSES
QUALITY ASSURE
R2003.12.0
QUALITY: Parameters
503
Landmark
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS
Macro Name
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS
Menu Option
CARM Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons)
Purpose
This macro executes ZCLs QUICK VOLUMETRICS process, and

thus provides a quick, although not very accurate, estimate of the
volume between the surface represented by the input grid and the flat
surface with the constant z value specified by the baseplane parameter
(BASEPLAN). Volumes are calculated over a region specified by a
polygon or polygons on an input file specified by VERTICES. To
calculate volume, this process multiplies the area of the polygon by the
numeric average of the grid nodes within the polygon.
Description
a grid dataset
a vertex file containing polygons
scaling factors
Quick Volumetrics is More Approximate Than Precise
QUICK VOLUMETRICS is not very accurate because it uses the total area
of the polygon in its calculation rather than just that portion of the polygon
that corresponds to the grid above the baseplane. To help compensate for this
quick approach, node values that lie below the baseplane are replaced by
zero. These zero values are then used in the calculation of the numerical
average for the grid nodes above and below the baseplane.
This process trades off accuracy for speed. You can increase accuracy
by:
Results
R2003.12.0
refining your grid to a smaller cell size

making your evaluation polygons hug the non-ZNON edges of the
grid being evaluated, e.g. OWC
incorporating a shape factor in the scale factor specified in the
macro to account for unusual geometric shapes defined by your
surfaces
Volumetrics printouts for each polygon/grid combination.
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS
504
Landmark
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS: Parameters

*Name of the Input Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
MFD for the Grid to be Integrated

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input grid.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Name of the Polygon Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
This file defines the area of integration. If not specified, the region
of integration is the entire area of interest of the grid.
VERTICES
C*24
ZCL default
for the Input Vertex File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the input vertex file.

MFDVERT
I
0 through 5
505
Landmark
The Area Scale Factor

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Area scale factor.

AREASCAL
R
1.0
The Volume Scale Factor

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

VOLMSCAL
R
1.0
The Base Plane Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Baseplane value, as in grid contour level. All integration takes place

above this value on the grid. Defines positive volumes, i.e., above
the base plane level.
BASEPLAN
R
0.0
How Are the Polygons to be Used

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify how the polygons in the vertex file are to be used in the
integration task.
SELECT
= All polygons on the vertex file are used to calculate and report
on volumes for each polygon.
ONLY
= User may specify up to 2 polygon I.D.s to be used to calculate
volumes within. Results and ZCL and/or to data blocks in ZCL.
EXCEPT = User may specify up to 2 polygon I.D.s to be ignored. All other
polygons are analyzed for Volumetric results and reported to the
screen in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL or to data blocks in ZCL.
ALL
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*8
ALL
506
Landmark
First Polygon ID to Analyze

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the first of up to 2 polygon Segment I.D.s.

POLYIDS
R
ZCL default
Second Polygon ID to Analyze

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the second of up to 2 polygon Segment I.D.s.

POLYID02
R
ZCL default
ZCL PROCESSES
QUICK VOLUMETRICS
R2003.12.0
507
Landmark
QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL
Macro Name
QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL
Menu Option
CARM Volumetrics (40 Polygons)
Purpose
This macro executes the ZCL QUICK VOLUMETRICS process, and

thus provides a quick, although not very accurate, estimate of the
volume between the surface represented by the input grid and the flat
surface with the constant z value specified by the baseplane parameter
(BASEPLAN). Volumes are calculated within a polygon or polygons
on an input file specified by VERTICES. To calculate volume, this
process multiplies the area of the polygon by the numeric average of
the grid nodes within the polygon.
Description
a grid dataset
a vertex file containing polygons
scaling factors
baseplane elevation
Quick Volumetrics is More Approximate Than Precise
QUICK VOLUMETRICS is not very accurate because it uses the total area
of the polygon in its calculation rather than just that portion of the polygon
that corresponds to the grid above the baseplane. To help compensate for this
quick approach, node values that lie below the baseplane are replaced by
zero. These zero values are then used in the calculation of the numerical
average for the grid nodes above and below the baseplane.
This process trades off accuracy for speed; however, increased accuracy
can be achieved by:
Results
R2003.12.0
refining your grid to a smaller cell size
making your evaluation polygons hug the non-ZNON edges of the

grid being evaluated, e.g., OWC
incorporating a shape factor in the scale factor specified in the

macro to account for unusual geometric shapes defined by your
surfaces
Volumetrics printouts for each polygon/grid combination.
QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL
508
Landmark
QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL: Parameters

*Name of the Input Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
MFD for the Grid to be Integrated

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input grid.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Name of the Polygon Vertex File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
This file defines the area of integration. If not specified, the region
of integration is the entire area of interest of the grid.
VERTICES
C*24
ZCL default
for the Vertex File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the input vertex file.

MFDVERT
I
0 through 5
509
Landmark
The Area Scale Factor

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Area scale factor.

AREASCAL
R
1.0
The Volume Scale Factor

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

VOLMSCAL
R
1.0
The Base Plane Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Base plane value.

BASEPLAN
R
0.0
How Are the Polygons to Be Used

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify which polygons in the vertex file are used in the integration
task.
SELECT
ALL
= All polygons on the vertex file are used to calculate and report on
volumes for each polygon.
ONLY
= User may specify up to 40 polygon I.D.s to be used to calculate
volumes within. Results and ZCL and/or to data blocks in ZCL.
EXCEPT = User may specify up to 40 polygon I.D.s to be ignored. All other
polygons is analyzed for Volumetric results and reported to the
screen in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL or to data blocks in ZCL.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*8
ALL
510
Landmark
1st Polygon Segment I.D.

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the first of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.

POLYIDS
R
ZCL default
2nd Polygon Segment I.D.

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the second of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.

POLYID02
R
ZCL default
3rd Polygon Segment I.D.

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the third of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.

POLYID03
R
ZCL default
4th Polygon Segment I.D.

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the fourth of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.

POLYID04
R
ZCL default
... (Each parameter name is incremented by 1 until you reach 40.)

40th Polygon Segment I.D.
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the fortieth of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.

POLYID40
R
ZCL default
ZCL PROCESSES
QUICK VOLUMETRICS
R2003.12.0
511
Landmark
REDUCE-POSTING
Macro Name
REDUCE-POSTING
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Reduce Text Posting
Purpose
This macro reduces posting of a text field in an area based on a key field
such as OPERATOR NAME or LEASE I.D.
If all wells in the area have the same value for the key field, it is posted
only once (at the first well) and not posted for the remainder of the
wells in the area.
Description
a data file
up to three key fields on which to thin the data
name of the output well file and MFD
names of the first (second, and third) new fields
Sort File First for Field Blanking
Files also have to be sorted in order of field choice for field blanking
R2003.12.0
REDUCE-POSTING
512
Landmark
REDUCE-POSTING: Results
Results
A text field, such as OPERATOR NAME, is only posted at the first

well, if all entries to this field have the same value. For example:
LEASE
FOX OIL
LEASE 1
HOGG OIL
LEASE 2
FOX OIL
WOOD OIL
FOX OIL
WOOD OIL
OPERATOR
LEASE 1
LEASE 1
LEASE 1
LEASE 1
LEASE 1
LEASE 1
FOX OIL
LEASE 2
LEASE 2
LEASE 2
LEASE 2
LEASE 2
LEASE 2
HOGGOIL
FOX OIL
WOOD OIL
FOX OIL
WOOD OIL
FOX OIL
FOX OIL
Lease 1 represents a single operator and

Lease 2 represents multiple operators.
One operator name is output for

Lease 1, while all names are
output for Lease 2.
Single Operator Lease Vs. Multiple Operator Lease

*Select the Input Well File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input well file.

DATAIN
C*24
No default
for the Input File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the input well file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
REDUCE-POSTING: Results
513
Landmark
REDUCE-POSTING: Parameters
*Select a Key Field on Which to Thin

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
First of three fields to thin. This is normally the lease I.D. field, and
must be the primary sort field for the input dataset.
FIELD1
C*20
NEWFLD 1
Select a Second Key Field on which to Thin

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Second of three fields to be thinned for posting. This must be the

secondary sort field for the input dataset.
FIELD2
C*20
NEWFLD 2
Select a Third Key Field on which to Thin

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Third of three fields to be thinned for posting.

FIELD3
I
NEWFLD 3
Enter the Name of the Output Well File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

DATAOUT
C*24
REDUCED LABELS

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD to use for storing the output well file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
514
Landmark
Select the Name for the First New Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the first output field. Field type is the same as FIELD1.
FLDNAME1
C*20
ZCL default
Select the Name for the Second New Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the second output field. Field type is the same as FIELD2.
FLDNAME2
C*20
ZCL default
Select the Name for the Third New Field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the third output field Field type is the same as FIELD3.
FLDNAME3
C*20
ZCL default
ZCL PROCESSES
THIN TEXT FIELDS
R2003.12.0
515
Landmark
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID
Macro Name
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID
Menu Option
Macros Operations Resample with AOI from Grid
Purpose
This macro resamples a grid using a control grid as a source of output

grid parameters Xmin, Xmax, Xinc, Ymin, Ymax, Yinc, Ncols, and
Nrows.
Description
Results
name of the input grid file to resample and the MFD that contains
it
name of the (optional) input fault file and the MFD that contains it
name of the input grid file to control AOI definition and the MFD
that contains it
Output is a grid which matches the surface defined by the first input
grid and fault file, with grid AOI and increments from the second input
grid file.

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input grid file to define resampled surface.

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
for Input Grid File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID
516
Landmark
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID: Parameters
*Select Input Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the optional input fault file to define resampled surface.

FAULTS
C*24
None -- Use no fault file
MFD for Input Fault File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
*Select Input Grid File to Control AOI

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input grid file to define output grid AOI and
increments.
AOIGRID
C*24
No default
MFD for Input Grid File to Control AOI

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the input grid file to define output grid AOI.
AOIGRMFD
I
0 through 5
517
Landmark
*Name of Output Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
oMFD

GRIDOUT
C*24
for Input Grid File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the output grid file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
1 First attached MFD.
ZCL PROCESSES
RESAMPLEGRID
R2003.12.0
518
Landmark
RMLOCK
Macro Name
RMLOCK
Menu Option
Purpose
This macro is only for use during product demonstrations.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
RMLOCK
519
Landmark
SHADE-POLYGONS
Macro Name
SHADE-POLYGONS
Menu Option
Features Polygons Shaded Polygons
Purpose
This macro fills a set of polygons with hachured lines. You can use this
macro to hachure shade fault polygons that have been converted to a
vertex file.You can display fault polygons shaded with this option as
rendered features on a surface in the Z-3D Surfaces and Z-3D Block
applications.
Before executing this macro, you must open a picture. The shaded
polygon feature is added to the current picture. The Edit
Graphics Editor Delete Last Feature option is not functional with
macro additions to pictures.
.
Background Polygon Added Automatically

This macro automatically adds a polygon filled with the background color
behind the shaded polygon. This polygon cannot be removed with Edit menu
options.
Description
As input, you are asked to specify a vertex file containing polygons.

Data fields required by the macro include:
X (EASTING)
Y (NORTHING)
SEG I.D.
A color index field for the hachured line is optional.
Results
R2003.12.0
type of hachured line to draw

hachured line color
polygon outline color
source of hachure line color (value or color field)
Hachured polygons in the current picture. Redisplay the picture to see

the results of this macro.
SHADE-POLYGONS
520
Landmark
SHADE-POLYGONS: Parameters

*Input File for the Polygons to Shade
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input file.

POLYGONS
C*24
No default
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the input polygon file.

MFDPOLYS
I
0 through 5
*X-field in Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The x field on the polygon file.

X
I
No default
*Y-field in Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The y field on the polygon file.

Y
I
No default
*Segment I.D. Field in Polygon File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Segment I.D. field on the polygon file.

SEGID
I
No default
521
Landmark
Shading Color Field in Polygon File (Optional)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Color field on the polygon file.

COLOR
R
ZCL default
Type of Hachuring
Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify the type of hachure shading to put within the polygons.

HACH
NW-SW HACHURED LINES = 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
lease, no colorfill
SW-NE HACHURED LINES = 45 degrees down to right, lines across entire
lease, no colorfill
CROSS HACHURED LINES = 45 degrees up and down to right lines
across entire lease, no colorfill
Data Type
Default Value
C*20
Cross Hachured Lines
Source of Color Indices for Hachured Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Indicate whether the color for hachured lines is to be determined by

the color field in the vertex file or by a specified color index
number.
CLRSRCE
COLOR FIELD = Use the color field on the input polygons.
COLOR VALUE = Use the color index number provided in the Color Index
for Hachured Lines prompt.
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
COLOR VALUE
Color Index for Hachured Lines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color index from the currently active color table. It controls the
color of hachure lines.
COLORID
I
0 through 255
20
522
Landmark
Color Index for Polygon Outlines

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Polygon line color value.

LNCOLOR
I
0 through 255
21
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE
BRANCH
FILE UTILITY
SPAWN
EXPORT
IMPORT
DATA BLOCK
FILE CONVERSION
LOOP
DATA BLOCK
POST LEASE
LOOP END
R2003.12.0
523
Landmark
SPAWN-PROCESS
Macro Name
SPAWN-PROCESS
Menu Option
Tools Spawn UNIX Process
Purpose
This macro spawns a process to allow another program or system

command to run within Z-MAP Plus. Any Unix executable can be
invoked by SPAWN-PROCESS. For example, awk or nawk edit
programs can be used to reformat files interactively or to create files for
export/import during macro execution.
You can use SPAWN-PROCESS to write data import format statements
on a disk file with the echo system command. Use the spawn process
again to delete them.
Anytime Z-MAP Plus exits without your permission, it locks your
MFDs. One of the first macros that you write should be to spawn and
remove lock files (.LCK, .lck) from the directory where the MFDs are
stored.
Z-MAP Plus waits for the command to finish before continuing, unless
it is invoked in the background.
Description
Enter a system command. On a Unix system, the command could be

ls, cd, rm, mv, or ls - l, for example.
Results
The command is executed, results are written to the Z-MAP xterm

window, then control returns to Z-MAP Plus.
Results Written to Z-MAPPLUS Xterm Window
Results from this macro appear in the ZMAPPLUS xterm window. This window
is the first one to appear when you start Z-MAP Plus, and it is automatically
iconized. The xterm window is not the same as the Z-MAP Plus System Window,
which is used for displaying most messages.
R2003.12.0
SPAWN-PROCESS
524
Landmark
SPAWN-PROCESS: Parameters

Enter the Command to Process
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Enter a system command.

COMMAND
C*80
echo "xterm -sb -sl 400 &">zpterm;chmod a+x
zpterm;zpterm"
This brings up a new terminal window. There is a space (not a new

line) between a+x and zpterm.
ZCL PROCESSES
SPAWN
R2003.12.0
SPAWN-PROCESS: Parameters
525
Landmark
SPECIFY-CONTOURS
Macro Name
SPECIFY-CONTOURS
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Color-filled Contour Intervals
Purpose
This macro allows you to input special contour levels such as the OWC
(oil-water contact) or GOC (gas-oil contact) that do not fall on even
increment levels. You are asked to input up to eight levels to be
contoured. If desired, colorfill can be generated between the special
contours. When generating colorfill contours, you control whether or
not to overlay the contour lines onto the colorfill.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
GRID file for contouring

optional fault (FALT) file
number of special contours (up to eight)
value of each contour
contour type and labeling parameters
colorfill control information
Contours of the special levels are added to the picture. You can colorfill
these contours if you wish.
SPECIFY-CONTOURS
526
Landmark
SPECIFY-CONTOURS: Parameters

*Input the Grid to Contour
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
for Input File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Input the Fault File (if any)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

AUXFILE
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Faults

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the input profile file.

MFDAUX
I
0 through 5
527
Landmark
Number of Special Contours (1-8)

Description
Number of special contour levels. Up to eight contours starting with

parameter CON1 can be specified.
Colorfilling Above the Highest Special Contour Level
When FILL = COLORFILLED and NCONTOUR = the number of special
contours, the area above the highest contour is not color filled. To colorfill
above the highest special contour level, set NCONTOUR = the number of
special contours + 1. Colorfilling below the lowest contour is automatic.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
NCONTOUR
I
1 through 8
1
First Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
First of up to eight special contour levels.

CON1
R
0.10000E+31
Second Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Second of up to eight special contour levels.

CON2
R
0.10000E+31
Third Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Third of up to eight special contour levels.

CON3
R
0.10000E+31
528
Landmark
Fourth Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Fourth of up to eight special contour levels.

CON4
R
0.10000E+31
Fifth Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Fifth of up to eight special contour levels.

CON5
R
0.10000E+31
Sixth Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Sixth of up to eight special contour levels.

CON6
R
0.10000E+31
Seventh Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Seventh of up to eight special contour levels.

CON7
R
0.10000E+31
Eighth Contour Value

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Eighth of up to eight special contour levels.

CON8
R
0.10000E+31
Contour Label Size

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Label size for contours being generated, in plotter units (in or cm).
LABELS
R
0.1 in or 0.25 cm
529
Landmark
Number of Digits Right-of-Decimal

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Number of decimal places in label.

DECIMAL
I
0
Rate to Label Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value

sixth contour; etc.
LABELS
I
1
Rate for Bold (Reference) Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Rate for drawing bold line contours. A value of 5 means to draw

every fifth contour bold.
BOLD
I
0
Rate for Hachured Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Rate for drawing hachured line contours. A value of 5 means to

draw every 5th line hachured.
HACH
I
0
Rate for Dashed Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Rate for drawing dashed line contours. A value of N means to draw

every Nth line hachured.
DASH
I
0
530
Landmark
Colorfill the Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether to colorfill the area between contours.

FILL
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
NO COLORFILL
Overlay Contours on Colorfill

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether or not to draw the contours over the colorfill. This
parameter is only active is FILL = COLORFILLED.
OVERLAY
OVERLAY
= Overlay contours on colorfill.
NO OVERLAY = Do not colorfill the contours.
Data Type
Default:
C*12
OVERLAY
Line Color for Contours

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Initial color index used to display contours.

COLOR
I
0 through 255
3
531
Landmark
Starting Color Index for Colorfill

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The color of this index number (FILLCOLR) is used for the areas
with values below the lowest contour level. The color of the next
higher index number (FILLCOLR+1) is used for the area between
the lowest contour and the next higher contour. This continues
through the area with values up to the highest contour level, which
is assigned the color of index number FILLCOLR + the number of
contour levels 1.
If you desire to colorfill above the highest contour level, assign the
NCONTOUR parameter by the real number of specified contours
+1. This results in the index value for the level above the highest
contour being filled with FILLCLR + the number of contour levels.
STARTCLR
I
0 through 255
56
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR
R2003.12.0
532
Landmark
START
Macro Name
START
Menu Option
Purpose
This macro is only for use during product demonstrations.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
START
533
Landmark
STRATATHICKNESS
Macro Name
STRATATHICKNESS
Menu Option
Macros Operations Stratgraphic Thickness
Purpose
This macro computes stratigraphic thickness for an interval defined by

top and base grids, using the DIP MAG, ATAN, and COS operations
found in Single Grid Operations and the SUBTRACT and MULTIPLY
operations found in Dual Grid Operations. The bedding dip is estimated
from the dip of the top surface only. All temporary grids that are stored
on the scratch file are deleted at the end of the macro session.
Description
Typically, TVD data is used to derive vertical thickness information at

wells (isochore data) that we use to produce isochore grids. However,
in areas of high structural deformation, it is more helpful to see the
isopach representation of a formation. Making this isochore to isopach
conversion is not practical for large or irregular areas. However, using
the STRATATHICKNESS macro, an isochore grid (map) can be
converted to an isopach grid (map). You must input:
Results
R2003.12.0
a top grid
a base grid
name of the output thickness grid
MFD for the output thickness grid
Creates a stratigraphic thickness grid.
STRATATHICKNESS
534
Landmark
STRATATHICKNESS: Technical Notes
Technical Notes
The terms isopach and isochore are frequently used interchangeably
meaning thickness of a geologic strata. However, these two words have
distinct geologic meanings. Isochore refers to vertical thickness of one
or more strata, possibly the thickness of a formation, while isopach
refers to the stratigraphic thickness of the same unit. Even when these
terms are used to refer to thickness of the same unit, the isopach is
always less than or equal to the isochore. Thickness maps based on
either term are isopach maps or isochore maps.
Typically, most well data contains unit tops and these are subtracted to
give isochores, not isopachs. Isochore thicknesses (vertical thickness)
for conformally bedded units are related to isopach thicknesses
(stratigraphic thickness) by the cosine of the dip of the bedding planes.
Top Formation
V
Bottom Formation
Example of Strata Displayed in Cross-Sectional Form
R2003.12.0
535
Landmark
Technical Approach
If strata are displayed in cross-sectional form, as illustrated in the
preceding figure, you can see that the vertical thickness (V) and
stratigraphic thickness (S) are related by S = V cos ( ) where is the
slope (dip of the top of the strata). This relationship takes a few liberties
with trigonometry and geologyin that it assumes that a right angle
triangle can be formed by the vertical thickness line (V), the
stratigraphic thickness line (S), and the base of the unit. Over short
horizontal distances it is probably reasonable to assume that the base of
the unit is a dipping plane.
On a cross section, the dip is one-dimensional. That is, you cannot see
how it varies in x and y, but only along the baseline of the section. On a
surface, the dip is in the direction of the gradient vector, a mathematical
term for an arrow drawn in the direction of most rapid change. The
vector is always perpendicular (normal) to contours. If the angle of the
dip vector (measured counterclockwise from East) is called , then the
maximum slope is computed byn = z x cos ( ) + z y sin ( )
where z x and z y are the partials of the unit top for x and y
respectively. This is the derivative (slope) of the surface in the direction
( ) of the normal vector. The declination angle can be computed for
the slope using = arc tan ( dz dn ) ,and finally, the stratigraphic
thickness can be computed using the first equation for S.
R2003.12.0
536
Landmark
STRATATHICKNESS: Parameters

*Top Grid for the Interval
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default:
oMFD
Name of the input top grid file.

TOP
C*24
No default
for the Top Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the top grid.

MFDIN1
I
0 through 5
*Base Grid for the Interval

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default:
Name of the input base grid file.

BASE
C*24
No default
MFD for the Top Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the base grid.

MFDIN2
I
0 through 5
Stratigraphic Thickness Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default:
R2003.12.0

ISOPACH
C*24
STRATIGRAPHIC THICKNESS
537
Landmark
Number of the MFD to Contain Thickness Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the thickness grid.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
SINGLE GRID OPS
DUAL GRID OPS
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0
538
Landmark
SURFCORRECT
Macro Name
SURFCORRECT
Menu Option
CARM Surface Correction
Purpose
SURFCORRECT offers a way of correcting a surface or of

conformably merging a surface with a set of new well picks. Using
residual correction techniques, SURFCORRECT ties a grid to new well
data. SURFCORRECT outputs a corrected grid and optional quality
control data files.
Description
You can restrict the area of the surface to be modified by the new well
data using one of four modes:
Results
R2003.12.0
Use default gridding to distribute the change in the surface over the
entire area (MMETHOD = DEFAULT GRIDDING).
Specify a radius of influence around the selected well data
(MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA + RADIUS).
Use one or more closed polygons to specify where you want to
change the surface grid (MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA +
POLYGON).
Use a correction grid that you build independently of the macros
execution (MMETHOD = INPUT GRID).
The primary output of this macro is a new grid that shows how the new
wells affect the surface. Optional output includes quality control data
files that you can save to an MFD of your choice. SURFCORRECT
also creates maps and cross sections of its results.
SURFCORRECT
539
Landmark
SURFCORRECT: Summary
Summary
Surface Correct (SURFCORRECT) offers a way of correcting a surface
or comfortably merging a surface with a set of new well picks. It adds
to Z-MAP Plus, which has historically had two main uses: creating
quality base maps and assessing hydrocarbon in place using the
Volumetrics application tools.You should be well versed in the use of
Z-MAP Plus to get the most out of this macro.
SURCORRECT could be applied very successfully in several typical
scenarios, including:
Production Geology
Basin Studies
Stratigraphic Reservoir Framework Building
Production Geology
You have an offshore field with 12 producing wells in the top pay. You
model the top pay using the LANDMARK seismic and surface
modeling interpretation environment. Next, you drill a thirteenth well,
targeting the down side of a fault block that is defined seismically. The
thirteenth well comes in high to prediction. You now want to
time-merge this new top pick into the existing grid model that covers
the twelve producing wells.
You can use the following inputs with the SURFCORRECT macro:
The original seismic grid of the 12 producing wells

A data file that contains the new top pick(s) where the fields are x,
y, z, and well name
The old fault file
In addition, use either
R2003.12.0
A polygon built on the outline of the fault

A pre-determined radius of influence that will define the area of
structural change around the new well data
540
Landmark
Basin Studies
You built a regional average velocity grid using 230 wells with
multi-shot data in an offshore basin. The grid represents average time to
the base Jurassic seismic marker. When you built the surface model, all
the wells tied to the grid acceptably. You have a request to update the
original Jurassic average velocity grid with 10 new wells drilled during
the last two years. You are expected to update the velocity grid quickly.
The project geophysicist supplies you with a data file that has the same
well population, but the average velocity picks are on the base Triassic
marker. The geophysicist tells you that the form of the velocity grid for
the Triassic should mimic the contour form of the Jurassic grid and tie
the new well values.
The solution to both problems is a straightforward application of the
SURFCORRECT macro.
Tie the Jurassic velocity grid using the SYNTHESIZED DATA +

RADIUS mode.
Build the new Triassic grid using the DEFAULT GRIDDING
mode.
These two modes are further explained later in this document.

Stratigraphic/Reservoir Framework Building
Reservoirs that are defined using seismic grids usually have certain
limitations. Typically, a reservoir is defined by seismic grids for the
structure of the top sealing horizon only. Much of the internal geometry
could all happen in the two-way time thickness of a single wavelet
response on a seismic section.
When the reservoir contains conformable geometry, you can use
isochore techniques to define horizons beneath the top sealing horizon.
Using cross-contouring methods, you can isopach/isochore up or down
these surfaces, defining horizons based on each isopach unit. The
isopachs/isochores are built using well picks for the appropriate rock/
stratigraphic tops. These new surfaces derive their structural form from
a datum unit that is already structurally mapped.
R2003.12.0
541
Landmark
You can use the SURFCORRECT macro to automate the isopach/

isochore horizon building process in several ways. For example, you
can perform these actions:
Apply the macro in default gridding mode, using bias to derive the
isochore trends interpreted in the different isopach units.
Use either the SYNTHESIZED DATA + RADIUS mode or the

SYNTHESIZED DATA + POLYGON mode.
Another good workflow for this type of problem follows:
R2003.12.0
Build the basic isochore correction grid by using the

SURFCORRECT macro.
Use the Edit/Create Data task in Z-MAP Plus to alter the isochore
correction grid to suit the interpretation.
Use the edited isochore correction grid as input for the

SURFCORRECT macro. Use the INPUT GRID mode to obtain
the automated graphic output displays.
542
Landmark
Understanding the SURFCORRECT Macro

Some of the parameters in the SURFCORRECT macro are previewed
below.
Method of Macro Application (MMETHOD)
There are four methods, or modes, for correcting the surface. You can
choose the one that best suits your needs. The four methods are
described below.
Default Gridding
This method distributes the residual correction over the entire AOI of
the input grid. The residuals are calculated between the input grid and
the input data points, and the default, Point Gridding Plus gridding,
method is performed. The AOI and final grid increments of the residual
grid are extracted from the input grid. However, you can still assign
values for the gridding parameters reach, number of refinements, bias
direction, and bias magnitude.
The grid Zmin Zmax deltaZ is +/- 10% if the data-calculated deltaZ of
the wells back interpolated on the input grid.
Synthesized Data + Radius
This method uses the radius of influence that you supply to limit
change in structural form to an area represented by the union of all
circumference circles around the well population. To achieve the
desired limits, the method applies distance gridding on the well
locations. To prevent changes outside the radius that you specify, this
mode assigns a default value of 0.0 to synthesized data that lie outside
the radius of influence.
R2003.12.0
543
Landmark
SURFCORRECT: Summary:
Synthesized Data + Polygon

With this mode, instead of the radius of influence defining the area of
change, a single polygon or a set of user-defined closed polygons in a
vertex file delimits areas of alteration. All of the capabilities of
synthesized data + radius method are true for this application as well.
This mode is useful in handling changes within fault blocks. You can
combine the optional faults used in gridding residuals XFL2 with a bias
technique to control surface alteration near faults. You can use the
optional faults and bias technique to perform surface correction on
either the up-thrown or down-thrown faults.
Synthesized Data + Radius and Synthesized Data + Polygon
You can control the value and density of the synthesized residual data by
assigning a constant value for the synthesized residual data, or you can allow
SURFCORRECT to query the residuals calculated against the input grid. When
using the latter method of assigning value to the synthesized residuals,
SURFCORRECT assigns the average residual. Both synthesis modes
(synthesized data + radius and synthesized data + polygon) allow these methods
of determining the value of synthesized residual data.
The macro can derive conformable surfaces, with a predetermined datum shift
outside the restricted areas of change. The data density is controlled by
specifying a GRID INTERVAL parameter for the SYNTHESIZED PSEUDO DZ
DATA.
Also of interest is that you can invoke bias gridding in default gridding and the
two synthesized data modes. However, be sure to set the number of refines=0, or
the bias effect will be obliterated by filter passes.
Input Grid
This mode uses a residual grid that you build independently of
SURFCORRECT. When you select MMETHOD = Input Grid, the
macro skips all gridding steps and just adds a user-supplied residual
grid to the input control grid. SURFCORRECT performs the data
preparation steps for calculating the residuals against the control grid.
You should use the input grid mode if your main interest is in the
automated graphic output capabilities of the macro.
The user is responsible for the quality of the supplied residual grid.
R2003.12.0
SURFCORRECT: Summary:
544
Landmark
Quality Control Data File (OPRSDAT)

The quality control (QC) data file contains the original x, y, z, and
WELLID fields that you selected from the input data. In addition, it
contains FIELD5 through FIELD10. These fields are described below.
FIELD5: CONTROL TOP. This field contains the

back-interpolated z values at locations of input data file points on
the input grid.
FIELD6: DELTA Z. This field contains the isochore values

calculated between the new well picks z value and the CONTROL
TOP (FIELD5). This field is gridded in default gridding mode; it is
also merged with the synthesized data for residual gridding in
synthesized data + radius and synthesized data + polygon modes.
FIELD7: B.I.-GRIDOUT. This field contains the back-interpolated

values at the new well locations of the final output grid. These
values should match those of the z value (FIELD3).
FIELD8: B.I.-DELTAZGRID. This field contains the

back-interpolated values at the new well locations of the newly
created or user-supplied residual correction grid. These values
should duplicate those of FIELD6.
FIELD9: RESIDUAL GRIDOUT. This field contains the real new

z values at the well locations minus the final output grids values at
these locations (i.e., z value or FIELD3 FIELD7 ).The records in this
field should ideally all be 0.0 (zero value).
FIELD10: RESIDUAL DELTAZGRID. This field contains the

Real delta Z minus gridded delta Z, or FIELD6 FIELD8 . The records
in this field should ideally all be zero. If the records are not zero
values, then the RESIDUAL GRID cannot honor the residual data.
If the value for the grid interval that is preset by XGRD1 is too
coarse, it could cause nonzero values in the records for FIELD10.
The solution is to resample the input grid.
If you save this data set on a permanent MFD you can document the
quality of the fit to the data of the new surface model.
R2003.12.0
545
Landmark
SURFCORRECT: Parameters

*Data file with new surface picks (x, y, z, ID)
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the name of the input well data file containing the minimal
fields: x, y, z, and wellid. It must be on an MFD attached to
Z-MAP Plus or in the current ZCL runstream. The data is the new
well picks that the surface should tie to.
MWELLD
C*24
No default
MFD for New Surface Picks

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
MFD that contains the input file MWELLD.

MFDINF
I
0
*Input X-FIELD from data file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the field in the data file MWELLD that contains the x
coordinates for the well data points being used.
INFLA
I
No default
*Input Y-FIELD from data file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
R2003.12.0
This is the field in the data file MWELLD that contains the y
coordinates for the well data points being used.
INFLB
I
No default
546
Landmark
Input Z-FIELD from data file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
This is the field in the data file MWELLD that contains the z values
for use by SURFCORRECT in altering the input grid.
INFLC
I
No default
Input WELL NAME field from data file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
This is the field in the data file MWELLD that contains a well
identifier, such as well name. The well identifier is needed for
map posting and must be specified. However, it can be any field in
the data set MWELLD.
INFLD
I
No default
Input GRID to be corrected

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the name of the grid to be modified by the macro. This grid
represents the surface that needs new wells incorporated into it.
XGRD1
C*24
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input grid file XGRD1.

MFDINA
I
0 through 5
1
FAULT FILE to use with operations & graphics

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
This is the name of the fault file used to build the input grid
XGRD1. If the surface grid for XGRD1 is unfaulted, no fault file is
required.
XFLT1
C*24
No default
547
Landmark
o

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
This is the MFD that contains the fault file XFLT1.

MFDINB
I
1
Optional Faults used for DeltaZ Gridding

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This fault file is optional. You use this file if you are gridding the
residuals using any of the following three modes
default gridding
synthesized data + radius
synthesized data + polygon
You can use Delta-Z gridding if you want to correct a fault block or
one side of a fault. If you want to integrate the isochore correction
into the wall of the fault, you need a separate fault file to control the
isochore gridding. This is so synthesized Delta-Z values across the
fault are not seen during isochore gridding.
XFLT2
C*24
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the fault file XFLT2.

MFDING
I
No default
548
Landmark
User input Delta Z grid (optional)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This grid is required only if you are using input grid mode. The
macro assumes that your Delta Z grid is a grid of residuals
associated with the input well data file MWELLD. In input grid
mode, you built the Delta Z grid outside of the SURFCORRECT
macro. When you use input grid mode, SURFCORRECT adds the
Delta Z grid to input grid XGRD1 and outputs the new grid, along
with any output graphics you request.
USERGRID
C*24
No default
MFD for User Input DeltaZ GRID

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
This is the MFD that contains the optional Delta-Z grid

USERGRID.
MFDINC
I
1
POLYGON file for defining area of change

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
oMFD
This polygon file is required only if you are using the synthesized
data + polygon method. It can contain multiple polygons, but they
all must be closed. The polygon file defines only the area or areas
where the structural form of the grid is to be modified by the new
data. Data that do not tie exactly with the input grid XGRD1
(outside these closed areas) produce bad results.
POLYGBL
C*24
No default
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
R2003.12.0
This is the MFD that contains the optional polygon file POLYGBL.
MFDIND
I
1
549
Landmark
Method of macro application

Description
Macro Parameter
You can select one of four modes for correcting the surface. The
modes are fully described in the introduction to SURFCORRECT.
Three of the modes (default gridding, synthesized data + radius,
and synthesized data + polygon) assume that SURFCORRECT is
building the grid on residuals and creating the new grid. These
modes differ in the way that they control where data-driven changes
are made to the new surface. The Point Gridding Plus algorithms
are used in all residual gridding applications.
The input grid mode skips all of the gridding steps and adds a user
supplied residual grid that corrects the input grid XGRD1.
MMETHOD
Options
DEFAULT GRIDDING
= Distributes the residual correction over the entire AOI of the input grid. The
residuals are calculated between the input grid and the input data points, and the
default Point Gridding Plus gridding method is performed. The AOI and final
grid increments of the residual grid are extracted from the input grid. However,
you can still assign values for the gridding parameters reach, number of
refinements, bias direction, and bias magnitude.
SYNTHESIZED
DATA+RADIUS
= Using the radius of influence that you supply, this method limits change in
structural form to an area represented by the union of all circumference circles
around the well population. To achieve the desired limits, the method applies
distance gridding on the well locations. To prevent changes outside the radius
that you specify, this mode assigns a default value of 0.0 to synthesized data
that lie outside the radius of influence.
SYNTHESIZED
DATA+POLYGON
= With this mode, instead of the radius of influence defining the area of change, a
single polygon or a set of user-defined closed polygons in a vertex file delimits
areas of alteration. All of the capabilities of synthesized data + radius are true
for this application as well. This mode is useful in handling changes within fault
blocks. You can combine the optional faults used in gridding residuals XFL2
with a bias technique to control surface alteration near faults. You can use the
optional faults and bias technique to perform surface correction on either the
up-thrown or down-thrown faults.
INPUT GRID
= This mode uses a residual grid that you build independently of

SURFCORRECT. When you select MMETHOD = INPUT GRID, the macro
skips all gridding steps and just adds a user supplied residual grid to the input
control grid. SURFCORRECT performs the data preparation steps for
calculating the residuals against the control grid.
You should use the INPUT GRID mode if your main interest is in the
automated graphic output capabilities of the macro.
The user is responsible for the quality of the supplied residual grid.
R2003.12.0
550
Landmark
SURFCORRECT
Data Type
Default Value
C*24
SYNTHESIZED DATA+RADIUS

(0-360) AZIMUTH for Bias Gridding DeltaZ
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
If you are using a bias in gridding residuals, this parameter controls

the direction of that bias. The default value, 0.0, is due north.
ASMITH
R (compass azimuth degrees)
0.0
STRENGTH of bias effect (1-4)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
When you use a bias in building the grid of the residuals, this
parameter controls bias strength. To capture the effect of bias
application in Point Gridding Plus, bias strength must be greater
than 1.0. Magnitude of bias direction typically has a value from 2.0
to 4.0. The higher the value, the more pronounced the observed
bias. When trying to arrive at a good value, think of a stress
ellipsoid over an elongated, closed structure. The ratio of minor
axis to major axis as a real number is the value entry for this
parameter. If you accept the default for STRENGTH it results in no
bias during grid initialization.
STRENGTH
R
1.0
Number of Refinements for DeltaZ gridding

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
When using residual gridding applications, such as with default

gridding and the two synthesized data modes, this parameter sets
the number of grid refinements to be used in Point Gridding Plus. If
using a bias strength greater than 1.0, set the number of refinements
to 0.0. Using more than 3.0 refinements in Point Gridding Plus is
not recommended for this workflow.
DEFRF
I
2
SURFCORRECT
551
Landmark
EXPAND DISTANCE used outside area

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This specifies the distance outside the input grid XGRD1 AOI that
the gridding algorithm should search for processed residual data
values. This parameter is useful if you are working on a pilot area
of a larger input grid, because it helps make the edges converge.
OUTSIDE
R (map units)
50
RADIUS OF INFLUENCE around wells

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
When you are gridding with synthesized data + radius, this

parameter assigns the value of the radius around the wells within
which the structural form of the input grid and contours should
change. The radius is specified in map units.
RWELL
R
350
REACH to be used in gridding steps

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
This is the REACH parameter used in all residual gridding steps.

On large grids with dense, synthesized data and possibly a small
influence radius, the reach does not need to be the default within the
macro.
GREACH
R (map units)
5000
GRID INTERVAL for Synthesized Data Method

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
This parameter controls the density at which synthesized residual

data points are generated in the two synthesized data modes. When
considering a good value for the synthesized data grid interval,
think of a gridding interval that would resolve the details of the
restriction limits you are supplying. These could be combined
circular boundaries around wells or polygons.
SYNGI
R (map units)
50.0
552
Landmark
METHOD for Synthesized Data Value Replacement

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
CONTECH is used with the two synthesized data modes. It gives

the macro the instruction either to obtain a user-specified value and
assign it to synthesized data locations or to calculate the average
residual from the input well data residuals and assign it to the
synthesized data locations. This average replacement value gives a
datum shift effect outside areas of defined change.
CONTECH
USE DATA STATS
INPUT VALUE
Data Type
Default Value
= Determine synthesized data locations by using

the average residual from the input well data
residuals.
= Determine synthesized data locations by using
the user-specified value.
C*16
INPUT VALUE
REPLACEMENT VALUE (optional)

Description
Data Type
Data Type
Default
DTZMEAN is the user specified value to assign to synthesized data

locations when using one of the two synthesized data modes. It is
used when INPUT VALUE is chosen for the CONTECH parameter.
The default is 0.0.
DTZMEAN
R
0.0
Save output grids and QCdata file

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
This parameter instructs the macro to save key output grids and a
quality control (QC) data file to your choice of attached MFDs. If
you respond NO, SURFCORRECT does not save copies of output
grids or data, even if pictures are produced.
MSAVE
NO
= Do not save copies of key output grids or data, even if pictures are
produced.
YES = Save copies of key output grids and a quality control data file.
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
C*4
NO
553
Landmark
Enter name for structure output grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the name of the final output structure grid. This grid is tied
to the new well data using one of the four macro application modes.
OPGRD
C*24
STRUCTURE-OUTPUT
MFD for Structure Output Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the MFD to contain the structure output grid.

MFDOUTA
I
0 (scratch)
Enter name for DeltaZ output grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the name of the FINAL OUTPUT RESIDUAL

CORRECTION GRID. This grid is the final product of gridding the
residuals between the input grid and the new well data. The DeltaZ
grid is added to the input grid XGRD1 to give the FINAL OUTPUT
STRUCTURE. Used when MSAVE = YES.
OPDZGRD
C*24
DELTAZ-OUTPUT
MFD for DeltaZ Output Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
This is the MFD to contain the Delta Z Output grid. It is used when
MSAVE = YES.
MFDOUTB
I
0 (scratch)
554
Landmark
Enter name for QC data file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
This is the name of the QC data file. This data file has the original x,
y, z and WELLID fields that you selected from the input data, plus
FIELD5 through FIELD10. It is used when MSAVE = YES. Saving
this data set on a permanent MFD documents the quality of the fit to
the data of the new surface model. For descriptions of the
accompanying FIELDS, see the SURFCORRECT macro
introduction.
OPRSDAT
C*24
QCDATA-OUTPUT
MFD for Output QC Data File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default
This is the MFD to contain the QC data file. Used when MSAVE =
YES.
MFDOUTC
I
0 (scratch)
Save the Well Merged Synthesized DZ Data

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Answering YES saves the merged real well data and the
synthesized data used to produce a residual isochore in all
application modes except input grid. You may want to save the data
so that you can use it later to build a grid of the residuals. (You can
do this interactively in Z-MAP Plus.) Once you have an output grid
from Z-MAP Plus, you can use SURFCORRECT and the input grid
mode to do a second SURFCORRECT iteration that produces the
graphic output.
XSDSAVE
C*4
NO
555
Landmark
Name for the Merged Synthesized DZ data

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
When you use XSDSAVE = YES, this parameter requests a file

name for the merged well data and synthesized data used to create
the residual correction grid.
NSDSAVE
C*24
DZDATA
MFD for Merged Synthesized DZ data

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
This specifies the MFD to which the merged well and synthesized
data are written. Used when XSDSAVE = YES.
MFDOUTD
I
ZCL PROCESSES
SURFACEPIC
R2003.12.0
556
Landmark
SURFACE-INTRSECT
Macro Name
SURFACE-INTRSECT
Menu Option
Macros Operations Surface Intersection Curve
Purpose
This macro takes two intersecting grids as input. The macro uses the
grids to produce the curve of their intersection in one of three forms:
as a FALT file
as a VERT file
as a DATA profile
When the output is a data profile, the process saves the z value from the
first input grid. The output files terminate appropriately if you supply a
FALT file used in building both input grids.
Optionally, you can add the vertex trace of the line of intersection to the
current picture. If you supply a FALT file, your faults can be added to
the picture as well.
By analyzing for bad residuals, you can highlight portions of the
resulting intersection curve that have different back interpolation
results from either grid. These residuals are obtained by a macro call of
the ZCL QUALITY ASSURE process on the data profile output. The
bad residuals calculated in QUALITY ASSURE can also be posted to
the current picture. If no upper and lower bounds are set for bad
residual analysis, the macro sets them at the STD of the residuals
encountered. The residual analysis can be useful when trying to
localize bad high and low wall fault traces that can result when working
with gridded fault planes and surfaces.
This macro is an upgrade of the SURFACE INTERSECT ZCL process.
This macro optionally allows you to incorporate the fault file that was
used to build the input (intersecting) grids, whereas the ZCL process
does not.
Description
You are asked to supply these specifications:
R2003.12.0
two grid files known to cross

input fault file used to build the two input grids (optional)
choice of output file types plus names and MFDs to write them to
line drawing information for the intersections posting on a
currently displayed picture
bad residuals limits and posting control information
SURFACE-INTRSECT
557
Landmark
SURFACE-INTRSECT: Results
Results
Surface Intersection produces:
requested VERT, FALT, and profile DATA files

as requested, the map projection of the line of intersection as a
POLYGON LINES LGB feature on the current picture
any faults described to the macro as a FAULT TRACES LGB, with
default color index and line weight from the ZCL CONTOUR
process
analysis of bad residuals encountered during calculation of the line
of intersection
option of posting bad residuals to the currently displayed picture
Scroll Up in the Process Window to See Quality Assure Output
You can view the bad residual analysis as output from the QUALITY ASSURE
ZCL process. Scroll up two pages in the processing window after normal
termination of the macro.
R2003.12.0
SURFACE-INTRSECT: Results
558
Landmark
SURFACE-INTRSECT: Parameters

* Name of the First Input Grid File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the first input grid file.

GRIDIN1
C*40
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the first input grid file.

GRIDIN1
I
0 through 5
* Name of the Second Input Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the second input grid file.

GRIDIN2
C*40
No default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD that contains the second input grid file.

MFDIN2
I
0 through 5
Name of the Fault File to Use (Optional)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the FALT file used to build the two input grids.
FAULTIN
C*40
ZCL default
559
Landmark
o

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDIN3
I
0 through 5
Type of Output Files

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
This parameter allows you to indicate what type of output files you
want to produce. The curve of the grid intersection can be output as
a vertex file, as a fault file, as a profile file, or all three types at once.
OUTFILES
.
VERTICES
FAULTS
PROFILES
ALL
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
VERTICES
Name of the Output Vertex Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output vertex file.

VERTICES
C*24
SI-VERTICES
MFD on which to Put the Vertices

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the output vertex file.

MFDVERT
I
0 through 5
1 first MFD
560
Landmark
Name of the Output Fault Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output fault file.

FAULTS
C*24
SI-FAULTS
MFD for the Faults

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD to use for saving the output vertex file.

MFDFALT
I
0 through 5
Name of the Output Profile Dataset

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output profile fault file.

PROFLS
C*24
SI-PROFILES
MFD for the Profiles

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for saving the output profile file.

MFDPROF
I
0 through 5
Name of the Z Field in Profile Data

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the profile data z field.

ZFLDN
C*20
PROFILE Z
561
Landmark
Add the Intersection/Profile Line to Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Determines whether the intersection line is posted on the current

picture.
ADDP
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Post the intersection line on the current picture.

= Do not post the intersection line on the current picture.
C*4
NO
Choose the Line Type

Description
Macro Parameter
Determines whether intersection line is drawn as a solid or dashed

line.
LTYP
Options
SOLID
SINGLE DASH
Data Type
Default Value
C*12
SOLID
Specify a Line Weight 18

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
When the intersection line is drawn to the current picture this is the
line weight to be used.
LWGH
I
1 through 8
2
Color Index to Use for the Intersection Line

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Color index used to add the intersection line to the current picture.
COLOR
I
0 through 255
55
562
Landmark
Analyze for Bad Residuals

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Specify whether you wish to analyze the generated intersection line

for the occurrence of bad residuals resulting from the comparison
of backinterpolation on both input grids.
ANRS
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Analyze profiles where bad residuals are present.

= Do not analyze profiles where bad residuals are present.
C*4
NO
Upper Threshold for Bad Residual

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Positive upper limit for an acceptable difference between back

interpolation against either input grid. Residuals above this value
are reported on in the processing window of Z-MAP Plus and are
posted if requested. If no real number is input here, the macro
calculates what the standard deviation on the resulting residuals are.
The macro uses the positive number result as the upper threshold
for bad residuals.
UPTL
R
ZCL default
Lower Threshold for Bad Residual

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Negative lower limit for an acceptable difference between back

interpolation against either input grid. Residuals below this value
are reported in the processing window of Z-MAP Plus and posted if
requested. If no real number is input here, the macro calculates
what the standard deviation on the resulting residuals are. The
macro uses the negative number result as the lower threshold for
bad residuals.
LWTL
R
ZCL default
563
Landmark
Post Bad Residual on the Picture

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
If you ask to analyze the residuals, this parameter determines

whether they are posted to the currently displayed picture. Only the
bad residuals defined by the parameters UPTL & LWTL are posted.
Two decimal locations are requested in the posting call. If the bad
residual is smaller than this, it is posted in scientific notation.
ADDR
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
= Bad residuals are posted on the picture.

= Bad residuals are not posted on the picture.
C*4
NO
Color Index for Posting Bad Residuals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
This is the color index for posting bad residuals to the currently
displayed picture. The same index is used for the symbol (which
uses symbol code 90) and for the numerically posted bad residual
value.
COLRR
I
0 through 255
54
Size of Symbols and Posted Residuals

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
This is the size of the symbols and the bad residual values posted
above the symbols, expressed in plotter units for the currently
displayed picture
SPST
R
0.07 in or 0.17 cm
564
Landmark
SURFACE-INTRSECT: ZCL Processes
ZCL PROCESSES
BACK INTERPOLATE
BRANCH
CONTOUR
DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK PRINT
DATA BLOCK UTILITY
DATA STATISTICS
DELETE FILE
DUAL DATA OPS
DUAL GRID OPS
FILE CONVERSION
FILE UTILITY
POST DATA NEW
QUALITY ASSURE
SURFACE INTERSECT
WRITE TEXT
R2003.12.0
SURFACE-INTRSECT: ZCL Processes
565
Landmark
SURFACEPIC
Macro Name
SURFACEPIC
Menu Option
Macros Graphics Multi-Surface Map
Purpose
This macro produces a map, given up to 3 surfaces (grids) and up to 3

Z-Fields. It will produce contours for the provided surfaces and post the
Z-Fields around the control points.
Description
Surface picture is a useful macro for posting multiple surfaces on a

single map. This macro is often used in conjunction with the surface
correction macro to map the results of the macro. Surface picture can
contour the original surface, the error correction grid and the final
corrected surface.
Results
This macro produces a picture at a user defined scale. It contours up to

3 selected surfaces and gives the user control over color, colorfill,
contour interval and contour line type.
You can post a maximum of three Z Fields can be posted around a well
symbol. The Z Field colors match the colors selected for the surface
contour lines.
This macro supplements the macro SURFCORRECT and generates
maps from the output of SURFCORRECT.
R2003.12.0
SURFACEPIC
566
Landmark
SURFACEPIC: Parameters

ZGF to write final graphic to?
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
o
Enter the name of the ZGF where you will store the new picture.
ZFILEP
C*40
LGWSDEMO.ZGF
Data file with new surface picks (x,y,z,ID)

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MWELLD
C*24
No Default
*MFD name for input

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MFDINF
I
0
Input WELL NAME FIELD from data file

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
INFLD
I
No Default
Input First Z-FIELD from data file

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
INFLZ1
I
No Default
Input Second Z-FIELD from data file

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
INFLZ2
I
No Default
Input Third Z-FIELD from data file

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
INFLZ3
I
No Default
567
Landmark
Project Title
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
PROJECTT
C*40
No Default
Choose absolute map scale

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
MPSCAL
C*12
1:200
1:500
1:1,000
1:2,500
1:4,000
1:5,000
1:10,000
1:20,000
1:25,000
1:50,000
1:75,000
1:100,000
Default Value
1:5,000
Data ground UNITS

Macro Parameter
Description
Data Type
Options
MPUNIT
Use this field to indicate the units of measure of the map data.
NOTE: SURFACEPIC does not convert feet to meters or meters to
feet.
C*8
METERS
FEET
Default Value
R2003.12.0
METERS
568
Landmark
Parameters for constructing first surface

*Input first GRID to be contoured
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
GRIDIN1
C*24
No Default
*MFD name for input

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MFDGIN1
I
No Default
FAULT FILE to use with contouring & graphics

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Macro Parameter FLTIN1

C*24
No Default
MFD name for input

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Macro Parameter MFDFIN1

I
No Default
Title for First Surface

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Macro Parameter MAPTIT1

C*24
FIRST SURFACE
Color for first surface

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Macro Parameter SURFCOL1

I
3
Color for first set of faults

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Macro Parameter FALTCOL1

I
13
569
Landmark
CONTOUR INTERVAL for the new Structure map

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Macro Parameter CONINT1

R
No Default
Draw dashed contours of control surface?

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
DASHCON1
C*4
YES
NO
Default Value
NO
Colorfill First Surface?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Turn colorfill for the first surface on or off.

COLFIL1
Data Type C*12
COLORFILL
NO COLORFILL
Default Value
NO COLORFILL
Color for Colorfill

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Designate the cell from the color table that contains the first color to
use when drawing the colorfill for the first surface.
CFCOL1
I
56
570
Landmark
Parameters for constructing second surface

Input Second GRID to be contoured
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
GRIDIN2
C*24
No Default
MFD name for input

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MFDGIN2
I
No Default
FAULT FILE to use with operations & graphics

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
FLTIN2
C*24
No Default
MFD name for input

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MFDFIN2
I
No Default
Title for Second Surface

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MAPTIT2
C*24
SECOND SURFACE
Color for second surface

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
SURFCOL2
I
4
Color for second set of faults

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
FALTCOL2
I
14
571
Landmark

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
CONINT2
R
No Default

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
DASHCON2
C*4
s
YES
NO
Default Value
YES
Colorfill Second Surface?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Turn colorfill for the second surface on or off

COLFIL2
Data Type C*12
COLORFILL
NO COLORFILL
Default Value
NO COLORFILL
Color for Colorfill

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
CFCOL2
I
76
572
Landmark
Parameters for constructing second surface

Input Third GRID to be contoured
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
GRIDIN3
C*24
No Default
MFD name for input

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MFDGIN3
I
No Default
FAULT FILE to use with contouring & graphics

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
FLTIN3
C*24
No Default
MFD name for input

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MFDFIN3
C*24
No Default
Title for Third Surface

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
MAPTIT3
C*24
THIRD SURFACE
Color for third surface

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
SURFCOL3
I
5
Color for third set of faults

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
FALTCOL3
I
15
573
Landmark

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
CONINT3
R
No Default

Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
DASHCON3
C*24
YES
NO
Default Value
YES
Colorfill Third Surface?

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Options
Turn colorfill for the third surface on or off

COLFIL3
Data Type C*12
COLORFILL
NO COLORFILL
Default Value
NO COLORFILL
Color for Colorfill

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Set the color where spread of colors begins

CFCOL3
I
96
ZCL PROCESSES
SURFCORRECT
R2003.12.0
574
Landmark
THREED-T-TO-D
Macro Name
THREED-T-TO-D
Menu Option
Macros Geophysics 3D Time-to-Depth Conversion
Purpose
This macro converts a time grid to an average velocity grid using a

special three dimensional time-slice grid in the conversion process.
Each time-slice in the three dimensional grid is a grid of the varying
velocity at a constant time
.
Restrictions
The units of the time-slice grids and the time grid to be converted must be the
same, i.e. all in seconds, all in milliseconds, etc.
Description
pseudo 3D (velocity) grid

time grid
constant times at the first layer, bottom layer, and DeltaT
(constant) between layers
Uses for This Macro
After building a Pseudo 3D grid of velocities at constant depth increments, you
can input a depth grid to this macro and back out the average velocity grid. This
is handy for spotting velocity anomalies in gridded depth surfaces that were
derived using other time-to-depth procedures.
After building a Pseudo 3D grid of a model using grids of depth at constant time
increments, the input time grid can be converted directly to a depth grid.
R2003.12.0
THREED-T-TO-D
575
Landmark
THREED-T-TO-D: Technical Notes
Technical Notes
NODES = ft./msec at t0
(Gridded to mappable)
t0
+Y
t1
t2
NCOLS = 4
ROWS
= 4
NTIMES = 3
+X
Visualizing the 3D Pseudo Velocity Grid

Preparing the Three-Dimensional Grid
The 3D average velocity/depth grid is essentially a concatenated series
of conventional 2D grids. You may use the TIME-SLICE macro to
build this grid, or you may build this grid at the system level. If this grid
is built at the system level by concatenating the time-slice grids into
one file, you should keep the following information in mind.
The steps for generating the 3D grid at the system level and importing it
into Z-MAP Plus are:
R2003.12.0
1.
At the system level, concatenate the time-slice grids into one file,
with T0 followed by T1, and so on.
2.
Select Utilities Import to specify an input grid that supplies the

values for rows, columns, XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX.
576
Landmark
The values for the pseudo grid are calculated in the following way:
Value
Calculated As
ROWS
Number of rows in the original time grids.
COLUMNS
NCOL * NTIMES where NCOL = number of grid

columns in the original time grids and NTIMES =
Number of time-slices.
XMIN3D
XMIN of the original time grids.
XMAX3D
XMIN + (COLUMNS-1) * XINC where XMIN =

gridding increment of the original time grids.
YMIN3D
YMIN of the original time grids
YMAX3D
YMAX of the original time grids

*Grid: Pseudo-Three-Dimensional Velocity
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input file that contains the pseudo three-dimensional

input velocity grid model. This is the output grid from running the
TIME-SLICE macro.
VELOGRID
C*24
No default
for the Input Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the input three-dimensional velocity grid.

MFDVELO
I
0 through 5
577
Landmark
THREED-T-TO-D: Parameters
*Grid: Time
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file for the time grid. If the Pseudo
3-Dimensional Velocity grid model is made of one-way time
velocity grids between T0, T1, T2, etc., this grid must be structured
in one-way time.
TIMEGRID
C*24
No default
MFD for the Input Time Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input time grid.

MFDTIME
I
0 through 5
*Time at First Velocity Layer

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The time value for the top (minimum) slice in the 3D grid.
TIMETOP
R
No default
*Time at Bottom Velocity Layer

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default:
The time value for the bottom (maximum) slice in the 3D grid.
TIMEBOT
R
No default
*Delta Time Between Velocity Layers

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default:
R2003.12.0
The Delta time interval between each slice in the 3D grid. (Grids
are assumed to be evenly spaced.)
TIMEDEL
R
No default
578
Landmark
*Grid: Output Interpolated Velocities

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default:
Name of the output grid for the interpolated average velocities/

depths.
GRIDOUT
C*24
No default
MFD Number of the Output Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for saving the output grid of interpolated

velocities/depths.
MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
0 scratch MFD
ZCL PROCESSES
THREEDTIMETODEPT
R2003.12.0
579
Landmark
TIME-SLICE
Macro Name
TIME-SLICE
Menu Option
Macros Geophysics 3D Velocity Grid (Time Slice)
Purpose
This macro builds the pseudo three-dimensional velocity grid needed

for the Time-to-Depth conversion method that is provided in the
THREED-T-TO-D macro. Each of the two dimensional velocity grids
must have the same area of interest, increments, and ZNON value.
Description
The procedure puts the top (shallowest) time-slice grid first, followed
by slice grid 1, slice grid 2, up to slice grid 5. Lastly, the bottom
(deepest) time-slice grid is specified.
If you have more than five time-slice Velocity Grids to concatenate, you
may make more than one pass with this macro to build the final 3D
Velocity Grid. The additional passes continue to add consecutively
deeper time-slice grids.
Technical Note
If you construct this 3D Velocity grid of derived one way time velocities at
constant time-slices of equal Delta T, then you need to remember that the input
time grid to the THREED-T-TO-D macro, which produces an interpolated result
from this 3D grid model, must be a one-way time to top of event grid using
compatible time units, where:
Velocity time-slices = ft/msec (OWT)
Time-to-Top = msec (OWT)
Output Average Velocity number = ft/msec (OWT)
Please note that you can also build one of these Pseudo 3D grids to represent
velocity of constant depth increments. Then in THREED-T-TO-D, generate the
average velocity grid to a gridded depth event.
R2003.12.0
TIME-SLICE
580
Landmark
TIME-SLICE: Results
Results
A pseudo three-dimensional velocity grid, as illustrated below.

Shallowest, top
Grid 1
Grid 2
Grid 3
Grid 4
Grid 5
Deepest, bottom
Enter the Top (Shallowest) Timeslice Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input file for the top (shallowest) timeslice grid.
TOPTS
C*24
ZCL default
for the Top Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the top grid.

TOPTSMFD
I
0 through 5
Enter the First Time Grid (1 of 5)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the input file for the first time grid.

GRID1
C*24
ZCL default
TIME-SLICE: Results
581
Landmark
TIME-SLICE: Parameters
o

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the first input time grid.

GRIDMFD1
I
0 through 5
Enter the Second Time Grid (2 of 5)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file for the second time grid.

GRID2
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the second input time grid.

GRIDMFD2
I
0 through 5
Enter the Third Time Grid (3 of 5)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input file for the third time grid.

GRID3
C*24
ZCL default
for the Third Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the third input time grid.

GRIDMFD3
I
0 through 5
582
Landmark
Enter the Fourth Time Grid (4 of 5)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file for the fourth time grid.

GRID4
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for the Fourth Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the fourth input time grid.

GRIDMFD4
I
0 through 5
Enter the Fifth Time Grid (5 of 5)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file for the fifth time grid.

GRID5
C*24
ZCL default

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the fifth input time grid.

GRIDMFD5
I
0 through 5
Enter the Bottom (Deepest) Time-Slice Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the input bottom (deepest) time-slice grid.

BOTTS
C*24
ZCL default
583
Landmark
o
MFD for the Bottom Time-Slice Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the bottom time-slice grid.

BOTTSMFD
I
0 through 5
Enter the Output Concatenated Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default:
Name of the output Pseudo 3D time-slice Velocity Grid.

GRIDOUT
C*24
TIMESLICE
MFD for the Output Time-Slice Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
The MFD to use for storing the output grid of interpolated

velocities/depths.
MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
THREE D TIMESLICE
R2003.12.0
584
Landmark
TRANSFORM-COORDS
Macro Name
TRANSFORM-COORDS
Menu Option
Operations Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)
Purpose
This macro performs coordinate transformations (map projections). It

uses an input data file to define the transformation parameters. It allows
the output coordinates to overwrite an existing field.
Description
You are asked to specify these input values:
Results
R2003.12.0
The input data file on which the map projection process will be
performed.
The fields in the input data file that will be used as input to the
projection process.
An input file for which a projection is defined. The projection

information from this file will be used to define the projection for
the transformation process. This is a data file that has had
coordinate transformation already performed on it. To see which
projection is associated with a data file (if any), run the
DATA-HISTORY macro on the file.
The direction of the transformation.
The name of the output file and the MFD that will contain the
output file.
The fields for writing the output coordinates in the output file.
The null data (ZNON) value for the output fields.
The output is a file with transformed coordinates.
TRANSFORM-COORDS
585
Landmark
TRANSFORM-COORDS: Parameters

*Input Data file from which to read Projection Parameters
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of a data file that contains projected data. This is a data file
that already had coordinate transformation performed on it. The
projection parameters from this file will be used in the projection
process.
PROJFILE
C*24
All attached data files
No default
Input Projection Parameter MASTER FILE

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD containing the Input Data file from which to read Projection
Parameters.
PROJMFD
I
0 through 5
*Input Data file to be Transformed

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oInput
Name of a data file containing data to be projected.

FILEIN
C*24
No default
transformee MASTER FILE
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD containing the Input Data file to be transformed.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
586
Landmark
*Direction of Transformation
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Direction of transformation process

DIRECT
C*4
Either LLXY (LatLon to XY) or XYLL (XY to LatLon)
LLXY
*Input Y / Latitude field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Field that contains the input Northing (Y) or Latitude data

INFLDN
I
All real-valued fields on input file
First Latitude or Y field.
*Input X / Longitude field

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Field that contains the input Easting (X) or Longitude data

INFLDE
I
First Longitude or X field
*Field to Replace with Output Y or Latitude

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Field to use for saving the output Northing (Y) or Latitude data
OUTFDNLT
I
No default value
*Field to Replace with Output X or Longitude

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Field to contain the output Easting (X) or Longitude data.

OUTFDELN
I
No defaultm value
587
Landmark
*Output Y / Latitude Field Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name for Field to contain the output Northing (Y) or Latitude data
FLDNAMEN
C*20
Data type default
*Output X / Longitude Field Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name for Field to contain the output Easting (X) or Longitude data.
FLDNAMEE
C*20
Data type default
ZNON for output file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Null data (ZNON) value for output Lat/Lon or X/Y fields

ZNON
R
+1.0E+30
Output File Name

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name for new data file containing transformed data

FILEOUT
C*24
No default
Output MASTER FILE

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD for new data file containing transformed data.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
1 First attached MFD.
ZCL PROCESSES
PROJECTION
TRANSFORMCOORDS
R2003.12.0
588
Landmark
TREND-ANAL-GRID
Macro Name
TREND-ANAL-GRID
Menu Option
Modeling Trend Surface
Purpose
This macro creates a trend grid and a residual grid by:
building a trend grid of a specified order from the supplied surface

grid
subtracting the trend grid from the supplied surface grid and
creating the residual grid
Execute This Macro Twice
You must execute the macro twice: once to view the histogram and determine the
correct number of terms and once again to perform the final trend analysis.
Typically, you would first look at a map of the residuals and a map of
the surface input grid on which contours from the trend grid have been
overlaid. Alternatively, you can display the residuals as colorfill and
overlay the contours of the input surface grid and trend grids. Using
either of these methods, localized high or low residual features, which
are geologically regarded as anomalies, can be easily identified.
Many application scenarios exist. For example, this macro may be used
to generate residuals and a trend surface from a velocity grid. Upon
examining the residuals, you could then identify high velocity, pull-up
areas.
Description
grid from which the trend grid is to be created

number of terms desired
names of the output trend and residual grids
To Process Data Files, Use Trend Gridding
This macro only uses grid files for input. When dealing with data files, you must
use Gridding Trend Gridding.
Results
R2003.12.0
A grid containing a trend surface and a grid for the residual between the
input grid and the trend grid.
TREND-ANAL-GRID
589
Landmark
TREND-ANAL-GRID: Technical Notes
Technical Notes
The TREND-ANAL-GRID macro performs a Least Squares fit to grid
data to produce a grid model that represents the large scale regional
trend of the surface. The trend grid may be subtracted from the surface
grid model to reveal small scale surface features (residuals) that would
be otherwise obscured by the regional trend. This is called Trend and
Residual Analysis and it may be used to identify bad input data points.
Factors Affecting Trend Gridding Accuracy
Although the TREND-ANAL-GRID macro only accepts grid data as
input, this Technical Note discusses the use of both grid and control
point data.
Trend Gridding produces a grid of the large scale regional components
of a surface from either control point or grid data. The extent to which
the trend grid models the regional trend is controlled by the number of
terms in the polynomial expression used to compute the trend fit. In
addition, although the same data may be used to generate a trend grid
and map, drastic differences may appear when one surface trend is
generated from a grid and the other is generated directly from control
point data. Three factors that contribute to these differences are:
R2003.12.0
spatial distribution of the data

number of terms used in the computations
accuracy of the trend fit
590
Landmark
Spatial Distribution
The spatial distribution of the data is of primary importance in trend
gridding. Data that is evenly spaced throughout a field, as is grid data,
produces a trend that models the surface in a consistent manner. On the
other hand, data that is clustered, such as control point data, produces a
trend grid that resembles the structure of only the clustered areas. (You
have the option of inputting control point data when executing
Gridding Trend Gridding.) For this reason, the impact type data
can strongly affect the resulting trend grid.
Control Point Data In Trend Gridding
Trend grids generated from control point data are extremely sensitive to
the spatial distribution of the data. When the control points are evenly
spaced over the surface, the trend produced closely resembles the trend
produced from a a grid. However, if the control points are clustered, the
resulting trend differs from that produced from a grid.
Unlike the evenly distributed grid nodes, clustered control points
produce a trend that only accurately models those surface areas having
the highest concentration of control points.
Control point data is of greatest use when you wish to extend trend
analysis around a cluster of control points, or when you have a random
distribution of control points throughout the area. Also, because there
are typically fewer data points in a control point file than in a grid file,
processing time is less.
You can use control point data as input when you select Gridding
Trend Gridding.
Grid Data in Trend Gridding
Trend grids generated from grid data more accurately reflect the overall
trend because the grid nodes are evenly distributed. However, grid data
files are typically large and can take a long time to process. For this
reason, interactive Trend Gridding gives you the ability to block
average. (The TREND-ANAL-GRID macro takes all the defaults found
in interactive Trend Gridding.)
R2003.12.0
591
Landmark
Number of Terms
Another consideration is the number of terms used in the trend fit. The
higher the number, the more flexion there can be in the trend surface
and the closer it fits the data. However, it also allows the trend surface
to climb or drop steeply in regions of low data concentration near the
edge of the grid. It is desirable to use the lowest number of terms that
adequately describe the surface.
When using evenly distributed data, a higher term number may be
selected to generate a trend model that closely fits the data. However, if
the data is not evenly distributed, the great amount of flexion from the
higher term numbers causes sporadic behavior within the trend.
Select the Lowest Number of Terms Possible
Because the amount of flexion can cause inconsistency in the gridding of various
data distribution types, it is generally best to select the lowest number of terms
that adequately describe the surface.
Accuracy of the Trend Fit

To help you determine the accuracy, or fit, of a trend grid to the actual
data, the Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals
Graph and the Residuals in Terms of the Standard Deviation Graph
appear. These are discussed in the following paragraphs.
R2003.12.0
592
Landmark
Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals

Graph
The Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals Graph
helps you determine the lowest number of terms that adequately
describe the surface. When viewing the display, the smaller the
absolute standard deviation of the residuals, the better the trend fit. The
number of terms needed to produce an adequate trend model can be
recognized when an addition of terms to the trend fit no longer
significantly reduces the standard deviation of the residual. If you draw
a curve through the graph, the number of terms listed where the curve
flattens out is the one to use. In the figure shown below, four to six
terms might be used as a reasonable number of terms. This is a 2nd
order trend.
NORMALIZED ABSOLUTE STANDARD DEVIATION OF THE
RESIDUALS FOR POLYNOMIAL OF GIVEN NUMBER OF TERMS
MAXIMUM VALUE = 0.27539E+02
I + +
I + +
I + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910
RESIDUAL MEAN = -0.13525E-05
STANDARD DEVIATION = 0.16910E+0
R2003.12.0
593
Landmark
Residuals in Terms of the Standard Deviation Graph

This graph helps you determine how well the number of terms selected
fits the data. A good fit produces a normal distribution of approximately
0. In a typical normal distribution, less than 1% of the data is expected
to have a standard deviation greater than 3. Data points that fall into this
category are poorly fitted and are randomly distributed throughout the
surface. Points in this area may represent bad data. If the curve is
skewed, there is at least one region of the surface that is poorly modeled
by the trend. In the figure below, there is a significant number of data
points that are poorly modeled, due to clustering of the data.
RESIDUAL MEAN = -0.13525E-05
STANDARD DEVIATION = 0.16910E+0
*** CALCULATING TREND FIT RESIDUALS ***
RESIDUALS IN TERMS OF THE STANDARD DEVIATION
FROM 3.0.SIGMA TO -3.0.SIGMA IN 0.5.SIGMA BINS
I
+ +
I
+ +
I
+ +
I
+ +
I
+ +
I
+ +
I
+
+ + + +
I
+ + + + + +
I
+ + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + + +
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314
R2003.12.0
594
Landmark
Block Averaging
Block averaging divides your grid file into a set of blocks, each
containing an equal number of rows and columns. The grid nodes
within each block are averaged to produce a mean z value for each
block. These mean values are used to determine the trend fit instead of
the individual grid node values. Block averaging drastically reduces the
CPU time required by the Trend Gridding Algorithm without
significantly changing the results.
For Block Averaging, Use Trend Gridding
Block Averaging is currently not available in the TREND-ANAL-GRID macro;
however, it is provided in Gridding Trend Gridding.
Output Grid Parameters

When you use a grid file, the default parameters are identical to those of
your input grid. However, the Trend Gridding option gives you the
ability to modify the output trend grid by selecting different (x,y)
minimums, maximums, and grid increments.When you process
multiple grids, the gridding parameters must be compatible with all
others.
R2003.12.0
595
Landmark
Limiting Z Values
Limiting the minimum and maximum z values of the grid eliminates
drastic overshoot of the grid values above and below the data values,
especially when you are using 3rd order, or higher polynomials. Set the
minimum z value slightly smaller than the smallest data value, and the
maximum z value slightly larger than the largest data value.
******
PROCESS DUALGRIDOPS
Apply operation SUBTRACT
USE
to grid ONE WAY TIME TO TOP

to grid trend 1
15508 ******
and
,
GRID FILE:ONE WAY TIME TO TOP

CREATED: 20 JAN 93
AT: 21:03
GRID FILE:trend 1
CREATED: 21 JAN 93
AT: 13:33
GRID FILE: resid 1
CREATED: 21 JAN 93
AT: 13:33
Grid statistics
on the residual
R2003.12.0
NUMBER OF ROWS
=
156
NUMBER OF COLUMNS
=
156
NUMBER OF Z-VALUE NODES
=
24246
NUMBER OF ZNON NODES
=
90
MINIMUM X COORDINATE
=
635550.00
MAXIMUM X COORDINATE
=
638650.00
MINIMUM Y COORDINATE
=
5441880.0
MAXIMUM Y COORDINATE
=
5444980.0
X INTERVAL BETWEEN COLUMNS
=
20.000000
Y INTERVAL BETWEEN ROWS
=
20.000000
MAXIMUM SURFACE VALUE
=
68.618958
MINIMUM SURFACE VALUE
=
-29.918396
SURFACE RANGE
=
98.537354
MEAN OF Z
= -0.15759882
ROOT MEAN SQUARE OF Z
=
16.731031
STANDARD DEVIATION OF Z
=
16.730289
RELATIVE VARIATION OF Z
=
-106.15745
ROOT MEAN SQUARE CURVATURE OF Z = 0.52230442E-02
****** PROCESS MACROEND
USE 15509 ******
****** PROCESS STOP
USE
55 ******
** NORMAL TERMINATION **
PROCESSING FINISHED PLEASE CONTINUE
596
Landmark
Table 1: Trend Orthogonal Polynomials

Polynomial
Order
Number
of Terms
Expression
A (Constant)
1st
2
3
x
y
2nd
4
5
6
x2
xy
y2
3rd
7
8
9
10
x3
x2y
xy2
y3
4th
11
12
13
14
15
x4
x3y
x2y2
xy3
y4
5th
16
17
18
19
20
21
x5
x4y
x3y2
x2y3
xy4
y5
6th
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
x6
x5y
x4y2
x3y3
x2y4
xy5
y6
For example, a second order (6 term) polynomial would consist of the

following expression:
A + k 1 x + k 2 y + k 3 x 2 + k 4 xy + k 5 y 2
where kn, the coefficients, are calculated from the data.
R2003.12.0
597
Landmark
TREND-ANAL-GRID: Parameters

*Name of Input Grid File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
for the Input Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

MFDGIN
I
0 through 5
Name of the Output Trend Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default:
Name of the output trend grid.

TRENDOUT
C*24
TREND GRID
Name of Trend Grid MFD

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Specify the MFD to use for storing the output trend grid.
MFDTOUT
I
0 through 5
Name of the Output Residual Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the output residual grid.

RESIDOUT
C*24
RESIDUAL GRID
598
Landmark
Name of Residual Grid MFD

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the MFD for the residual grid.

MFDROUT
I
0 through 5
1
Number of Terms for Trend Grid (3, 6, 10-28)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Specify the number of TERMS in the output trend grid; for

example, a flat planar surface has 3 terms. Refer to the plot of the
Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals for
Polynomial of Given Number of Terms on page 593 to determine
the number of terms to enter. A good rule of thumb is to start out
with the term number that corresponds to where the histogram
flattens out.
NTERMS
I
3
ZCL PROCESSES
TREND GRIDDING
R2003.12.0
DUAL GRID OPS
599
Landmark
USER-FILTER
Macro Name
USER-FILTER
Menu Option
Modeling User-Defined Filter
Description
This macro filters a grid by means of a user-defined filter operator grid.

The filter operator grid may originate either from a GRID file on an
attached MFD or as an external disk file that is imported. This filter
operator may possess ring symmetry. Ring symmetry means that the
values in the grid nodes that are equal distance from the centerpoint of
the grid are equal. The macro can handle up to 99 rings.
The input grid file may contain undefined values. These values may
exist within the grid itself or may be caused by faults crossing the grid.
The macro employs one of two methods to handle undefined values. If
the operator is ring symmetric, a ring-symmetric compensation method
is used; otherwise, an asymmetric compensation method is used. If no
compensation is desired, it may be turned off.
Specify these parameters:
Results
R2003.12.0
the GRID file to be filtered

an optional FALT file
the GRID file for the filter operator grid
symmetry type of the filter operator grid
whether to compensate for null nodes in the filter operator grid
origin of the ring symmetric filter operator grid (optional)
name of the external file for the ring
symmetric operator grid (optional)
name of the output GRID file
An output grid file for the filtered grid.
USER-FILTER
600
Landmark
USER-FILTER: Parameters

*Enter the Grid File to be filtered
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD

GRIDIN
C*24
No default
for Input Grid File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input grid file.

MFDIN
I
0 through 5
Enter Any Faults to be Used

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value

FAULTS
C*24
None, use no file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the input fault file.

MFDFAULT
I
0 through 5
Enter the Filter Operator Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the grid file to be the filter operator.

GRIDFN
C*24
None, use no file
601
Landmark
o
MFD for Filter Operator Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the filter operator grid file.

MFDFN
I
0 through 5
Enter the Name of the Output Grid File

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the filtered grid file.

GRIDOUT
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Output Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the output grid file.

MFDOUT
I
0 through 5
Symmetry of the Filter Operator Grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Symmetry type of the filter grid.

SYMMETRY
NONE = Node weights are not symmetric.
RING = Node weights are defined in concentric rings.
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
NONE
Compensate when Encountering Null Nodes

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Indicate whether to compensate for null values in grid nodes.

CMPNSATE
YES
NO
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
= Apply compensation.
= Do not apply compensation.
C*4
YES
602
Landmark
Origin of the Ring Symmetric Filter Grid

Description
Source for a ring symmetric filter grid.

Required If SYMMETRY = RING
If the SYMMETRY parameter is set to RING, you must set a value for this
field. The SYMMETRY parameter is set in the Symmetry of the Filter
Operator Grid fields value in the macro interface.
Macro Parameter
Options
RINGIN
GRID = Obtain the filter from a GRID file.
ASCII = Obtain the filter from an external ASCII file.
Data Type
Default Value
C*8
GRID
Enter External File with Ring Weights

Description
Name of external file containing grid ring weights.

Required if RINGIN = ASCII
If the RINGIN parameter is set to ASCII, you must designate the file that
contains the grid ring weights. The RINGIN parameter is set in the Origin of
the Ring Symmetric Filter Grid field of the macro interface.
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
DISKFILE
C*80
None
ZCL PROCESSES
BRANCH
DATA BLOCK LOAD
FILE UTILITY
IMPORT
SPAWN
R2003.12.0
DATA BLOCK
DELETE FILE
GRID STATISTICS
SELECT
USER GRID FILTER
603
Landmark
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D
Macro Name
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D
Menu Option
Macros Geophysics Velocity-function Time-to-Depth
Purpose
This macro executes Velocity-Function Time to Depth Conversion. The

time-to-depth conversion is accomplished on a one-surface-per-run
basis. There are two basic models:
T2 T1
Average Velocity Approach: 2 = V 0 ------------------ + Z
S
Acceleration Function Approach:
A ( T2 T1 ) L
LV
= -------- + Z 1 exp --------------------------- --
A
A
All approaches require the user to input three grids:
(T1) Time to the top of the interval being evaluated. For example,
Time-to-Water Bottom.
(Z1) Depth to the event (T1). For example, this could be the last
surface converted to depth or to gridded bathymetry.
(T2) Time to the top of the event being converted to depth. For
example, a gridded time horizon from interpolated digitized
seismic files.
The average velocity model V0 is defined between T1 and T2 and may

be entered as a grid or constant. Alternatively, V0 could come from the
THREED-T-TO-D macro, where average velocity is output as a grid. It
could also be built from a data file of calculated move-out velocities or
even well derived velocities from multi-shot surveys. For the
acceleration function: LV, A and S (SCALE) can all be constants, or LV
and A can be grids. Note that in the acceleration model, LV is always
the velocity at the surface.
If You Do Not Have Grids of T1 or Z1
If you dont have grids of T1 or Z1 and want to use constants, you can produce
them with the EVALUATE-CONGRID macro. Alternatively, you could take your
T2 grid and use Single Grid Operations, CLIPMIN CLIPMAX the node values
to that of the desired constant.
R2003.12.0
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D
604
Landmark
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D: Description
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
the type of formation to use
a grid representing the depth at the top of the interval (Z1) the
last derived depth surface above
a grid representing the time at the top of the interval (T1) the
last time surface above
a grid representing the time at the bottom of the interval (T2)

your digitized time events, next event deeper
An optional Grid representing the Velocity at the surface (LV)

for acceleration function only
an optional grid representing the interval velocity (V0)
an optional grid representing the acceleration (A)
constant velocity at the top of the surface (LV)
constant interval velocity (V0)
constant acceleration (A)
constant time scale value (S)
A grid dataset representing the depth at the bottom of the interval.
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D: Description
605
Landmark
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D: Parameters

Help for this Macro
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0

information on values needed for this macro.

for the macro.
COMMENTA
C*60
All formulas have Z1, T1 and T2 as input grids
606
Landmark
Velocity Function Model

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
The type of time-to-depth function to use.

METHOD
CONSTANT
= The CONSTANT Interval Velocity Function uses

the formula:
T2 T1
Z 2 = V 0 ------------------ + Z 1
S
where V0 and S are constants.
GRIDDED
= The GRIDDED Interval Velocity Function uses the

formula:
T2 T1
Z 2 = V 0 ------------------ + Z 1
S
where S is a constant and V0 is a grid.
LINEAR CONSTANT = The LINEAR CONSTANT (Acceleration Model).
Velocity Function uses the formula:
A ( T 2 T 1 ) LV
LV
Z 2 = -------- + Z 1 exp --------------------------- ------- A
A
S
where LV, S and A are constants.
LINEAR GRIDDED
= The LINEAR GRIDDED (Acceleration Model)

Velocity Function uses the formula:
A ( T 2 T 1 ) LV
LV
Z 2 = -------- + Z 1 exp --------------------------- ------- A
A
S
where S is a constant and LV and A are grids.
Data Type
Default Value
C*16
CONSTANT
*Grid: Depth at Top (Z1)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the input file for the depth grid at the top of the formation.
TOPDGRID
C*24
No default
607
Landmark
o
MFD for the Depth Grid at Top

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the depth grid at the top of the target formation.
MFDTOPD
I
0 through 5
*Grid: Time at Top (T1)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
Name of the input file for the time grid at the top of the formation.
TOPTGRID
C*24
No default
MFD for the Time Grid at Top

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the time grid at the top of the formation.
MFDTOPT
I
0 through 5
*Grid: Time at Bottom (T2)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input file for the time grid at the bottom of the
formation.
BOTTGRID
C*24
No default
for the Time Grid at Bottom
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the time grid at the bottom of the formation.
MFDBOTT
I
0 through 5
608
Landmark
Grid: Velocity at Surface (LV)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input file containing velocity at the surface. Required

if METHOD = LINEAR GRIDDED.
TOPVGRID
C*24
ZCL default
for the Velocity Grid at Top
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the velocity grid at the top of the target
formation.
MFDTOPV
I
0 through 5
Grid: Interval Velocity (V0)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input file for the interval velocity. Required if

METHOD = GRIDDED.
INTVGRID
C*24
ZCL default
for the Interval Velocity Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
MFD that contains the interval velocity grid.

MFDINTV
I
0 through 5
609
Landmark
Grid: Acceleration (A)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
oMFD
Name of the input file for the acceleration. Required if METHOD =

LINEAR GRIDDED.
ACCLGRID
C*24
ZCL default
for the Acceleration Grid
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
MFD that contains the acceleration grid for the target formation.
MFDACCL
I
0 through 5
Output Grid: Depth at Bottom (Z2)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the output file which contain the depth at the bottom of the
target formation.
BOTDGRID
C*24
ZCL default
MFD for Depth at Bottom

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Range
Default Value
R2003.12.0
The MFD to use for storing the depth at bottom.

MFDBOTD
I
0 through 5
610
Landmark
Velocity Time Conversion Factor

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Conversion factor to convert between units of velocities and times.

2000 converts two way millisecond seismic times to be unit
compatible with meters per second. That is, the seismic times
originally in two way time (milliseconds) are divided by 2000,
giving one way time and seconds. This is unit compatible with a
velocity grid in meters second.
SCALE
R
2000.0
Velocity at Top (if Linear Constant - LV)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The velocity at the surface. Required if METHOD = LINEAR

CONSTANT. This is the datum velocity for the top surface in the
interval used for calculating constant Acceleration (A).
TOPVELO
R
ZCL default
Interval Velocity (if Constant - V0)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
If METHOD = CONSTANT, this value is used for the constant

velocity for depth conversion.
INTVELO
R
ZCL default
Acceleration (if Linear Constant - A)

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Constant acceleration through the formation. Required if

METHOD = LINEAR CONSTANT.
ACCELER
R
ZCL default
ZCL PROCESSES
VEL FUN TIME TO DEPT
R2003.12.0
611
Landmark
VERT-TO-DGRID
Macro Name
VERT-TO-DGRID
Menu Option
Macros Utility Distance-to-Vertex Grid
Purpose
The VERT-TO-DGRID macro records the shortest distance from each

grid node to any point along any line segment in a user-specified input
vertex file of the form (x,y,seg id). The AOI of the output grid is defined
by a user-specified input grid. As part of the macro process, the input
vertex file is resampled at a rate equivalent to half the cell size of the
input grid. The resampled vertex file may be saved as a data file.
Once you have interactively digitized your interpretation of a stream
channel centerline, you may use this macro to produce a form grid that
records distances to the digitized centerlines. The resulting grid may be
used to guide Trendform Gridding. When you edit the digitized
centerlines, you can use the initial form grid as a template for creating a
new form grid.
Description
You must specify these parameters:
Results
R2003.12.0
the input vertex file and the name of the MFD that contains it
the input grid file and the name of the MFD that contains it
the name of the output distance grid and the MFD to which it is to
be written
the name of the output data file and the MFD to which it is to be
written (Optional)
A distance grid is created for use in Z-MAP Plus Trendform Gridding.
VERT-TO-DGRID
612
Landmark
VERT-TO-DGRID: Parameters

Select input VERT file
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The name of the input vertex file

FILEIN
VERT
None
MFD name for the input vertex file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The name of the MFD that contains the input vertex file
MFDIN
I
None
Select input GRID file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The name of the input grid file

GRIDIN
GRID
None
MFD name for the input grid file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The name of the MFD that contains the input grid file
MFDGIN
I
None
Select name for output distance grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
R2003.12.0
Name of the output distance grid

GRIDOUT
GRID
None
613
Landmark
MFD name of output distance grid

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The name of the MFD that contains the output distance grid
MFDGOUT
1
None
Save resampled vertex file as data?

Description
Macro Parameter
Options
Indicate whether to save the resampled vertex file to a data file

SAVEOUT
Yes = save vertex file to data file
No = do not save vertex file to data file
Data Type
Default Value
DATA
No
Select output DATA file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The name of the output data file

FILEOUT
DATA
None
MFD name for the output data file

Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
The name of the MFD that contains the output data file
MFDIN
I
None
ZCL PROCESSES
GRID STATISTICS
DATA BLOCK UTILITY
LINERESAMPLING
FILECONVERSION
FILEUTILITY
DELETE FILE
POINTGRIDPLUS
R2003.12.0
614
Landmark
ZGF-SUMMARY
Macro Name
ZGF-SUMMARY
Menu Option
File Info Graphics File Summary
Purpose
This macro generates a report for each picture in your graphics file
(ZGF). This report includes:
name of the picture

area of interest details
a list of the features (graphic segments) in the file
Description
You are asked to input a graphics file.
Results
A printout containing information about all the pictures on the graphics

file. Projection information is included in the report.
For example:
PICTURE NAME:
REEF WITH SLOPES
X:
Y:
MIN
MAX
0.
40.000
8.0000
42.000
PLOT SIZE: X-DIMENSION =
22.000
RANGE
MAP SCALE
40.000
2.0000
34.000
2.0000
Y-DIMENSION =
22.000
GRAPHICS SEGMENT (LGB) TYPES:

BORDERS
CONTOURS
POSTED CONTROL POINTS AND VALUES
BORDER LABELS AND TICK MARKS
TITLE BLOCK
R2003.12.0
ZGF-SUMMARY
615
Landmark
ZGF-SUMMARY: Parameters

*Enter the Name of the Graphics File
Description
Macro Parameter
Data Type
Default Value
Name of the graphics file (ZGF) whose information is displayed.

(In ZCL, specify the full system path name.)
ZGF
C*80
No default
ZCL PROCESSES
ZGF INFO
R2003.12.0
ZGF-SUMMARY: Parameters
616
Landmark
Running Macros
Overview
Macros executed from Z-MAP Plus are called Z-MAP Plus macros,
and those executed from a ZCL command stream are called ZCL
macros. The structure of these two types of macros is slightly different,
and is covered in Macro Structure starting on page 649. You can run
Z-MAP Plus macros as ZCL macros, but you cannot run ZCL macros
from Z-MAP Plus. Z-MAP Plus macros can also be classified as either
user-supplied or Landmark-supplied.
R2003.12.0
Overview
617
Landmark
Running a Macro in Z-MAP Plus

To run a macro in Z-MAP Plus, follow these steps:
1.
Verify that Z-MAP Plus can locate the macro you want to run:
Select File Directory Paths in the Z-MAP Plus window. In the
Directory Paths dialog box that appears, display the Macros tab.
Make sure one of the Directory Input Paths names the directory
that contains the macro. The Z-MAP Macro Library contains all
the macros supplied with Z-MAP Plus. Its location is usually
determined at installation. If you do not know the location, consult
your system manager.
2.
R2003.12.0
You can select many Z-MAP Plus macros from the Macros menu.
Running a Macro in Z-MAP Plus: Running Macros
618
Landmark
3.
Once you select a macro, its name appears in the status area. If a
macro abstract is available, it scrolls by in the Z-MAP Plus System
Window, and an Execute Macro dialog box appears. The abstract
typically provides a summary of the macros purpose, a list of
input requirements and options, and output results.
4.
In the Execute Macro dialog box, click the Fill in Macro

Parameter Defaults button.
The author of a macro can override standard ZCL parameter

defaults when writing the macro. If you click Fill in Macro
Parameter Defaults, you use the authors default values. You can
view the default values as you work through the macros parameter
windows. If you do not click Fill in Macro Parameter Defaults,
the macro uses standard ZCL defaults for the macros processes.
ZCL Default Value Does Not Appear in the Macro Dialog Box
ZCL default values do not appear in macro dialog boxes. However, they
are still used if the macro user does not provide a value for a
user-controlled macro parameter.
Next, click View Parameter Panels, Change/Assign Parameter

Values to view and respond to all prompts and panels for the
macro.
Prompts for an input file or field appear in the status area as a
selection list window appears. Making a selection saves the
selection, closes the list window, and continues the macro.
Other prompts (and default values) appear in parameter entry
dialog boxes. Enter or select values. Click OK to save the
settings, close the window, and continue the macro.
R2003.12.0
619
Landmark
Once you respond to all prompts, no more dialog boxes appear.

To execute the macro, click Apply in the Execute Macro dialog
box. The Z-MAP Plus System Window displays the macro abstract
(if one is available), the ZCL error-checking report, and the ZCL
processing report.
When the macro is completed, the following words and the
macros abstract appear in the system window:
** NORMAL TERMINATION **
Click Save to close the Execute Macro dialog box and return to the
Z-MAP Plus window.
If you run a macro in Z-MAP Plus, the ZCL command file
TEMPMACRO.ZCL is written to your Z-MAP Plus project
directory. This file records all user-specified macro parameters and
their values. This file is overwritten every time you run a macro.
R2003.12.0
620
Landmark
Running a Macro from ZCL

You call a macro from a ZCL command stream exactly as if it were a
ZCL process, using all of the same ZCL syntax rules. The macro name
is substituted for the ZCL process name (described in the ZCL
Operators Manual). The macro name is followed by macro parameter
and value pairsthe parameters defined in the macros Parameter
Definition Records section.
The following example shows the appearance of a ZCL command file
that calls the example macro UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC and
specifies values for four macro parameters:
C ZCL to run default macro
C
C Attach MFDs
C
MFDS:
NUMMFDS=1, MFD1=TEST.MFD /
C
UNITTHICKNESS:
TOP
= STRATTOP,
BASE
= STRATBASE,
ISOPACH= ISOPACH GRID,
MFDOUT= 1 /
STOP:
/
An all defaults call of the macro might look like the following example:
MFDS:
NUMMFDS=1, MFD1=TEST.MFD /
C
UNITTHICKNESS:
TOP
= STRATTOP,
BASE
= STRATBASE,
STOP:
/
In both macro calls, the parameters TOP and BASE are specified
because they are required parameters (preceded by * when defined).
ZCL reports an error if these values are omitted.
A macro call can also be generated from the ZCL command stream
TEMPMACRO.ZCL written to your home directory when you execute
the macro in Z-MAP Plus. This file contains all user-specified macro
parameter values. Macro parameters that use default values are not
written.
R2003.12.0
Running a Macro from ZCL: Running Macros
621
Landmark
For example, the file generated by running the macro

GRIDANDMAPX.ZCLMAC might read:
GRIDANDMAPX :10,00
ZGF
=./REEF.ZGF,
OLDZGF
=OLD,
PIC
=Grid and Map Macro,
WELLS
=REEF DATA,
MFD1
=
1 ,
WELLFILD =
3 ,
MFDFAL
=
0 ,
INTERVAL =
100.00000
,
/
STOP:55,00
/
Note that the MFDS process would have to be added at the top of this
ZCL command stream before it could be used to call the macro
GRIDANDMAPX. This is because this command stream was built
from running the macro in Z-MAP Plus, and since MFDs were attached
prior to running the macro, the MFDS process does not appear here.
R2003.12.0
Running a Macro from ZCL: Running Macros
622
Landmark
Creating a Macro
Overview
A macro is a set of Z-MAP Command Language (ZCL) process
commands that are packaged together and are called and executed as a
group, either by Z-MAP Plus or by a ZCL command stream.
Z-MAP Plus includes over 70 macros that are supplied by Landmark.
You can also write custom macros and store them for later use by
yourself and others.
Macros are often used to package procedures, making difficult
procedures easier to execute for the novice user. Packaging procedures
is also an excellent way to document a workflow and is useful for
storing a complex workflow you may need to duplicate later.
Since macros have access to all ZCL functionality, you can also use
them to access ZCL functions that are not yet available through the
current Z-MAP Plus interface.
Macros you execute from Z-MAP Plus are called Z-MAP Plus macros,
while those you execute from a ZCL command stream are called ZCL
macros. The structure of these two types of macros is slightly different
and is covered later in this section. You can run Z-MAP Plus macros as
ZCL macros, but you cannot run ZCL macros from Z-MAP Plus.
Z-MAP Plus macros can also be classified as either user-supplied or
Landmark-supplied.
Macros, like ZCL command streams, consist of ASCII text. The first
step in building a macro is to build the ZCL command stream with the
functions you want the macro to perform. You can write the ZCL
command stream with a standard text editor or by using the
Z-MAP Plus Process Logging function. The basic form of the macro is
discussed in the section Macro Structure starting on page 649.
This section covers these topics:
Creating a log file with Z-MAP Plus Tools Process Logging
Creating a macro from a ZCL command stream or Z-MAP Plus

log file
Common errors in user-created macros
Storing macros for use by Z-MAP Plus or ZCL
R2003.12.0
Overview
623
Landmark
The following macro, UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC, illustrates the parts

of a macro.
Macro Name Record
(required)
Comment (optional)
Macro Parameter
Definition Records
(required)
Abstract (optional)
good for
documentation
Prompts (optional)
required for
Z-MAP Plus
execution.
Prompts must be in
the same order as the
parameters!
R2003.12.0
MACRO NAME = UNITTHICKNESS

!
*TOP, INPUT, GRID
MFDTOP, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5
Interval Grid
*BASE, INPUT, GRID
MFDBASE, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5
/ Top of Interval
/ MFD for Top of
/ Base of Interval
/ MFD for Base of
Interval Grid
ISOPACH, OUTPUT, GRID, Isopach Grid / Output Isopach Grid
MFDOUT, MFDNUM, 1, 1, 0, 5
/ MFD for Output Isopach
Grid
!
END PARAMETERS
!
BEGIN ABSTRACT
This macro computes stratigraphic thickness (isopach) for an
interval defined by top and base grids. It uses the top
grid
to determine local dip for trigonometric conversion from
vertical
thickness to isopach.
INPUT
-Top of interval (required)
-Base of interval(required)
-Output grid name (defaults to Isopach Grid)
OUTPUT
-A stratigraphic thickness grid for the interval
END ABSTRACT
!
BEGIN PROMPTS
!
TOP,
Select a top grid for the unit
MFDTOP,
MFD for the top grid
BASE,
Select a base grid for the unit
MFDBASE, MFD for the base grid
ISOPACH, Input a name for Isopach grid
MFDOUT,
MFD for output grid
!
END PROMPTS
Overview: Creating a Macro
624
Landmark
Core
ZCL Commands
(required)
Macro End Record

(required)
SINGLEGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= &TOP,
controlled
GRIDOUT = DIP MAG GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
= &MFDTOP,
controlled
/
C
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
C
OPNAME
= COS,
GRIDIN
= DIP GRID,
GRIDOUT = COS DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= SUBTRACT,
GRIDIN1 = &TOP,
controlled
GRIDIN2 = &BASE,
controlled
GRIDOUT = VERT THICK GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN1
= &MFDTOP,
controlled
MFDIN2
= &MFDBASE,
controlled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME
= MULTIPLY,
GRIDIN1 = VERT THICK GRID,
GRIDIN2 = COS DIP GRID,
GRIDOUT = &ISOPACH,
controlled
MFDOUT
= &MFDOUT,
controlled
/
C
MACRO END:
/
! hard-wired
! user
! hard-wired
! hard-wired
! user-
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
! hard-wired
! user! user! hard-wired
! hard-wired
! user! user-
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-
! user-
Example Macro UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC
R2003.12.0
Overview: Creating a Macro
625
Landmark
Creating a Log File with Z-MAP Plus

A Z-MAP Plus log file records the ZCL process commands for all
functions you execute in Z-MAP Plus while Process Logging is active.
This log file contains a ZCL command stream, so it can be used as the
ZCL commands core of a macro.
1.
Test the macro workflow in Z-MAP Plus.
2.
Make sure appropriate MFDs are attached.
3.
Select Tools Process Logging.
4.
When the Process Logging dialog box appears, click the Logging
Option button and select Begin Logging from the drop-down list.
Enter a file name for the log file, using the default extension .LOG,
as seen in the following example.
Click OK to close the Process Logging dialog box and begin

recording the log file.
5.
Z-MAP Plus records every action you make until you terminate
logging. Carry out the processes you want in the macro.
Executing a Macro While Process Logging Not Recommended
If you record the execution of a macro, the log file contains the macro call,
macro parameter values, and the ZCL process calls the macro makes. This
requires extra editing.
6.
When you finish recording the workflow, turn off the Process
Logger. Select Tools Process Logging, then select Terminate
Logging from the Logging Option popup menu. Click OK to close
the dialog box and stop logging.
The .LOG file now consists of ZCL process commands that will form
the core ZCL for your macro. (See Creating Macros on page 627.)
R2003.12.0
Creating a Log File with Z-MAP Plus: Creating a Macro
626
Landmark
Creating Macros
This section gives you a step-by-step procedure to create a macro from
core ZCL commands. Everyone develops their own approach and style
for building ZCL macros. However, if you are just starting, it is helpful
to know the basic steps in the process. The basic procedure is:
Create the core ZCL process commands using a text editor or

Z-MAP Plus Process Logging.
Naming Macros
You must save the file you create in the text editor or through Process
Logging with a .ZCLMAC extension after the file name. For the program to
recognize files as macros, they must have this extension.
R2003.12.0
Test and debug the ZCL command file.
Convert the core ZCL command stream to an all defaults macro.

When you create the all defaults macro, the first thing you are
prompted to do is fill in the name of the macro. This name must
exactly match the file name you assigned in the first step without
the .ZCLMAC extension. For example, the macro name might be
SURFCORRECT while the file that contains the macro is named
SURFCORRECT.ZCLMAC.
Test the default macro.
Identify parameters within the ZCL command file that should be

a) user controlled, b) hard-wired by you, or c) allowed to default.
Delete from the ZCL command stream ZCL parameters that you
want to default. Set those parameters that you want hard-wired to
your own values.
Select ZCL parameter values that will be user-controlled and

replace with macro parameters.
Build the Parameter Definition section of the macro.
Add an abstract section to the macro (optional).
Add a prompts section to the macro.
Test the macro.
Creating Macros: Creating a Macro
627
Landmark
Steps for Creating a Macro

1.
Create a ZCL Command Stream containing processes that together

carry out the function of the macro. This is the core of the macro.
Z-MAP Plus users can use Process Logging to complete this step;
as described in Creating a Log File with Z-MAP Plus on
page 626.
Example of a ZCL command stream created with Process
Logging:
C
MFDS:
NUMMFDS = 1,
MFD1 = BASIN2.MFD,
/
C
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= UPPER TOP,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
1,
MFDFAULT =
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
0,
MFDFAULT =
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME
= COS,
GRIDIN
= DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
0,
MFDFAULT =
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
/
C
R2003.12.0
628
Landmark
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= SUBTRACT,
GRIDIN1 = UPPER TOP,
GRIDIN2 = UPPER BASE,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN1
=
1,
MFDIN2
=
1,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC
=
2000.0000
,
YINC
=
2000.0000
,
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME
= MULTIPLY,
GRIDOUT = STRAT THICK GRID,
MFDOUT
=
1,
MFDIN1
=
0,
MFDIN2
=
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC
=
2000.0000
,
YINC
=
2000.0000
,
/
C
STOP:
Adding ZCL Processes to the Log File

The MFDS and STOP processes were added to the ZCL command stream
in the log file because they are needed for the next step (testing the macro)
and Process Logging did not add them.
2.
Test and debug the ZCL command file.

Use the ZCL program to execute the ZCL command file. Since our
example command stream was written using Process Logging, it
does not contain errors unless they have been incorrectly edited
into the file. However, a ZCL command stream written with a text
editor often contains syntax errors and must be debugged.
R2003.12.0
629
Landmark
3.
Convert the ZCL Command Stream to an All Defaults Macro.

Rename the command file (or the edited log file created by
Z-MAP Plus Process Logging) as MACRONAME.ZCLMAC
where MACRONAME is a maximum of 16 characters long and
contains no blanks, numbers, or underbars. The file name must
match the name of the text file you created in step 1.
Open the file in a text editor such as vi.
Remove the STOP process from the core ZCL command
stream, as well as any other ZCL processes that will be
executed before the macros is run, such as the MFDS process.
All other processes remain.
MFDS Process in Macro ZCL Commands
If a macro run in Z-MAP Plus contains an MFDS process in the ZCL
commands, the scratch MFD is re-initialized, erasing all temporary
files. To avoid this possible loss of data, it is best to always remove any
MFDS process from a ZCL command stream used as the core of a
macro. MFDs should be attached before the macro is executed.
At the top of the command stream, add the MACRO NAME

record, using the same name as you gave the file when you
renamed it. Macro names have no extensions and can be up to
16 characters long. They cannot contain numbers, blanks or
underbars. For additional information, see Macro Name
Record on page 652.
Immediately following the macro name, add the END
PARAMETERS record.
At the bottom of the ZCL processes, add the MACRO END
process command.
The macro should now work when called, but does not allow you
to specify any parameter values. See the example on the following
page.
R2003.12.0
630
Landmark
Example of initial conversion of a ZCL command stream to an all

defaults macro:
END PARAMETERS
!
! The ZCL core of the Macro follows
!
!
! Note that the MFDS process has been removed. Z-Map Plus
! will already have the MFDs attached when the macro is
run.
!
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= UPPER TOP,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
1,
MFDFAULT =
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
0,
MFDFAULT =
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME
= COS,
GRIDIN
= DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
0,
MFDFAULT =
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
/
R2003.12.0
631
Landmark
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= SUBTRACT,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN1
=
1,
MFDIN2
=
1,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC
=
2000.0000
,
YINC
=
2000.0000
,
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME
= MULTIPLY,
MFDOUT
=
1,
MFDIN1
=
0,
MFDIN2
=
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC
=
2000.0000
,
YINC
=
2000.0000
,
/
C
!
! Note that the STOP process has been removed
! and the MACRO END process has been added.
!
MACRO END:
/
4.
Test the all defaults macro.

You can test the macro by running it from Z-MAP Plus (as
described in Running a Macro in Z-MAP Plus on page 618), or
call it from a ZCL command stream (as described in Running a
Macro from ZCL on page 621). It is a default macro in either
case, so it has no user-defined parameters.
R2003.12.0
632
Landmark
The ZCL command stream used to test the macro might look like
this:
C Attach MFDs
C
MFDS:
NUMMFDS=1, MFD1=TEST.MFD/
C
C Call the macro
C
UNITTHICKNESS:
/
C
STOP:
/
5.
Identify parameters within the ZCL command stream that should

be a) user controlled, b) hard-wired by you, or c) allowed to
default. A good way to do this is to print the default macro and
then use a highlighter or pen to mark up the hard copy of the
macro.
User-controlled parameters are those the user needs to control,
such as input files, output file names, and basic parameters such
as contour interval, for example. This is a difficult and
subjective step; you must put yourself in the place of the macro
users and try to decide what they need to have control over.
User Control of Associated Parameters
When input or output file parameters are to be user-controlled, the
associated MFDIN and MFDOUT parameters must also be usercontrolled. Similarly, if the user-controlled parameter is a FIELD type
parameter, then it follows that the input file and input MFD parameters
must also be user-controlled.
Hard-wired parameter values are those that you do not want the
user to have control over, but that you also do not want to
default. These are generally not parameter values whose
defaults are data-dependent, since hard-wired values do not
change with new input data.
Parameters that you want to allow to default to ZCLs defaults
are those parameters that the user does not need control over.
These are often parameter values whose defaults are datadependent. Or they may be parameter values whose defaults are
not data-dependent, but are satisfactory. Most parameter values
in your macro will fall into this category.
R2003.12.0
633
Landmark
Each parameter/value pair in the example below is marked as

either user-controlled, remove, or hard-wired:
END PARAMETERS
!
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= UPPER TOP,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
1,
MFDFAULT =
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
0,
MFDFAULT =
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME
= COS,
GRIDIN
= DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
0,
MFDFAULT =
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
/
R2003.12.0
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
user controlled
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
634
Landmark
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= SUBTRACT,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN1
=
1,
MFDIN2
=
1,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC
=
2000.0000
,
YINC
=
2000.0000
,
/
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
user-controlled
user-controlled
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
user-controlled
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME
= MULTIPLY,
MFDOUT
=
1,
MFDIN1
=
0,
MFDIN2
=
0,
ZNON
=
0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC
=
2000.0000
,
YINC
=
2000.0000
,
/
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
user-controlled
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
remove-ZCL default
C
MACRO END:
R2003.12.0
635
Landmark
6.
Delete ZCL parameter/value pairs whose values you want to

default. Set those parameter values that you want hard-wired to
your own values.

END PARAMETERS
!
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= UPPER TOP,
controlled
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
=
1,
controlled
/
C
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
C
OPNAME
= COS,
GRIDIN
= DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
R2003.12.0
! hard-wired
! user
! hard-wired
! hard-wired
! user-
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
636
Landmark
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= SUBTRACT,
controlled
controlled
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN1
=
1,
controlled
MFDIN2
=
1,
controlled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME
= MULTIPLY,
controlled
MFDOUT
=
1,
controlled
/
C
MACRO END:
/
R2003.12.0
! hard-wired
! hard-wired
! user! user-
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-
! user-
637
Landmark
7.
Select ZCL parameter values that will be user-controlled and

replace with macro parameters. Replace each identified parameter
value with an ampersand (&) followed by a logical macro
parameter name of up to eight characters. Do not place quotes
around the new string. If the parameter is an input or output
parameter, then the input or output MFD parameter must also be
included as a user-controlled parameter. The UNITTHICKNESS
macro would now look like this:

END PARAMETERS
!
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= &TOP,
controlled
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
= &MFDTOP,
controlled
/
C
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
R2003.12.0
! hard-wired
! user
! hard-wired
! hard-wired
! user-
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
638
Landmark
C
OPNAME
= COS,
GRIDIN
= DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= SUBTRACT,
! hard-wired
GRIDIN1 = &TOP,
! usercontrolled
GRIDIN2 = &BASE,
! usercontrolled
! hard-wired
MFDOUT
=
0,
! hard-wired
MFDIN1
= &MFDTOP,
! usercontrolled
MFDIN2
= &MFDBASE,
! usercontrolled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME = MULTIPLY,
! hard-wired
! hard-wired
! hard-wired
GRIDOUT = &ISOPACH,
! usercontrolled
MFDOUT
= &MFDOUT,
! usercontrolled
/
C
MACRO END:
/
8.
Build the Parameter Definition section of the macro.

Between the MACRO NAME record and the
END PARAMETERS record, insert each macro parameter
name assigned in the previous step on a new line.
Using commas as separators and spaces for alignment, add
other terms for defining each macro parameter; see Parameter
Definition Records on page 652 for specifics.
Place an asterisk (*) in front of the name of each required
parameter. For more information, see Required Parameter
Flag on page 657.
Following the record terminator (/) you can write any descriptive
information you like. These comments are ignored when
executing.
R2003.12.0
639
Landmark
The UNITTHICKNESS macro would now look like this:

*TOP, INPUT, GRID
/
/
*BASE, INPUT, GRID
/
/
Grid
ISOPACH, OUTPUT, GRID, Isopach Grid /
/
END PARAMETERS
!
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= &TOP,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
= &MFDTOP,
/
C
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
C
OPNAME
= COS,
GRIDIN
= DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
R2003.12.0
Top of Interval
MFD for Top of Interval Grid
Base of Interval
MFD for Base of Interval
Output Isopach Grid
MFD for Output Isopach Grid
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
user controlled
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
640
Landmark
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= SUBTRACT,
GRIDIN1 = &TOP,
GRIDIN2 = &BASE,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN1
= &MFDTOP,
MFDIN2
= &MFDBASE,
/
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
user-controlled
user-controlled
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
user-controlled
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME
= MULTIPLY,
GRIDOUT = &ISOPACH,
MFDOUT
= &MFDOUT,
/
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
user-controlled
C
MACRO END:
R2003.12.0
641
Landmark
9.
Add an optional abstract between the end parameters record and

the ZCL commands. (For details, see Abstract on page 663.)
The abstract is useful for documentation, and appears if you run
the macro in Z-MAP Plus.

!
*TOP, INPUT, GRID
/
/
*BASE, INPUT, GRID
/
/
Grid
/
!
END PARAMETERS
!
BEGIN ABSTRACT
Top of Interval
Base of Interval
MFD for Base of Interval
Output Isopach Grid

interval defined by top and base grids. It uses the top grid
to determine local dip for trigonometric conversion from vertical
INPUT
OUTPUT
END ABSTRACT
!
R2003.12.0
642
Landmark
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= &TOP,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
= &MFDTOP,
/
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
user controlled
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
OPNAME
= COS,
GRIDIN
= DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= SUBTRACT,
GRIDIN1 = &TOP,
GRIDIN2 = &BASE,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN1
= &MFDTOP,
MFDIN2
= &MFDBASE,
/
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
user-controlled
user-controlled
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
user-controlled
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME
= MULTIPLY,
GRIDOUT = &ISOPACH,
MFDOUT
= &MFDOUT,
/
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
user-controlled
C
MACRO END:
R2003.12.0
643
Landmark
10. Add a Prompts section to the macro if you have user-controlled

parameters. The prompts section is not used if the macro is run
using a ZCL call. However, it is required if the macro is run within
Z-MAP Plus. See Abstract on page 663 for specifics.
Prompt Order
Prompts must be listed in the same order as the parameters.

!
*TOP, INPUT, GRID
/
/
*BASE, INPUT, GRID
/
/
/
!
END PARAMETERS
!
BEGIN ABSTRACT
Top of Interval
Base of Interval
MFD for Base of Interval Grid
Output Isopach Grid

interval defined by top and base grids. It uses the top grid
to determine local dip for trigonometric conversion from vertical
INPUT
OUTPUT
END ABSTRACT
!
BEGIN PROMPTS
!
TOP,
MFDTOP,
BASE,
MFDOUT,
MFD for output grid
!
END PROMPTS
!
R2003.12.0
644
Landmark
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= &TOP,
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
= &MFDTOP,
/
!
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
user controlled
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-controlled
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
C
/
C
MACRO END:
/
Placement of Prompts for Associated Parameters
The MFDNUM parameter prompt must immediately follow the associated
INPUT or OUTPUT parameter prompt.
The FIELD parameter prompt must immediately follow the associated
INPUT or OUTPUT and MFDNUM parameter prompts.
11. Test the macro again. Follow the procedure in step 4 on page 632.
This time supply parameter values for user-controlled parameters.
If you test the macro in Z-MAP Plus, you are prompted for the
parameter values. If you test the macro in ZCL, include parameter/
value pairs for user-controlled parameters as shown in the
following example:
C Attach MFDs
C
MFDS:
NUMMFDS=1, MFD1=TEST.MFD/
C
C Call the macro
UNITTHICKNESS:
TOP
= STRATTOP,
BASE
= STRATBASE,
ISOPACH= ISOPACH GRID,
MFDOUT = 1 /
C
STOP:
/
R2003.12.0
645
Landmark
Common User Errors

If the macro does not execute, edit the macro at the system level,
checking the file for errors reported. Common errors when writing a
macro include:
R2003.12.0
missing master file prompt for input member file

misspellings
missing commas, colons, quotes or equals signs
missing terminators
wrong use of case: upper or lower
files created by the macro already exist
Common User Errors: Creating a Macro
646
Landmark
Storing and Gaining Access to Macros

Once a macro is built, you must make it accessible to the application.
Z-MAP Plus access is a simple as specifying the directory path to the
macro. ZCL access depends on your hardware system.
Z-MAP Plus Access

Z-MAP Plus lists the macros located in the directory paths specified for
macros. To specify search paths for macros, select Files Directory
Paths in the Z-MAP Plus window. In the Directory Paths dialog box
that appears, use the Macro tab to set the path for the Z-MAP Macro
Library (the macros provided with Z-MAP Plus) and up to four other
directories for user-supplied macros.
R2003.12.0
Storing and Gaining Access to Macros: Creating a Macro
647
Landmark
ZCL Storage and Access

The location and manner of storing macros for ZCL depends on the
type of hardware system you use. The method you use for starting ZCL
affects the way you define the disk location of your macros.
Using the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu

If you are running OpenWorks concurrently with Z-MAP Plus, select
Applications Z-MAP Plus / PowerView from the OpenWorks
Command Menu.
R2003.12.0
648
Landmark
The Z-MAP Plus Command Menu appears. Select Applications

ZCL.
The ZCL window appears:
In the Macros Directory box, enter the absolute path for the disk
location of your macros. In this example, an absolute path location for
Landmark-supplied macros is shown. You can access your own usersupplied macro by entering the correct absolute path in this field.
R2003.12.0
649
Landmark
Using the RZCL Script

If you are not running in the OpenWorks environment or if your system
administrator has set up your account to run ZCL from the ASCII
interface, you will run the RZCL script. You are prompted to enter the
name of the ZCL command file:
Enter the name of the command file
At this prompt, enter the name of the file that contains the ZCL
command stream that calls your macro. You will not be prompted for
the macros directory path. The RZCL script uses the Unix
environmental variable MACUNIT to identify the disk location of a
macro. This variable is set in the RZCL script to default to your current
working directory (for example, ./). If your macro resides in a directory
other than your current working directory, you can do one of the
following:
Copy the macro to your current working directory.
Remove the line from RZCL script that sets MACUNIT. Use the
Unix command setenv to manually set MACUNIT as follows:
setenv MACUNIT absolute directory path
R2003.12.0
650
Landmark
Macro Structure
Overview
This section discusses the different parts of a macro and how a macro is
structured. If you plan to create your own Z-MAP Plus or ZCL macros,
read this section.
The major parts of a macro are summarized below. Each of these parts
is described in detail in the discussion that follows, with special
attention to the terms of the parameter definition record.
Macro name record
Parameter definition records
END PARAMETERS
Abstract: BEGIN ABSTRACT

Abstract (macro description) records
END ABSTRACT
Prompts: BEGIN PROMPTS
Required
Optional
Required
Optional
Optional
Parameter prompt records

END PROMPTS
ZCL commands
MACRO END:
Required
Required
A parameter definition record, abstract record, or ZCL command can

begin in any column. Spaces can be used to align text for easier
reading. All other records start in column 1.
ZCL Reminders
All macro names, parameter names, parameter types, and file types are in
capital letters. Abstracts and prompts may contain lower case letters.
No single record in a macro can exceed 80 characters in length.
Do not use the <Tab> key to align text in a macro; use spaces.
All parameter definition records and ZCL command calls must end with a
record terminator (/). Text that follows the / in the parameter definition record
is comment text.
R2003.12.0
Overview
649
Landmark
The following example shows the UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC macro.

Macro Name Record
(required)
Comment (optional)
Macro Parameter
Definition Records
(required)
Abstract (optional)
good for
documentation
Prompts (optional)
required for
Z-MAP Plus
execution
R2003.12.0

!
*TOP, INPUT, GRID
/ Top of Interval
/ MFD for Top of
Interval Grid
*BASE, INPUT, GRID
/ Base of Interval
/ MFD for Base of
Interval Grid
ISOPACH, OUTPUT, GRID, Isopach Grid / Output Isopach Grid
/ MFD for Output Isopach
Grid
!
END PARAMETERS
!
BEGIN ABSTRACT
interval defined by top and base grids. It uses the top
grid
to determine local dip for trigonometric conversion from
vertical
INPUT
OUTPUT
END ABSTRACT
!
BEGIN PROMPTS
!
TOP,
MFDTOP,
BASE,
MFDOUT,
MFD for output grid
!
END PROMPTS
Overview: Macro Structure
650
Landmark
Core
ZCL Commands
(required)
Macro End Record

(required)
OPNAME
= DIPMAG,
GRIDIN
= &TOP,
controlled
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN
= &MFDTOP,
controlled
/
C
OPNAME
= ATAN,
GRIDIN
= DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
C
OPNAME
= COS,
GRIDIN
= DIP GRID,
MFDOUT
=
0,
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME
= SUBTRACT,
GRIDIN1 = &TOP,
controlled
GRIDIN2 = &BASE,
controlled
MFDOUT
=
0,
MFDIN1
= &MFDTOP,
controlled
MFDIN2
= &MFDBASE,
controlled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME
= MULTIPLY,
GRIDOUT = &ISOPACH,
controlled
MFDOUT
= &MFDOUT,
controlled
/
C
MACRO END:
/
! hard-wired
! user
! hard-wired
! hard-wired
! user-
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
! hard-wired
! hard-wired
! user! user-
!
!
!
!
hard-wired
hard-wired
hard-wired
user-
! user-
Example Macro UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC
R2003.12.0
Overview: Macro Structure
651
Landmark
Parts of a Macro
Macro Name Record
The macro name record must be the first record in the macro. The
macro name record has one of the following forms:
MACRO NAME = DESIRED-MACRO-NAME
MACRO = DESIRED-MACRO-NAME
The macro name does not have an extension like its file name. It can be
a maximum of 16 characters long and can contain no spaces, numbers,
or underbars. The macro name appears in the Z-MAP Plus status area
while the macro runs. As the macro runs, the Z-MAP Plus System
Window displays more details about the macro.
Parameter Definition Records

Parameter Definition records list user-controlled parameters for the
macro and define the following for each parameter:
file types that will be included in list windows that the user sees
when running the macro
error checking parameters and valid data ranges or options for
user-controlled parameters
default values for the user-controlled parameters
The elements of a Parameter Definition record vary depending on the

parameter type. All Parameter Definition records list the actual
parameter name first, followed by the parameter type. Following is a
list of the possible elements contained in a Parameter Definition
Record, a series of tables to illustrate different Parameter Types, and a
detailed description of each possible element.
R2003.12.0
Parts of a Macro: Macro Structure
652
Landmark
Possible Elements of a Parameter Definition Record
R2003.12.0
Element
When Required
Required flag (*)
Optional
Parameter name
Required
Parameter type
Required
COLOR or FONT
Required for color or font widget
File type
Required for parameter types INPUT and

OUTPUT
Field type
Required for parameter type FIELD
Maximum length
Required for parameter types ETEXT and

STRING
Precision value
Required for numeric parameters
Default value
Optional
Range
Required for ETEXT, MFDNUM, color widget
Terminator (/)
Required
Comments
Optional
Options
Required for ETEXT
653
Landmark
Example Macro Parameter Definition Records

Flags
Parameter
Name
GRIDOUT
, OUTPUT
, GRID
FILEOUT
, OUTPUT
, CNTR
RESULTS
, OUTPUT
, DATA
TOPICT
, OUTPUT
, PICTNAME
TOZGF
, OUTPUT
, PICTFILE
FILEOUT
, OUTPUT
, ALL
FAULTOUT
, OUTPUT
, FALT
DATAOUT1
, OUTPUT
, NOTGRID
DATAOUT
, OUTPUT
, DATA+CNTR+FALT+VERT+SSEC /
CONGRID
, INPUT
, GRID
DATAIN
, INPUT
, DATA
FAULTS
, INPUT
, FALT
FILEIN
, INPUT
, GRID+CNTR
MFD1
, INPUT
, MFDFILE
VERTICES
, INPUT
, VERT
ZGFNAME
, INPUT
, PICTFILE
PICTURE
, INPUT
, PICTNAME
AOIFILE
, INPUT
, GRID+DATA
VERTICES
, INPUT
, VERT+FALT
DATAIN
, INPUT
, TEXT
DATAIN
, INPUT
, DATA+CNTR+FALT+VERT+DWEL /
Parameter
Type
ZIMS File Type
Default File
Name
FAULT1
/ Comments
/
/
V-FILE
PICTFILE and PICTNAME
PICTFILE and PICTNAME are not ZIMS member file types. PICTFILE is a
ZGF name, and PICTNAME is a picture name on a ZGF.
R2003.12.0
654
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Flags
Parameter
Type
No. of Words
(4 Bytes)
Default,
Min,
Max
MFDOUT
, MFDNUM ,
1,
1,
0,
MFDIN
, MFDNUM ,
1,
0,
0,
MFDGRID
, MFDNUM ,
1,
1,
0,
MFDFAULT
, MFDNUM ,
0,
0,
HOWMANY
, INTEGER
DATASIZE
, INTEGER
USE
, INTEGER
1,
NCONTOUR
, INTEGER
1,
NUMMFDS
, INTEGER
1,
LINECOLR
, INTEGER
COLOR
XMIN
, REAL
ZNON
, REAL
1,
1.E30
XEXPAND
, REAL
1,
0.0
ZMIN
, REAL
1,
-1.E30
SMOOTH
, REAL
1,
0.2,
0.0,
1.0
MFDIN & MFDOUT Special Rules
All inputs that call data from an MFD must be followed by MFDIN.
All outputs that create a file to be saved in an MFD should be followed by
MFDOUT.
Flags
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Parameter
Type
Field Type
Comments...
INFLD
, FIELD
, 3,
INFLD
, FIELD
, REAL
655
Landmark
Flags
, FIELD
, ALL
LINEYFLD
, FIELD
, ALL
LINELFLD
, FIELD
, CHAR
TEXTFLD
, FIELD
, CHAR
OXFLD
, FIELD
, 4
LINXFLD
, FIELD
, 1
Parameter
Name
Parameter
Type
Number of
Characters
Default,
Min, Max
NAME
, STRING
LUN2
, STRING
20
VALUE1
, STRING
80
RELATION
, STRING
HEADER
, STRING
80
POSITION
, STRING
6,
Flags
R2003.12.0
INFLD
Parameter
Name
Parameter
Type
CENTER
Number of
Characters (n
x4)
Default,
Min, Max
DATATYPE
DATA
FALT
VERT
TEXT
SSEC
XSEC
, ETEXT
, ,1,6
DISCONTN
YES
NO
, ETEXT
4,
1,1,2
COORDSYS
DMS
DECIMAL
DEGREES
GRADS
, ETEXT
16,
1,1,3
656
Landmark
Detailed Descriptions of Parameter Definition Elements

The elements of a parameter definition record, except the required flag,
are separated by commas. Quotes are not used around text strings. Text
that follows the record terminator is considered comment text.
Required Parameter Flag
Parameters that are required are denoted by preceding the parameter
name with an asterisk (*). A parameter that is required for the ZCL
process should be a required parameter in the macro unless a default is
specified in the parameter definition record. Default values for required
parameters are ignored.
Parameter Name
Parameter names may have up to eight characters. Do not use blanks in
the parameter name on the parameter definition record. However,
parameter names in ZCL command records may contain blanks.
Parameter Type
There are eight types of parameter definition records:
INPUT
OUTPUT
MFDNUM
FIELD
REAL
INTEGER
STRING
ETEXT
While the different types of parameter definition records are similar in

structure, each invokes a unique response in ZCL, and the meanings of
some of the term locations vary.
R2003.12.0
657
Landmark
Table 1: Parameter Definition Types and Their Terms

Type
Example and Description
INPUT
* FILEIN , INPUT , DATA+VERT+FALT+XSEC+SSEC+WLOG+DWEL+CNTR /

Use INPUT for selecting an input member file. The next record must be an MFDNUM record so
that ZCL can search all attached MFDs. Z-MAP Plus lists all available member files of the
specified file type. In ZCL, the user types in the member file name. For a list of File Types, see
Appendix B, File and Field Codes.
OUTPUT
* VERTOUT , OUTPUT , VERT,PROFILE VERT 11111

/
Use OUTPUT to create an output member file of the file type specified. The next record must be
an MFDNUM record. For a list of File Types, see Appendix B, File and Field Codes.
MFDNU
M
MFDIN
, MFDNUM ,
MFDFOUT , MFDNUM ,
1, 0, 0, 5
1, 1, 0, 5
/
/
MFDNUM is a special type of parameter definition record; its meaning depends on whether it
follows an INPUT record (first example) or an OUTPUT record (second example). When
MFDNUM follows an INPUT record, the default value is zero, which tells ZCL to search all
attached MFDs for the specified input file; Z-MAP Plus generates a selection list. When
MFDNUM follows an OUTPUT record, Z-MAP Plus creates a popup menu of the attached MFDs
in the same order that they appear in the status area; the default value refers to the MFD in that
position, with zero representing the scratch file.
In either case, use single precision and range extremes of 0 and 5.
FIELD
* ZFLD
, FIELD
Use FIELD for selecting an input field or creating an output field of the specified field type,
Z VALUE in this example. For input field, Z-MAP Plus lists all fields of the appropriate field type
on the selected input file. For a list of Field Type numbers, see Appendix B, File and Field Codes.
REAL
SCALE
, REAL
1,
.03
A REAL number is used for setting values such as x and y limits, scales, etc. Use REAL for all
REAL ZCL parameters except MFD numbers, which use MFDNUM. If a REAL number must be
positive, you may specify a range start of 0.0; a range end would not be necessary. Use double
precision (2) only for those ZCL parameters which are double precision; refer to the ZCL Process
Descriptions.
INTEGER
LINECOLR, INTEGER, COLOR, 1, 25, 0, 255

NCONTOUR, INTEGER,
1, 50, 0, 256 /
An INTEGER number is used for setting whole number values such as number of contours or
color index number. INTEGERs are always single precision, and often have specified defaults and
ranges, as in the examples. Note that the term COLOR, which creates a color button widget, is an
extra term inserted between the parameter type and the precision value.
STRING
DISKFILE, STRING
80
Use STRING for character text that the user must type in, such as the name of an external disk
file, output picture, or output field. The maximum length of the string (80 in the example) must be
divisible by 4 and cannot exceed the maximum length for the parameter as specified in the ZCL
Process Description.
R2003.12.0
658
Landmark
Table 1: Parameter Definition Types and Their Terms (Continued)

Type
Example and Description
ETEXT
DRAW
, ETEXT , 20,
NONE
LINE+FILL
SEISMIC+LINE+FILL
3,
1,
Use ETEXT for a parameter that has a list of specified options. Maximum length is limited as for
STRING. Range extremes are 1 and the number of options (3 in the example); the default value is
the number of an option, counting down the list from 1 at the top (3, or SEISMIC+LINE+FILL, in
the example). Z-MAP Plus creates a popup menu of the options. Use ETEXT for a ZCL parameter
that has options listed in the Process Description. Note that the record terminator is only used on
the parameter definition record; no terminator is used for the options list records.
The parameter type is used by ZCL to error check the users input to the
macro. If the value specified for a parameter does not match the
parameter type, an error report appears and ZCL stops without
executing commands. *
Color Button Widget
To generate a color button in a Z-MAP Plus dialog box, include the
term COLOR between the parameter type and the precision value. The
color button displays the default value color index.
Default color index displayed
Term for generating

a color button
MQTRCLR, INTEGER, COLOR, 1, 1, 0, 255
Range of acceptable values

Single precision
Font Widget
To generate a font popup menu in a Z-MAP Plus dialog box, include
the term FONT between the parameter type and the precision value.
Note that you must still specify options.
MNTSFONT, ETEXT, FONT, 8, 1, 1, 5

PLAIN
Range of options
SIMPLEX
Default option
COMPLEX
Maximum
number
of
characters for each optio
ITALIC
Term for generating the font popup menu
DUPLEX
*For information on debugging a ZCL command stream, see page 2-8 of the ZCL Operators Manual.
R2003.12.0
659
Landmark
File Type
If the parameter type is INPUT or OUTPUT, the next term in the
parameter definition record identifies the supported file types.
Z-MAP Plus uses this information to generate a selection list. ZCL uses
this information during the error checking pass. If the parameter value
does not match the specified file type, an error report appears and ZCL
stops without executing commands.
Debugging
For information about debugging ZCL command streams, see the ZCL
Operators Manual.
Table 2: File Type Options by Input Type
R2003.12.0
Input/Output Type
File Type Options
Member file of an MFD
Any Z-MAP Plus file type; see the

Data File Type Codes Table, on B-1.
Two or more file types connected by
plus signs (+); see the example on
page 653
ALL, for all file types
NOT a file type, such as NOTGRID
ZGF graphics file
PICTFILE
Picture in a ZGF graphics

file
PICTNAME
660
Landmark
Field Type
The term following the FIELD parameter type identifies the supported
field type. Z-MAP Plus uses this information to generate a selection
list. ZCL uses this information during the error checking pass. If the
parameter value does not match the specified field type, an error report
appears and ZCL stops without executing commands.
Table 3: Supported Field Types
Field Type
Description
A specific Z-MAP Plus field type
CHAR
A field of FORTRAN data type CHAR
REAL
A field of FORTRAN data type REAL
ALL
All Z-MAP Plus field types
Maximum Length
The term following the ETEXT or STRING parameter type identifies
the maximum number of characters allowed in the parameter value.
This number must be a multiple of 4, and cannot exceed the maximum
length for the parameter as specified in the ZCL Process description.
Precision Value
The term following the REAL, INTEGER, or MFDNUM parameter
type designates single precision (1) or double precision (2). Double
precision can only be used for parameters that are designated double
precision in the ZCL process description.
R2003.12.0
661
Landmark
Default Value
The default value is used when the macro user does not specify a macro
parameter value. If no value is specified by the macro parameter default
or the user, then the ZCL parameter default is used if one exists.
If the optional default value is omitted and a range is specified, use a
space and comma to hold the place of the default value. For example:
NCONTOUR, INTEGER ,
1,
, 0, 256 /
If there is no range specified, no place holder is needed, as in the

FIELD records in the example on page 653. If you want ZCL to
calculate a default, include the place holder comma before the
terminator; for example:
CONMIN
, REAL
1,
Range
Range terms identify the supported lower and upper limits for the
parameter value. If a value is outside these limits, ZCL reports the error
and does not execute commands. You can specify only a lower range
limit. For example, a lower limit of 0.0 specifies a range of all positive
numbers. ZCL has default ranges for some process parameters, but it is
best to include any applicable range limits when you write a macro.
End Record Symbol
The parameter definition record is terminated by a slash (/). Text that
follows the / in the parameter definition record is comment text.
Options
Whenever the Parameter Type is ETEXT, a list of options follows the
parameter definition record terminator. See descriptions and examples
in the table on page 659 and Font Widget on page 659.
R2003.12.0
662
Landmark
Comments
Text that follows the / in the parameter definition record is comment
text, typically used to describe the parameter.
Comment records between parameter definition records are identified
by an exclamation point (!) in column 1; subsequent characters in the
record are ignored by ZCL. There is no record terminator. Do not use
the letter C to start a comment line in the Parameter Definition portion
of a macro.
End Parameters
The record following the last parameter definition record must read:
END PARAMETERS
This line has no record terminator.
Abstract
The abstract summarizes the macro. It is printed out in ZCL or in the
Status/Report window in Z-MAP Plus when the macro is accessed.
The abstract may be written in any form. A suggested format is:
BEGIN ABSTRACT
purpose, explanation
INPUT: -list of input requirements and options
RESULT: description of result
END ABSTRACT
The BEGIN ABSTRACT and END ABSTRACT lines must be in

capital letters and start in column 1. These lines have no record
terminator. The abstract may be a maximum of 20 lines with 80
characters each. Comment records in this section must begin with a !
(exclamation point) followed by a blank.
Prompts
Prompts appear in the status area or a new dialog box if the macro is
executed in Z-MAP Plus. Prompts are ignored if the macro is executed
from ZCL. The format for the prompts section of a macro is:
BEGIN PROMPTS
Parameter prompt records

END PROMPTS
The BEGIN PROMPTS and END PROMPTS lines must be in capital

letters and start in column 1. These lines have no record terminator.
R2003.12.0
663
Landmark
Parameter Prompt Records

Parameter prompt records determine the order and number of
parameters in Z-MAP Plus dialog boxes. Example parameter prompt
records:
CONINT
DATAIN,
MFDIN,
MFDIN,
MFDIN,
,Contour interval
Input the Data File Name
dummy
,
The parameter name is followed by a comma and the prompt that

appears in Z-MAP Plus. Spaces on either side of the comma may be
used to align text. The prompt starts with the first non-blank character
after the comma. The prompt can contain a maximum of 44 characters.
No record terminator is used.
A prompt for the source MFD must immediately follow a prompt for an
input dataset. The MFD prompt does not appear, but if it is omitted the
input dataset prompt does not appear.
A prompt for selecting a field must come after the prompt for selecting
the input dataset MFD.
New Dialog Box Control
A macro running in Z-MAP Plus automatically generates a new
selection list dialog box for each INPUT/MFDNUM parameter type set
or FIELD type parameter and a new dialog box for every nine
parameters of any other type. To control how many parameters appear
in a dialog box, insert a NEWPANEL record. No record terminator is
used. The maximum number of parameters per dialog box is still nine.
R2003.12.0
664
Landmark
For example:
Selection list
generates for each
input dataset
These parameters
appear in one
dialog box in this
order
These parameters
appear in one
dialog box in this
order
These parameters
appear in one
dialog box in this
order
These parameters
appear in one
dialog box in this
order
Selection list
generates
These parameters
appear in one
dialog box in this
order
BEGIN PROMPTS
GRIDIN ,Input GRID name
MFDIN
,MFD number for the Input Grid
PROFILES,Name of the PROFILE file
MFDPROF ,MFD number for the Profiles
SMOOTH, Contouring Refinement
CONINT ,Contour Interval or Increment
CONMIN ,Minimum Contour Level
CONMAX ,Maximum Contour Level
NCONTOUR,Number of Contours to be drawn
NEWPANEL
LABLRATE,Rate at which to LABEL contours
LABLSIZE,Size of the LABELS on contours
LABLCOLR,Contour Label Color INDEX number
BOLDRATE,Rate at which contours are BOLD
HACHRATE,Rate at which contours are HACHURED
DASHRATE,Rate at which contours are DASHED
NEWPANEL
LINCLRTP,Contour Line Color Selection method
STARTCLR,Color index of FIRST contour line
HILTCOLR,Color index of HIGHLIGHTED contour
LINERATE,Rate at which to CHANGE Line color
NEWPANEL
COLORFIL,Include COLORFILLED contours ?
CNTRFILL,Use the Contour LINES to generate colorfill?
POSTCNTR,Draw Contour Lines on the Picture?
COLORBAR,COLORBAR location (if any)
FILLCOLR,Color index of FIRST FILL color
FILLRATE,Rate at which to CHANGE Fill color
FILBELOW,Colorfill below lowest contour ?
FILABOVE,Colorfill above highest contour ?
POLYGONS,Name of the POLYGON file
MFDPOLY ,MFD number for the Polygons
POLYCLIP,Clip INSIDE or OUTSIDE the polygon ?
BLNKRATE,Rate to BLANK contours with high gradient ?
BLNKDIST,Minimum allowed Distance for Blanking ?
PLOTPROF,Draw the Profile Lines on the Picture ?
PROFCOLR,Color for the Profile Lines
PLOTPOLY,Draw the Polygon on the Picture ?
POLYCOLR,Color for the Polygon
END PROMPTS
NEWPANEL records were used to divide the prompts into logical

groups. Since the input polygon file parameter automatically generates
a new selection list dialog box, NEWPANEL records were not needed.
R2003.12.0
665
Landmark
ZCL Commands
After END PROMPTS is the core of the macro the ZCL commands
that substitute macro parameter values for ZCL process parameter
values.
For more information about ZCL, see the ZCL Operators Manual.
This volume is available in printed, hardcopy format only.
R2003.12.0
666

Z Macros

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Z Macros

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Macro

Macro Reference Manual

Part No. 161336

2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation

Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL

Macro Reference Manual

Types of Macros ..........................................................................................

About This Guide..............................................................................................

Purpose of and Audience for This Guide..................................................

Contents of This Guide...............................................................................

Typographic Conventions ..........................................................................

Related Documentation ..............................................................................

Macro Descriptions ...............................................................................

Macro Description Table ..................................................................................

Macros Called by Menu Options .....................................................................

Macros Menu ...............................................................................................

Macros: Quick-look Menu .....................................................................

Macros: Graphics Menu ........................................................................

Macros: Operations Menu.....................................................................

Macros: Geophysics Menu ...................................................................

Macros: Utilities Menu...........................................................................

Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL

Macro Descriptions ..........................................................................................

Information Included in Macro Descriptions ............................................

Macro Name ...........................................................................................

Technical Notes .....................................................................................

Prompt and Parameter Descriptions....................................................

Macro Parameter ..............................................................................

Options for ETEXT Type Parameter................................................

Data Type ..........................................................................................

ZCL Processes Used .............................................................................

Additional Information ................................................................................

Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL

Summary of the ENVELOPE Macro...........................................................

Understanding the ENVELOPE Macro ......................................................

Modeling the Envelope Control Parameters .............................................

Discontinuity Use ..................................................................................

Discontinuity Generalization Tolerance ..............................................

Quantized Contours ..............................................................................

Map Design Parameters ........................................................................

Framework Logic ........................................................................................

Minimal Input Requirements.................................................................

Gross Rock Volume Modeling ..............................................................

Graphical Outputs .................................................................................

Other Volumetric Evaluations ....................................................................

Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL

Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL

Preparing Lease Polygon (Vertex) Files ..............................................

Segment I.D. Field ............................................................................

Area Identification Field...................................................................

Color Code Field...............................................................................

Preparing Lease Identification (Text) Files..........................................

Text Fields (Required)......................................................................

Area Identification Field (Required)................................................

Area Symbol Code Field (Optional) ................................................

Segment I.D. Field (Optional) ..........................................................

Color Code Fields (Optional)...........................................................

Lease Drawing Hints .............................................................................

Activating Shared Lease Attributes .....................................................

Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL

Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL

Production Geology ..............................................................................

Basin Studies .........................................................................................